Aqua 1

AQUA
Materials and Cross Sections

Version 16.13
E SOFiSTiK AG, Oberschleissheim, 2012
AQUA
This manual is protected by copyright laws. No part of it may be translated, copied or reproduced, in any form or by any means, without written permission from SOFiSTiK AG. SOFiSTiK reserves the right to modify or to release new editions of this manual. The manual and the program have been thoroughly checked for errors. However, SOFiSTiK does not claim that either one is completely error free. Errors and omissions are corrected as soon as they are detected. The user of the program is solely responsible for the applications. We strongly encourage the user to test the correctness of all calculations at least by random sampling.

1 1.1. 1.2. 1.2.1. 1.2.2. 1.2.3. 1.2.4. 1.2.5. 1.2.6. 1.3. 2 2.1. 2.2. 2.3. 2.4. 2.5. 2.6. 2.7. 2.8. 2.8.1. 2.8.2. 2.8.3. 2.8.4. 2.9. 2.10. 2.11. 2.12. 3 3.1. 3.2. 3.3. 3.4. 3.5. 3.6. 3.7. 3.8. 3.9. 3.10. General. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Task Description . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Types of sections . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Static Properties of Cross Sections . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Standard Cross Sections . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Freely Defined Thinwalled Cross Sections . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Freely Defined Solid Cross Sections . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Freely Defined FE Cross Sections . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Selection of Section Type . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Creating variants of sections . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Theoretical Principles. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Materials . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Holes and Composite Sections . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Coordinate System. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Normal Stresses. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Effective Width. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Warping and Shear Stresses . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Torsional Moment of Inertia. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Shear Stresses in Solid Sections. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Equivalent Hollow Cross Sections . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Shear Cuts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Force Method . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Displacement Method . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Shear Stresses in Thin Walled Sections. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Plastic forces. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Program Limits . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Bibliography. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Input Description. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Input Language. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Units . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Input Records. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . CTRL Control of Analysis . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Materials. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . NORM Default Design Code . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . MATE Material Properties . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . MAT General Material Properties . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . MLAY Layered Material . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . NMAT Nonlinear Material . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . i
AQUA
11 11 11 11 11 12 12 12 13 13 21 21 21 22 23 25 25 27 28 28 28 210 213 215 215 216 216 31 32 32 34 39 313 315 332 338 339 340
AQUA

341 341 344 345 347 348 350 357 361 362 363 365 366 369 369 372 375 376 377 380 382 383 386 387 388 389 389 390 390 390 390 391 391 392 392 393 393 393 393
3.10.1. Invariants of the Stress Tensor . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3.10.2. Material Parameters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3.10.3. Nonlinear State Variables (hardening parameters) . . . . . . . . 3.10.4. Material Law VMIS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3.10.5. Material Law DRUC . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3.10.6. Material Law MOHR . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3.10.7. Hardening Plasticity Soil Model GRAN . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3.10.8. Material Law SWEL . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3.10.9. Material Law FAUL . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3.10.10.Material Law ROCK . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3.10.11. Material Law MISE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3.10.12.Material Law GUDE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3.10.13.Material Law LADE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3.10.14.Material Law MEMB . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3.10.15.User Defined Material Laws . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3.11. BMAT Elastic Support / Interface . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3.12. HMAT Material Constants HYDRA . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3.12.1. Hydraulic Parameters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3.12.2. Heat Conduction. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3.12.3. Hydration of Concrete . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3.13. CONC Properties of Concrete . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3.13.1. Eurocode / DIN 10451 / OEN B 4700 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3.13.2. DIN 1045 old / DIN 4227 / DIN 18806: . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3.13.3. NORM B 4700 / B 4750 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3.13.4. Swiss Standard SIA . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3.13.5. French BAEL99 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3.13.6. Spanish EHE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3.13.7. Swedish BBK . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3.13.8. Danish DS 411 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3.13.9. Norwegian NS 3473 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3.13.10.Italian design codes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3.13.11. Hungarian design codes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3.13.12.British Standard BS 8110 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3.13.13.American concrete institute ACI 318M . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3.13.14.Brasilian NBR 61182003 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3.13.15.Australian AS 3600 and New Zealand NZS 3101 . . . . . . . . . . 3.13.16.Japanese Standards . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3.13.17.Chinese Standards . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3.13.18.Indian Standards IS / IRC . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . ii

3.13.19.Egyptian Standard ET RC2001 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3.13.20.Russian Standard SNIP . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3.13.21.Linear Elastic Concrete . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3.14. STEE Properties of Metals . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3.14.1. Structural Steel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3.14.2. Aluminium alloy . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3.14.3. Reinforcing and Prestressing Steel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3.14.4. Relaxation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3.14.5. Bond Properties . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3.14.6. StressStrain Relations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3.15. TIMB Timber and Fibre Materials . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3.16. MASO Masonry / Brickwork . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3.17. SSLA StressStrain Curves . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3.18. MEXT Extra Material Constants . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3.18.1. AIR Air Contact Ratio . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3.18.2. CNOM Nominal Cover . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3.18.3. CRW Crack width . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3.18.4. KR Equivalent roughness . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3.18.5. TEMP Temperature environment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3.19. BORE Bore Profile with Beddings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3.20. BLAY Layer of the Soil Strata . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3.21. BBAX Axial Beddings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3.22. BBLA Lateral Beddings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3.23. SVAL Cross Section Values . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3.24. SREC Rectangle, Tbeam, Plate . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3.25. SCIT Circular and Tube Sections . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3.26. TUBE Circular and Annular Steel Cross Sections . . . . . . . . . . 3.27. CABL Cable Sections . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3.28. SECT Freely defined Cross Sections . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3.28.1. Parametric Sections . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3.28.2. Import of FESections . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3.29. CS Construction Stages . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3.30. SV Additional Cross Section Properties . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3.31. POLY Polygonal CrossSection Element / Blockout . . . . . . . 3.32. VERT Polygon Vertices in Absolute Coordinates . . . . . . . . . . 3.33. CIRC Circular Cross Section Elements . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3.34. CUT Shear and Partial Sections . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3.35. PANE ThinWalled Cross Section Element . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3.36. PLAT ThinWalled Cross Section Element . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . iii
AQUA
394 394 395 397 398 3109 3112 3121 3122 3123 3125 3132 3134 3137 3137 3137 3137 3138 3138 3139 3140 3143 3145 3148 3151 3156 3158 3159 3163 3167 3170 3171 3173 3175 3177 3179 3181 3187 3190
AQUA
3.37. 3.38. 3.39. 3.40. 3.41. 3.42. 3.43. 3.44. 3.45. 3.46. 3.47. 3.48. 3.49. 3.50. 3.51. 3.52. 3.53. 4 4.1. 4.2. 4.3. 4.4. 4.5. 4.6. 4.7. 4.8. 4.9. 5 5.1. 5.2. 5.3. 5.4. 5.5. 5.6. 5.7. 5.8.

3193 3195 3205 3207 3208 3210 3211 3214 3217 3218 3220 3222 3224 3226 3228 3229 3230 41 41 41 46 47 48 412 416 417 417 51 52 53 55 511 519 530 534 541
WELD Welded Shear Connection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . PROF Rolled Steel Shapes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . SPT Points for Stresses . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . NEFF Non effective parts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . SFLA Forces Work Laws . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . WPAR Parameters for Wind Loading . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . WIND Coefficients for Wind Loading . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Reinforcement. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . RF Single Reinforcement . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . LRF Line Reinforcement . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . CRF Circular Reinforcement . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . CURF Perimetric Reinforcement . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . TVAR Template Variables . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . INTE Interpolation or Cloning of Sections . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . IMPO Import of Data . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . EXPO Ansi Export of Data . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . ECHO Extent of Output . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Description of Output. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Information about the Design Code . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Material Properties . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Bedding Profiles . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Overview of the Cross Section Values and Types . . . . . . . . . . . Cross Section Properties . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Cross Section Elements . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Wind Coefficients . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Integral Equation Method . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Spring Characteristic Curves . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Examples . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Materials. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Standard Sections. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . TBeam with Effective Width. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Polygonal Column Cross Section. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Polygonal Cross Section with Inner Perimeter. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Polygonal Cross Section with Interpolation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Thinwalled Steel Box. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Composite Section. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . iv

1 General.
AQUA
1.1.
Task Description
AQUA calculates the properties of cross sections of any shape and made out of any material. The cross section properties for a static analysis are determined, as well as characteristic magnitudes for the calculation of normal and shear stresses. Cross sections need to be defined before input of the static system or the dimensioning with AQB. After definition with AQUA, the cross sections can be represented graphically with AQUP. There are four types of cross sections, depending on the complexity of the design task. Without a licence for AQUA only the first two types may be defined (AQUA light).
1.2. 1.2.1.
Types of sections Static Properties of Cross Sections
All static properties of cross sections are directly specified. This includes shear deformation areas and stress resistance values. The values may be taken from other cross sections with a multiplication factor. These cross sections are mainly used in the static calculations. Their usage in AQB is strongly restricted.
1.2.2.
Standard Cross Sections
A standard cross section (Rolled steel shapes, Rectangle, Tbeam, annular sections, cables) is always defined with a single command. All cross sectional properties, including the torsional moment of inertia, are available. Due to the known geometric structure, most of the property values may be calculated in a direct way, allowing to skip the time consuming detailed analysis of the shear or plastic resistance only available with an AQUA license. In many cases it is also intended to have these simpler values taken from tabulated data in the literature. On the other side variability and locations of design points are thus limited. A detailed analysis or a combination with other cross section parts is only possible for the rolled steel shapes. Version 16.13
11
AQUA
1.2.3.

Freely Defined Thinwalled Cross Sections
A freely defined thinwalled cross section may contain any number of thin elements, whose thickness is much smaller comparative to its length. A thin element assumes that the variation of the normal stress and most shear stresses over the thickness are negligible. This has the consequence that the moment of inertia about the weak axis also vanishes. Available elements are panels, standard steel shapes and welded joints, as well as reinforcements. Section moduli for all stresses are available at all points of the cross section. Torsional moment of inertia and warping resistance, as well as centre of shear and shear deformation areas, are determined for open or closed shapes, but they can also be specified explicitly for special cases. Composite cross sections can be defined.
1.2.4.
Freely Defined Solid Cross Sections
A freely defined solid cross section consists of any number of outer and inner perimeters in the form of circles or polygons, as well as of reinforcement elements. Structural steel shapes can be integrated. Section moduli for all stresses are only available at distinct points of the cross section. The torsional moment of inertia, the centre of shear and the shear deformation areas can be calculated, or they can be input separately. The warping resistance can not be determined. Composite sections or effective widths of the polygons can be defined.
1.2.5.
Freely Defined FE Cross Sections
A freely defined FE cross section will be imported from a FE mesh available in a separate external data base. Stress points, reinforcement elements or shear cuts may be added then. The import may also activate a temperature field for the section (e.g. hot design). All sectional values including warping are evaluated. Section moduli for all forces and moments are available for all element mid points. Composite sections may be defined.
12
Version 16.13

1.2.6. Selection of Section Type
AQUA
The user has to decide on his own authority, which type of sectional description to choose. Due to the established restrictions a standard cross section may have more sectional data available than a poorly defined general cross section. A thin walled section has much in common with a standard frame analysis, while the solid section requires a continua solution. This means that the simplifications of the thin walled approach allow a faster, more robust and more extensive solution, but neglects local effects, which may become visible within a continua solution with integral equations or finite elements. For example it is to be noted, that for a thin hollow box, the shear stress of the continua solution is not really constant across the web thickness and may have higher intensities at the corners which might require a smoothing of the contour. On the other side a thin walled section has problems to take account of the positive effect of the fillets of a thin rolled steel shape which has a considerable contribution to the torsional strength. The checks for the b/t ratio for steel sections are much more easily performed with a thin walled section and the modelling of discrete dowels is only possible with this type of approach. In general problems have to be expected if a section is not modelled with the optimum method. Especially very thin plates with stiffeners modelled as polygons need a very high numerical effort.
1.3.
Creating variants of sections
Due to the fact that most cross sections are build up according to certain rules, AQUA supplies several definition possibilities for these instances: You may describe the section via CADINP variables within a block, which is then used multiple times. You may interpolate between two sections linearly You can define a cross section template consisting of several construction points. Other points are referenced hierarchically to those original points. You can then generate other cross sections by changing these points. You may describe the position of those construction points by a 3D model with curved reference lines. Version 16.13
13
AQUA
It is also possible for AQUA to update all interpolated or otherwise generated sections with a single command (INTE).
14
Version 16.13

2
2.1.
AQUA
Theoretical Principles.
Materials
Properties of materials must be distinguished according to whether they are to be kept as close as possible to real values (e.g. for dynamic calculations) or to be used with a safety coefficient for calculating an ultimate loadbearing capacity. A small, but subtile contradiction is given by the fact, that many design codes use a factor of 10.0 to convert the density of a material [t/m3] into the weight [kN/m3]. To avoid any confusion about that SOFiSTiK has established the following rules: All weights have to be specified as the 10 time value of the mass, as it is also done in the Eurocode, this value will be saved to the database. Thus masses for dynamic or thermic analysis will be always detemined with a factor of 0.1. If the design code or the user allows for more exact loadings, the factor of the self weight has to be defined according to the locally effective value of the gravity (e.g. 0.981 instead of 1.0). Whereas the safety factors were formerly assigned moreorless at random, sometimes to the load and sometimes to the material, more recent regulations (Eurocode) provide a clearer separation between safety factors for the loads and factors for the material. Since the material safety factors still depend on the nature of the load or the type of design, AQUA generates and stores only the genuine properties of the material. However, AQUA accounts for some safety factors which are independent of the particular loading case, such as long term reduction factors. Nevertheless, a safety coefficient can be entered in AQUA for each material; this is used in AQUA for calculating the full plastic section forces and moments, and can be used in AQB for the strain checks.
2.2.
Holes and Composite Sections
With version 2012 the treatment of holes has been redesigned. While older versions required to specify a hole as a special polygon with the type hole or by a negative radius of a circle, any type of required hole will be generated now Version 16.13
21
AQUA
automatically if poylgons or circles overlap. A true hole is now defined with material number 0. To avoid anay ambiguities, some rules have to be followed however: A polygon/circle may create a hole in another area only if it has a different material number and at least one vertex of the periphery within the other area. If a polygon/circle is completely within another area, it will always create a hole, if the areas overlap partly the sequence of the input will decide: The area defined last will be considered in front of and will create a hole in the area laying behind.
2.3.
Coordinate System.
Cross sections are described according to DIN 1080 in the local yz coordinate system of the beam. Here the xaxis points in the longitudinal direction of the bar. The observer is looking in general at the positive boundary of the section (from the end of the bar to the beginning). The coordinate system of the section is identical with the local beam coordinate system, i.e. the local xaxis is along the beam on the line between the nodes, the y and the zaxis are right handed perpendicular to it. The zaxis defines the main bending direction and is in general oriented downwards in the gravity direction. For the description of the forces and moments and the support conditions, three points along the beam have to be distinguished within a section: Beam axis (0) this point may be given either by the centroids of the sections (centric beam) or it is defined by the origin of the sectional coordinate system. (beam with a reference axis). Support conditions in the nodes thus are always specified for the beam axis position! Center of gravity (S) this point is the reference for the normal force and the bending moments shear center (M) this point is the reference for the transverse shear force and the torsional moment. The section will rotate about that point in general. If we have a rotation about a fixed point (e.g. by a bracing) this point has to be specified explicitly and it will coincide with the beam axis in many cases.
22
Version 16.13
AQUA
Deviations between these points will create changes in teh moments between support and end of beam. On the other side it is possible to describe a complete geometry with any eccentricities and unsymmetrical haunched beams and construction stages with ease.
S M
Coordinate system x, y, z y, z Local beam coordinate system, freely selectable, is defined relative to the global coordinate system with the beam. sectional coordinate system for minimum moment of inertia (=coordinate system shifted to the centre of gravity)
For rotations the sign is always defined by the rotation about the local xaxis. This is clockwise if you look in the direction of the beam and it is counter clockwise if looking on the positive face. Sections will be saved in the database with the periphery in that same orientation. The sign of the radius of a circular arc is defined positive if the area is increased compared to the secant, and it is negative if the area is decreased as in the case of a fillet.
2.4.
Normal Stresses.
The loadbearing behaviour of a generic bar without foundation according to 1st order theory, yet with warping, can be described with a differential equation matrix: Version 16.13
23
AQUA

Fx Fy Fz Fw p x v II x Fy Fyy Fyz Fyw IV py v y E @ + IV Fz Fyz Fzz Fzw v p z z IV I Fw Fyw Fzw Fww x m x ) GI t x
(1)
with the following definitions: vx, vy, vz x px, py, pz mx displacements parallel and perpendicular to the bar rotation about the axis of the bar loads parallel and perpendicular to the bar torsional load
The rest of the parameters are static properties of the cross section (geometrical area moments). Since it is impractical to incorporate all of the static properties into the calculation, certain standardisations are normally adopted: The axial force refers to the centre of gravity of the beam Fy = Fz = 0 (2)
Bending takes place about the principal axes Fyz = 0 Warping can occur freely in the cross section Fw = 0 (4) (3)
The torsional moment and the shear forces refer to the centre of shear. Fyw = Fzw = 0 (5)
Conversely, the conditions in (2) through (5) can be used in determining the centre of gravity, the orientation of the principal axes, the free moduli of warping and the centre of shear. The determination of the area moments is simple, and is not described in more detail. The next paragraph will deal with the more complex calculation of the normalized warping function w. The normal stresses of a bar cross section can be described by means of Swains expression and the normalized warping: s x +
My Iz ) M z Iyz M z Iy * My Iyz M N ) z * y ) b w A CM I y I z * I 2 I y I z * I 2 yz yz
(6)
24
Version 16.13
AQUA
In stress analysis, there is no problem in dealing with rotated principal axes. When analysing a frame structure, however, one must start, as a rule, by rotating the cross section coordinate system to coincide with the principal axes. STAR2 does this on its own in case of threedimensional structures. In special cases, AQUA can also rotate the cross section to coincide with the principal axes. In such case however, the local yaxis should then be rotated in SOFiMSHA with the same amount in the reverse direction.
2.5.
Effective Width.
The socalled effective widths are used in literature for modelling the effects which derive from the diaphragm action of the plate of a Tbeam or a box cross section. The concept of an equivalent substitute width with constant normal stress naturally demands different approaches depending on the task at hand (statics, design). AQUA is able to define the noneffective areas directly by means of polygonal elements. AQUA then stores the cross section values for the total cross section as well as for the effective cross section. Static analysis usually refers to the effective parts, whereas prestressing refers to the total cross section. In STAR2, however, this can be explicitly switched one way or the other. Also, when dimensioning with AQB, the user can refer to the total cross section at various occasions. The effective widths are not taken into consideration during shear stress calculations due to many consistency reasons.
2.6.
Warping and Shear Stresses
In case of warping as well as shear stressing due to torsion and shear force, the cross section no longer remains plane. A deflection w occurring at the cross section in the longitudinal direction of the bar causes shear stresses. All the problems of the elasticity theory can be analysed by use of the force method or the displacement method. While the force method is frequently used in calculations by hand and for nonlinear problems, the displacement method is better suited for processing with the computer. Both procedures are implemented in AQUA for solid cross sections. Certain simplifications of the following equations can be made in case of thinwalled sections, which facilitate a quick solution for all tasks. These sections are therefore always analysed by the matrix displacement method. Version 16.13
25
AQUA
A general formulation for the cross section warping w according to the displacement method conforms to the equilibrium condition G @
yw ) zw + - sx
2 2 2 2
(7)
and the boundary condition t xy n y ) t xz nz + 0 where the shear stresses are given by t xy + G @ t xz + G @ *z@ w y x
x
(8)
(9)
)y@ w z x
x
(10)
The right side of (7) can be computed for example by (6). Assuming constant normal force and constant cross section properties, one gets: V I * V y Iyz V y Iy * V z I yz M t2 s x + z z z ) y ) w 2 CM x Iy Iz * I2 I I * I y z yz yz (11)
These equations will be approximated by AQUA either with the Integral equation method or the finite element method. For the Saint Venants torsion problem (x/x=1) the right side of (7) is identical to zero and the following boundary condition applies: w + z @ ny * y @ nz n (12)
26
Version 16.13

2.7. Torsional Moment of Inertia.
AQUA
The torsional moment of inertia according to the displacement method It is derived by It +
y ) z * wy * wz dF
2 2 2 2
(13)
As long as AQUA does not solve the differential equation (7), only an estimate of the torsional moment of inertia is possible. The last equation shows that the polar moment of inertia can be substituted for It in case of warpfree cross sections. It v I p + Iy ) I z (14)
For all cross sections (14) provides an upper limit, which e.g. is about 10% above the exact value for a square. A better approximation was given by Saint Venant: IT + A4 4 @ p2 @ Iy ) I z (15)
This value is exact for circular and elliptical cross sections. For compact solid cross sections this value provides a good approximation. In case of open sections, however, it is sensible to consider a correction according to Wienecke /2/ in consideration of the cross section perimeter, which has been implemented in AQUA. Deviations in rectangular cross sections: a/b exact Saint Venant Wienecke 1/1 0.140 0.152 0.124 2/1 0.458 0.486 0.418 10/1 3.13 3.01 3.24 S b4
For hollow cross sections with more than 30 percent inner perimeters, an equivalent hollow cross section based on the external and internal perimeters is used for a more refined estimate. For composite sections this formula (15) is used for each partial cross section and the components are added. Version 16.13
27
AQUA

Shear Stresses in Solid Sections.
2.8.
The calculation of shear stresses for solid sections in AQUA requires that the user specifies the method to be used and the positions that have to be checked. The problem is extremely complicated and can be solved with a variety of methods. This is controlled by the CTRL option STYP: CTRL STYP 0 CTRL STYP 1 force method displacement method only for It and location of shear centre (default for concrete and concrete composits) displacement method for torsion force method for shear displacement method for torsion and shear shear deformation areas are determined (default for steel, wood and other composits)
CTRL STYP 2
CTRL STYP 3
In postcracking (state II) analysis, AQB always employs the force method with proportional axial force. In case of composite cross sections options 2 and 3 should be used with caution. The input of explicit shear sections is required as a rule.
2.8.1.
Equivalent Hollow Cross Sections
While DIN 1045 still allows the calculation of torsional stresses according to state I, both DIN 4227 and EC2 allow for their calculation on an equivalent hollow cross section. As long as AQUA does not use the integral equation method, the force method is used in conjunction with the definition of an equivalent hollow cross section.
2.8.2.
Shear Cuts
The user normally uses the command CUT to define a so called cut through the sectional geometry where a check of the shear stresses should take place. Each cut is assigned an identification, which consists of three characters. The cut can be defined parallel to an axis or as a free form polygon line. Every segment has its own material number and it will only cut through cross section elements with the same material number. Gaps between the segments will be closed by means
28
Version 16.13
AQUA
of virtual connections. The width of the substitute torsional cross section is available as a special option for the description of equivalent hollow cross sections of reinforced and prestressed concrete. Two partial cuts are generated for each section in this case. If the user does not supply any input, one or two axisparallel cuts will be created through the centre of gravity. This is generally not sufficient even for a simple TBeam, nor for composite sections, where the reference material number of the section is not necessarily represented at that location. The user will see a warning for general sections therefore. CTRL STYP allows the user to control how many of these standard cuts will be generated (0/1/2). The cut can dissect the cross section at several locations creating partial cuts. Each partial cut has a direction s and three defined points of interest: beginning (A), middle (M) and end (E):
Shear section The internal forces perpendicular to the cut M and N act in such way that positive axial forces cause tensile stresses across the cut, and positive moments cause tensile stresses at the EndPoint. The shear stressing is described primarily by the section moduli of the shear stresses at the three points. Additional values are calculated for the design of links in reinforced concrete structural elements: A mean torsional shear stress which, after being multiplied by the width of the partial section, must be covered by reinforcement. This corresponds to a section modulus for the shear flow. Version 16.13
29
AQUA
The total cut width, by which the shear stresses due to the shear force must be multiplied in order to obtain the shear flow from shear force. These distinctions are very significant to the definition of equivalent hollow cross sections.
2.8.3.
Force Method
The force method is implemented in AQUA only for statically determinate, i.e. simply connected cross sections. For multiple connected cross sections, the user must either know the location of zero shear stress or specify the distribution of the shear to the multiple segments of the cut. Since in cracked sections the common usage is the force method, the distribution values are needed in any case for reinforced concrete sections. The displacement method allows however to establish reasonable estimates for many cases. Torsional stress analysis is not elementary even for the force method (stress function with soap film analogy). The resistance areas for the torsional shear stresses are therefore prescribed by two values per section. The first value defines the shear at midarea (Bredts equivalent section). The second value defines the increase along the cut: t m + M t @ WTmDt + M t @ WTd
The default is one of the following two values, depending on whether the cross section is a hollow one or an equivalent hollow one: WTm +
2 @ A k @ b 0
WTd + 1 @ min b, d It
The sign of the shear stresses is based on the orientation of the cut relative to the shear centre. The shear force components are calculated by the classic formula t + V @ S I b
210
Version 16.13

However, each of the four initial values is inadequate in this formula: V is only valid for prismatic beams with constant normal force I has to be generalized with Swains formula
AQUA
For S the separated part of the cross section is not known for multiple connected sections. Shear stress does not need to be constant across the width b The separated part of the cross section is based on the positive face the one to the left of the cuts direction on the positive side. During this calculation any missing partial sections are automatically filled in. It is therefore extremely important to input the sections correctly, and especially to maintain their sequence. For special cases, such as dowel outline joints, deductible areas, equivalent hollow cross sections, multiply connected cross sections etc., the component of the shear force for each partial cut can be provided by a factor. Multiply connected cross section types require special considerations:
Shear sections in hollow cross section Similarly difficult is the processing of cross sections consisting of several polygons, either inner perimeters or composite cross sections, not dissected by the polygonal shear cut. In such cases AQUA examines all points of the polygon to see whether they are inside or on the boundary of the already evaluated partial section. Openings must therefore always be defined according to the polygons Version 16.13
211
AQUA
that surround them. In case of composite cross sections it may be helpful to pay attention to the cut direction or the sequence of the polygons. In the definition of cuts across several materials the user must take care that each segment of the cut has the correct material number, because a cut will dissect only parts having the same material number. It makes a difference for the horizontal shear in a composite flange if a dowel is before or behind the cut. Cuts through cross sections with open air between their parts can not be analysed as the section does not hit any elements. A similar problem occurs if a cut has the wrong material number. This may happen especially with the standard cuts through the centre of gravity.
Problem case Some additional advice applies to oblique cuts. Since the shear force at an oblique cut does not vary significantly compared to the straight cut, however the width of the cut does. Since the selection of an inappropriate cut direction can result in the analysis of too small shear stresses. The stress evaluation with the displacement method always uses the gross section while the force method may only use the effective part of the section. The latter is the default behaviour. But with CTRL SCUT +8 you may switch to the full section if needed.
212
Version 16.13

2.8.4. Displacement Method
AQUA
The analysis with the displacement method employs the integral equation method developed by Katz. The cross section contour is discretized into multiple socalled boundary elements. A linear formulation of the warping is made for each element, and the boundary condition is satisfied by a Galerkin weighted residual. The number of elements determines the accuracy of the solution. In case of a square, for instance, the unit lateral warping on all the axes of symmetry is zero. A nonvanishing solution therefore can be obtained only by defining at least four elements per side. AQUA uses each polygon edge as one element, which can be further subdivided depending on its size. Duplicate edges are automatically removed. As the results along the edges will vary only linear in all graphics, it is strongly recommended to use the input value SMAX in POLY to have a coarse subdivision visible. Internally a finer subdivision is needed however. Since a finer subdivision increases the computational time with a power of three, the subdivision should not be made too fine. The user can control the mesh size by CTRL SDIV. This indicates how big an element may became compared to the largest dimension of the cross section. CTRL CTRL CTRL CTRL CTRL SDIV SDIV SDIV SDIV SDIV 0 1 2 3 4 No subdivision maximum 1/2 maximum 1/4 maximum 1/8 maximum 1/16 etc.
The method computes the shear stresses due to shear force and torsion at all stress points and shear sections. The program also computes the torsional moment of inertia and the shear deformation areas. The description of inner perimeters of any shape and at any location is automatically taken into account. Under no circumstances are the results of this method to be accepted uncritically. It is a numerical approximate method. Local singularities of the shear stresses, such as those at reentrant corners for example, can generate very high stresses. The following table shows the convergence of the method using the example of a square with a side length of 6 m. The torsional moment of inertia and the shear stresses at a centre line near the boundary are shown. Due to the constant formuVersion 16.13
213
AQUA
lation of the linearly varying boundary condition, results that are very close to the boundary are relatively inaccurate, while values on the boundary are much better. The associated shear problem due to shear force can be solved exactly, even with coarser element subdivision, and it yields resistance 0.04167 and shear deformation area 0.8333 A = 30.0 m2. SDIV Mom.of iner. IT Warping tau Boundary tau 3.000 tau 2.999 tau 2.990 tau 2.900 1 216.0 0.000 2 188.2 1.542 3 183.3 1.308 4 182.4 1.330 5 182.2 1.319 exact 182.2 1.312 0.0222
0.03139 0.0214 0.0220 0.0222 0.0222 0.0456 0.0303 0.0252 0.0197 0.0372 0.0285 0.0255 0.0219 0.0297 0.0252 0.0236 0.0214 0.0258 0.0235 0.0227 0.0212 0.0239 0.0228 0.0223 0.0212
On the other side the system of equations may become quite large especially for composite sections, which leads to very high computation times, as the effort rises with the cube of the problem size.
36 26 23 31 22 2 19 17 3 11 14 14 6 11 14 14 31 34 34 41 44 44 51 54 61 64 71 74 81 84 91 94
S M O O
For this section the cpu time can be dramatically reduced via definition of CTRL SDIV 0 and a sound value of SMAX for the outer polygon, yielding the following results: SDIV/SMAX IT [m4] zsmp [mm] wmax [m2] CPU [sec] 0/ 0.5984 455 1.276 11 0 / ca 1/20 B 0.3228 55.6 1.104 13 3/ 0.3136 58.0 1.126 >30 000
54
64
74
84
94 8
214
Version 16.13

2.9. Shear Stresses in Thin Walled Sections.
AQUA
The calculation of shear stresses for thin walled sections however is much easier. This is as with a beam analysis compared to a solid continua. I.e. there are closed solutions possible which do not depend on the subdivision of elements. The theoretical background has been developed and published by Schade [8]. Therefore AQUA uses the deformation method of the warping function for theses types of sections in all cases. The CTRL option STYP has no effects at all, but you may specify explicit values via SV.
2.10.
Plastic forces.
The calculation of fully plastic forces is a very complex task. The single values for each force component may be evaluated easily, but the interaction of all forces and moments is a rather extensive numerical problem. With AQUA/AQB you have the following choices: Estimates for typical sections (AQUAlight) Normal force and bending moments can be evaluated precisely. For shear forces Vy the areas will be taken according to the Eurocode including the additional fillet areas, which is a deviation to the simpler formulas given in DIN 18800 for steel shapes. For Vz the fillets will be ignored. For Mt a more conservative approximation is done for thin walled sections, while for thick sections, the exact solution given by Bcklund/Akesson is used. Evaluation of plastic forces using the real geometry (AQUA Full Version) For thinwalled sections, the shear forces may be evaluated rather well (neglecting some plastic shear centre effects). For torsion however, it is difficult in the very general case to distinguish clearly between open and closed sections and the limiting torque. For thick polygonal sections, a pure sum of areas would lead to significantly overestimated values for all shear problems. AQUA therefore uses the shear deformation area, being up to 20 % on the save side. For torsional effects a scaling based on the elastic torsional stress is applied. Evaluation of nonlinear interaction values for the real cross section geometry (AQB record NSTR) With this method all prerequisites, like compatibility, yield criteria and equilibrium are fulfilled. However the evaluation is always done for a distinct Version 16.13
215
AQUA
force/moment combination. Thus the limiting value has to be found iteratively.
2.11.
Program Limits
Materials Materials per cross section Cross sections Reinforcement layers Polygon vertices per polygon Shear sections per cross section 999 31 9999 10 255 255
The following program limits hold:
2.12.
[1]
Bibliography.
Katz,C. (1986) SelfAdaptive Boundary Elements for the Shear Stress in Beams BETECH 86, Boundary Element Technology Conference 1986 Massachusetts Institute of Technology, Cambridge U.S.A. Wienecke, U.J. (1985) Zur wirklichkeitsnahen Berechnung von Stahlbeton und Spannbetonstben nach einer konsequenten Theorie II.Ordnung unter allgemeiner Belastung. Dissertation Technische Hochschule Darmstadt 1985 Werner,H. (1974) Schiefe Biegung polygonal umrandeter StahlbetonQuerschnitte Beton und Stahlbetonbau 1974 S 9297 Roik,Carl,Lindner (1972) Biegetorsionsprobleme gerader dnnwandiger Stbe Wilhelm Ernst & Sohn, Berlin Mnchen Dsseldorf 1972 Roth/Griesshaber (1966) Praktische Berechnung auf Biegung und Torsion beanspruchter Stbe mit dnnwandigen Querschnitten Teubner, Leipzig. Bornscheuer, F.W. (1952) Systematische Darstellung des Biege und Verdrehungvorganges unter besonderer Bercksichtigung der Wlbkrafttorsion Der Stahlbau 21 (1952), S 19 Version 16.13
[2]
[3]
[4]
[5]
[6]
216

[7]
AQUA
Schade, D. (1969) Zur Wlbkrafttorsion von Stben mit dnnwandigem Querschnitt IngenieurArchiv, 38, S 2534 Schade, D. (1987) Zur Berechnung von Querschnittswerten und Spannungsverteilungen fr Torsion und Profilverformungen von prismatischen Stben mit dnnwandigen Querschnitten. Z. Flugwiss.Weltraumforschung 11 , 167173. Katz, C. (1997) Fliezonentheorie mit Interaktion aller Stabschnittgren bei Stahltragwerken Der Stahlbau 66 (1997), S 205213
[8]
[9]
Version 16.13
217
AQUA

This page intentionally left blank
218
Version 16.13

3 Input Description.
AQUA
AQUA allows the user to define general cross sections with arbitrary geometry and materials. For simple sections and materials you do not need a special license, but for all sections starting with record SECT you need a license for AQUA. Before defining a section you have to specify the materials. Materials are addressed by an arbitrary number. Please note, that by keeping track of construction phases in AQBS, it is assumed that materials with higher material numbers were added at a later time. A standard section is defined by just one input record. All sectional values will be calculated including torsional and shear properties. The maximum components for all stresses are known, but a detailed analysis at different locations within the section will not take place. SVAL SREC SCIT TUBE PROF CABL SECT Sections without geometry Rectangular sections, plates, Tbeams and joists Circular and annular sections via Diameter / Thickness Tubular sections Rolled Steel shapes Cable sections General section (AQUA licence required)
With AQUA cross sections can be redefined at any time during the processing of the project without affecting other defined sections. However if any material definition is made, all existing cross sections are deleted. The distributions of reinforcements and stresses are deleted too, unless otherwise specified with CTRL REST. Freely defined cross sections always start with the record SECT, which specifies the cross section number. All subsequent input records describe this one cross section, which may consist of several partial cross sections (external perimeter, inner perimeter, reinforcement layout etc.). The input for a cross section is concluded either by the next SECT record or by two END records.
Version 16.13
31
AQUA
3.1. Input Language.
The input occurs in a free format with the CADINP input language (see the general manual SOFiSTiK: Basics).
3.2.
Units
SOFiSTiK programs offer the possibility to carry out all input and output of data in engineering units. A number of unit sets are provided for this purpose, which are preset according to the design code used in the given project. This default can additionally be changed for each program run separately using the keyword PAGE. More information about unit sets can be found in the general SOFiSTiK manual, section Units. Three categories of units are distinguished: m Fixed unit. Input is always required in the specified unit. [mm] Explicit unit. Input defaults to the specified unit. Alternatively, an explicit assignment of a related unit is possible (eg. 2.5[m] ). [mm]1011 Implicit unit. Implicit units are categorised semantically and denoted by a corresponding identity number (shown in green). Valid categories referring to the unit length are, for example, geodetic elevation, section length and thickness. The default unit for each category is defined by the currently active (design code specific) unit set. This input default can be overridden as described above. The specified unit in square brackets corresponds to the default for unit set 5 (Eurocodes, NORM UNIT 5). For sections the units for all dimesnions are expected in [mm] in general, the unit sets 0, 3 and 4 expect [m], the UnitSet 1 [cm]. For reinforcement areas values are expected in [cm2], the unit sets 6 and 7 expect [mm2].
32
Version 16.13

The following unit sets are provided: 0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 = = = = = = = = =
AQUA
Standard units (m, kN, sec with some historic deviations) German buildings (sections in cm, system in m) German steel construction, (sections mm,cm2,dm4, system in m) Bridge construction (like 0 but internal forces in MN instead of kN) Soil Mechanics (m, kN, sec) Structural Engineering (sections in mm, system in m) Metric system (All dimensions in mm, loads in kN) Mechanical (All dimensions in mm, loads in N) imperial (USUnits, inch, foot, lbs, kip)
The default unit set (UNIT) of a corresponding design code is described in the record NORM at the respective design code in the tables.
Version 16.13
33
AQUA
3.3.
Input Records.
The following records are defined: Records CTRL NORM MATE MAT MLAY Items OPT DC NO M90 NO MXY NO T4 NR8 NO P8 NO TYPE NO S NO ALFA FCTD NO ALFA FYC NO ALFA FVB KDEF NO SCM FHS EPS NO VAL NDC E OAL E OAL T0 NR4 T9 TYPE P9 C MREF TYPE NSP TYPE SCM FEQR TYPE SCM FTC TYPE SCM FM90 TMAX STYP E90 FTB SIG EXP VAL2 COUN MUE OAF MUE OAF NR0 T5 NR9 P1 P10 CT H TEMP A FCN TYPR FEQT CLAS EPSY TMAX CLAS FM OAL RHO SCLA M90 TITL TYPE TYPE CAT G SPM G SPM T1 NR5 TITL P2 P11 CRAC KXX B FC FCR GMOD FY EPST GMOD EP FT0 OAF TITL MCLA OAL TEMP VAL ALT K FY K TITL NR1 T6 P3 P12 YIEL KYY C FCT ECR KMOD FT REL1 KMOD G FT90 KMOD E OAF EPST VAL1 WIND GAM FT GAM T2 NR6 P4 MUE KZZ QMAX FCTK FBD GC FP REL2 QS E90 FC0 KMO1 G FCN TS VAL2 SNOW GAMA TYPE GAMA NR2 T7 P5 COH KXY TK EC FFAT GF ES R TITL QH FC90 KMO2 MUE FC MUET ... SEIS ALFA TITL ALFA T3 NR7 P6 DIL KXZ TITL QC MUEC QS K1 QH90 FV KMO3 GAM FT MNRB VAL9 E90 EY NR3 T8 P7 GAMB KYZ GAM TITL GAM FDYN GAM FVR KMO4 ALFA FV FCTF
NMAT BMAT HMAT CONC
STEE
TIMB
MASO
SSLA MEXT
34
Version 16.13

Records BORE BLAY BBAX BBLA SVAL Items NO S PHI S1 TAND S1 P3 NO CM WVZ NO MNO BCYZ NO RTYP NO NO TITL X MN0 S2 KSIG S2 PMA1 MNO YSC NPL H MRF INCL D DAS D D Y ES K0 D0 K0 PMA2 A ZSC VYPL B RTYP SPT T TITL T TYPE Z MUE K1 D2 K1 CL0 AY YMIN VZPL HO IT TITL SA MNO INL NX DES K2 CA0 K2 CL1 AZ YMAX MTPL BO SAY SI BC MNO NY VARI K3 CA2 K3 CL2 IT ZMIN MYPL SO SAZ ASA TITL F NZ PMAX M0 P0 CL3 IY ZMAX MZPL SU DASO ASI ALF PMAL C0 P1 SM0 IZ WT BCYZ ASO DASU MNO
AQUA
TITL C TANR P2 SM2 IYZ WVY TITL ASU REF MRF
SREC
SCIT TUBE CABL
KE
Version 16.13
35
AQUA
Records SECT - CS - SV - POLY Items NO BCY NO IT LEVY TYPE MNO BCZ TITL AK LEVZ MNO REFP Y REFP Y REFP YMIN REFI YB MNO INCL REFA YB REFA OUT AS YB REFA OUT YB REFA TYPE REFP VD CW Y CDYN U KR CWY MRF KTZ ATIL YSC MNO YM REFD Z REFD Z REFD ZMIN RFDI ZB MRF BMAX RFDA ZB RFDA FIXB ASMA ZB RFDA FIXB ZB RFDA Z1 REFD VB BCYZ Z SIGC F ICE CWZ
ALPH TITL ZSC DEFF ZM REFS R REFS R REFS YMAX RFSI YE LAY BRED RFSA YE RFSA FIXE LAY YE RFSA FIXE YE RFSA Z2 REFS VS WU1 WTY TAUC S TRAF CWT
YM
ZM
FSYM
BTYP
CM FACE DY PHI MNO REFR ZMAX REFA ZE ASUP BCT REFE ZE REFE TYPE MRF ZE REFE TYPE ZE REFE Z3 REFR VT WU2 WTZ MNO SH YMIN REF
CMS FACG DZ TYPE EXP MNO RFDA NS OUT MUE RFDE T RFDE TORS T RFDE T RFDE MNO DTYP VR1 WU3 WVY FIX FP YMAX CLAT
AY SMAX EXP
AZ EXP
AYZ
- - VERT NO - CIRC - NEFF - CUT NO TYPE NO
- PANE
NO
ALPH RFSA MS TYPE SXE REFS MNO RFSE DAS MNO RFSE MNO RFSE ALPH SYM VR2 WVZ REFP TYPE ZMIN S
WTM VYFK TANA
WTD VZFK
R A R
PHI
- PLAT
NO
PHI
- WELD - PROF
NO NO
YM REF VB2 SIGY REFD LEV ZMAX AG
ZM MREF VT2 TEFF REFS TITL
- SPT - SFLA - WPAR - WIND
NO NO CS ALPH
36
Version 16.13

Records - RF - LRF Items NO NO Y AR YB TORS REFA Y TORS DE TORS VAL NS0 SECT SECT VAL Z SIG ZB D RFDA Z D AS D SCOP NS1 FROM TO VAL2 AS TEMP YE A RFSA R A ASMA A CMNT S PASS ASMA REFP ZE AR REFE PHI AR LAY AR NREF LAY REFD AS RFDE AS REFP MRF CENT ICS MRF REFS ASMA RFSE ASMA REFD TORS LAY R LAY REFS
AQUA
D MRF PHI MRF REFR
- CRF - CURF TVAR INTE IMPO EXPO ECHO
NO H NAME NO MAT MAT OPT
...
ICS9
Version 16.13
37
AQUA
SREC
SCIT
The records HEAD, END and PAGE are described in the general manual SOFiSTiK: Basics.
38
Version 16.13
AQUA
3.4.
Item
CTRL Control of Analysis

Description
CTRL
Unit Default
OPT
A literal from the following list: REST Restart options (like deletion of data at restart) FACE Standard view on section POS = positive face NEG = negative face or numerical value RFCS Minimum reinforcement for computing ideal cross section values HMIN max, length of polygon edges HTOL max. stitch of circular arcs STYP Method of shear for solid sections SDIV Subdivision for intergral equation method SCUT Number of standard shear sections FIXL Max. factor for thickness step for buckling panel detection REFD Control for the input of references The value of the option Additional value for the option
LIT
FULL
VAL VAL2
* *
The CTRL options may be defined at any location within the input data. However if they are intended to be different for individual sections it is mandatory to define them before the sections intended to use them. Within a reatsrt CTRL REST 3 all defined options will be effective for all reanalyted sections. CTRL REST controls what AQUA should do with existing data in the database. As default AQUA will erase everything if materials are defined, and only the minimum reinforcements, limit stresses and beam stiffnesses if only sections are defined. This is usually the best choice to avoid unforeseeable results. In some
Version 16.13
39
AQUA
cases though it is desirable to process these results further. This can take place without problems only, if the assignment of the layers and the use of the material numbers in the individual cross sections are not changed. 0 1 2 delete old values in the database (default) keep old values in the database Keep all values, even if material is changed, implies a possible reanalysis of the sections. CTRL REST 2 nn will reanalyse section nn. Reanalyse all sections
CTRL FACE defines the standard view on the section. While the physical orientation in space is only specified by the orientation of the local beam coordinate system, the possible values for graphical views on the section are defined that the literal POS and all positive numbers define a view on the positive face (i.e. in the inverse direction of the beam or axis) while the literal NEG and all negative values define a view on the negative face (ie. along the direction of the beam or axis) : POS NEG 1,3 2,4 >4 yaxis to the left, zaxis downwards (default) yaxis to the right, zaxis downwards rotation by 0 or 180 degrees (yaxis horizontal) rotation by 90 or 270 degrees (yaxis vertical) rotated against the default by VAl degrees
CTRL RFCS controls whether minimum reinforcement should be considered in the calculation of the cross section values: 0 1 2 3 +4 do not consider consider for composite sections (default) consider for all sections consider also effect on dead load do not assign reinforcement to any partial section
HMIN defines a maximum allowed length for linear or circular polygon edges. (Default: no limit) HTOL defines the maximum allowed stitch (error) of an approximation of a circular arc by a polygon. This is effective on Fillets and arcs. Default: 2[mm]. The meanings of STYP, SDIV and SCUT are explained in paragraph 2.7. CTRL STYP controls the analysis of shear stresses in solid sections: 0 force method
310
Version 16.13

1 2 3
AQUA
displacement method only for It and location of shear centre (default for concrete and concrete composits) displacement method for torsion, force method for shear displacement method for torsion and shear, shear deformation areas are determined (default for steel, timber and other composits)
Options 2 and 3 should be used for composite sections, but with caution. SCUT controls the generation of the two standard cuts parallel to the coordinate axis and the standard stress points: SCUT +0 +1 +2 +8 +0*16 +1*16 +2*16 +4*16 +128 +256 do not generate default shear cuts create main shear cut at gravity center create both default shear cuts at gravity center shear is evaluated according to the force method for the gross section instead of the effective section. do not generated stress points corner points with maximum distance (Points 1:4) Intersection of principal axis with section (Points 5:8) Intersection of principal axis with convex hull (Points 5:8) with original coordinate system instead of principal axes use only zordinates (uniaxial bending)
The fineness of the subdivision for the integral equation method is controlled by the input value CTRL SDIV. This indicates how large an element may be compared to the largest dimension of the cross section. 0 1 2 3 4 No subdivision maximum 1/2 maximum 1/4 maximum 1/8 maximum 1/16 (default)
A snap distance (always in m) for the detection of cross section parts connecting together can be defined additionally at item VAL2. The value SDIV 4 0.001 defines 1 mm, as snap measure. As the input of references is best done with relative offsets (default: CTRL REFD 1), the export however with the actual absolute coordinates, the input CTRL REFD 0 allows to change the default to the definition in absolute coordinates. In
Version 16.13
311
AQUA
that case it is also allowed to make a reference to an element defined later in the input stream, but all coordinates will be taken exactly as they have been specified.
312
Version 16.13

3.5. Materials.
AQUA
SOFiSTiK supports a large number of different material descriptions. All will be addressed by a unique material number and should in general be usable everywhere. The default for the material type is dependant on the selected design code. The basic properties are entered via the records: NORM MATE CONC STEE TIMB MASO MLAY Selection of a design code or a design code family General material definition including strength Concrete material Steel and other metallic materials Timber/lumber and Fibre materials Masonry / Brickwork Layered composite material for QUAD elements
These records are mutually exclusive but may be enhanced by other records: BMAT NMAT HMAT SSLA MEXT Elastic support Nonlinear material properties for MAT/MATE (ASE/TALPA for QUAD and BRIC elements) Material definitions for HYDRA (Thermal or Seepage problems) Uniaxial strainstress law for materials CONC/STEE/TIMB/MASO Special material properties
Input of material is possible in all parts of the program system. However, it is self evident that not all parameters are used for all types of analysis or system. Each material has a standard name given by its classification, which might be extended by the user. If the user wants to replace the standard completely, he has to start his own text with an exclamation mark (e.g. !my own Text) or to quote it a second time (eg. my own Text ). Properties of materials must be distinguished according to whether they are properties which are close to the realistic behaviour (e.g. for dynamic calculations) or to which have some lower or upper limit to be multiplied with a safety factor for the calculation of an ultimate loadbearing capacity. Whereas the safety factors were formerly assigned moreorless at random, sometimes to the load and sometimes to the material, more recent regulations (Eurocode) provide a clearer
Version 16.13
313
AQUA
separation between safety factors for the loads and factors for the material. However, since the material safety factors still depend on the nature of the load or the type of design, it will not be possible to define all safety factors with the material itself. SOFiSTiK provides therefore the definition of: Properties and safety factors for the standard design Mean values or calculation values and safety factors for nonlinear serviceability and deformation analysis If some design codes (DIN 18800, DIN 10451) apply additional safetyfactors to the mean values, this may be defined with the stressstrain relation via SSLA. The safety factor defined with the material will thus be used only for the full plastic forces in AQUA. Note: The following pages are valid in all details only for AQUA, for other programs (SOFiMSHB) deviations are possible due to older versions with missing or changed items. Note: Hints for material properties of strange materials may be found on the internet at www.azom.com (The A to Z of Materials).
314
Version 16.13
AQUA
3.6.
Item
NORM Default Design Code

Description
NORM
Unit Default
DC
Design code family EN Eurocodes DIN German Standards OEN Austrian Standards SIA Swiss Standards AS Australian Standard BS British Standard IS Indian Standards JS Japanese Standard US US Standards (ACI etc.) GB Chinese Building Codes NF French Standards I Italian Standards E Spanish Standards S Swedish Standards DS Danish Standards NS Norwegian Standards SNIP Russian Standards NZS New Zealand Standards ET Egypt Building Codes MSZ Hungarian Standards SFS Finnish Standards NEN Netherlands Standards NBR Brazilian Standard NBN Belgian Standards Designation of a specific design code
LIT
EN
NDC
Lit16
Version 16.13
315
AQUA
Item Description

Unit Default
COUN
Country code for boxed values within EN 00 General EN FR / F / 33 France ES / E / 34 Spain IT / I / 39 Italy CH / 41 Switzerland AT / A / 43 Austria UK / 44 Great Britain DE / D / 49 Germany or any other valid TLD Category or Class Altitude above sea level Wind zone Snow zone Seismic zone Terrain category for wind Selection of a set of units Selection of output language
CAT ALT WIND SNOW SEIS WCAT UNIT LANG
Lit4 m Lit4 Lit4 Lit4 Lit4
/! 0.0 * * * * * *
Many defaults for materials, superposition and design are selected according to the selected design code and an optional country code and all the other data provided with this record. It is therefore strongly recommended to specify this data with the beginning of the project. A redefinition of the design code after the definition of actions or load cases have been defined or the editing of the INIFile to include missing materials does not comply with the provisions of SOFiSTiK for a proper use of the software. It is possible to redefine the design code NORM temporarily (eg. concrete / steel design) if the parameters of the loading definitions remain the same, but as this has some special risques, the user should use this option very thoroughly. Although there are still explicit code fragments in the software unavoidable, many of the defaults are specified in so called INIFiles located in the SOFiSTiK directory. The name of the matching INIfile is derived from the given data as DC_NDC.INI.
316
Version 16.13
AQUA
Some properties (e.g. Eurocode) are dependant on national variants (boxed values). Corresponding INIfiles to EN 19922004 and EN 19932005 and the country code may be used to select those values, as far as we have got notice of them. The country code for example is valid for deviations in Hong Kong to the British Standard or similar. Some codes require or allow the selection of a category or class. This can then be specified with CAT. The possible items are given in the INIFile. In the case of a subsequent modification of these classes or categories the inputs which depends on the design code have to be checked and adapted if necessary. The extend to which the specified altitude, wind/snow or earthquake zone definitions are accounted for is described in the program manuals of the modules using those values. The user should never assume that all regulations of the design codes are automatically fulfilled when selecting such a value. The possible items and defaults are given in the matching INIFile. The resultant values which result from the altitude or the wind/snow/earthquake zones have to be checked in the corresponding programs in the case of a subsequent modification. E.g. for som design codes the combination coefficients of the snow depend on the altitude. In the case of the modification these combination coefficients have to be adapt by the user if necessary. If the user wants to suppress such a value completely he may specify it with NONE. The items UNIT and LANG will be processed only in AQUA or TEMPLATE. With a definition of UNIT a set of units will be selected globally for all input and output data in all other modules. The default is specified in the INIfile. The item LANG will define the language for all results. The default is depending on the selected input language. Definitions with record PAGE will be active only within the current module.
Version 16.13
317
AQUA
The following design codes are available as INIFiles and/or special program code has been created to cope with special regulations. The marks A, B and C indicate if this code has been implemented in AQB, BEMESS and the SOFis For more detailed information, especially which provisions of the codes have been implemented, please check the manuals and the HTMfiles of the design programs. In many cases it is possible to add some clauses within short time within the program or with CADINP. EN Eurocodes Description EN 19922004 EN 19921 (2004) CAT AN/AP Building construction Table 7.1N EN 199211 CAT B,C,D Bridges EN 19931 (2005) CAT A Building construction CAT B,C,D Bridges EN 19941 (2004) CAT A Building construction CAT B,C,D Bridges EN 19951 (2004) EN 19961 (2005) EN 19971 (2004) EN 19991 (2007) EN 19921 (1991) UNIT Design 5 A,B
EN 19932005
EN 19942004
EN 19952004 EN 19962005 EN 19972004 EN 19992007 EN 19921991
5 5 5 5 5
A A A A A,B,C
318
Version 16.13

DIN Deutsche Norm Description DIN EN19922004 DIN EN 199211/NA:2011 DIN EN 19922/NA:2011 CAT AN/AP/AV Hochbau Tabelle 7.1 DE CAT B,C,D Brckenbau DIN EN 199311/NA:201012 CAT A Hochbau CAT B,C,D Brckenbau DIN 10451 (2008) CAT /A/B/C/D/E/F (Tab. 18) Klassifizierung von Nachweis bedingungen DIN Fachbericht 102 (2009) CAT A/B/C/D/E (Tab. 4.118) Klassifizierung von Nachweis bedingungen DIN Fachbericht 103 (2003) DIN Fachbericht 104 (2003) CAT A/B/C/D/E (Tab. 4.118 des FB 102), Klassifizierung von Nachweisbedingungen Stahlbau (Nov. 2008) CAT A/B A voreingestellte ber lagerung DIN 18800 B voreingestellte ber lagerung DIN 1055100 Holzbau (2008) DIN 10451 (2001) CAT /A/B/C/D/E/F (Tab. 18) Klassifizierung von Nachweis bedingungen
AQUA
UNIT Design 5 A,B
DIN EN19932005
DIN 10452008
A,B,C
DIN FB1022009
A,B
DIN FB103 DIN FB 104
2 0
A A
DIN 18800
DIN 10522008 DIN 10451
0 0
A A,B,C
Version 16.13
319
AQUA
DIN FB 1022003

DIN Fachbericht 102 (2003) CAT A/B/C/D/E (Tab. 4.118) Klassifizierung von Nachweis bedingungen Alte Norm (1988) DAfStb hochfest.Beton (1995) Holzbau (1988) Grundbau (2005) Alte Spannbetonnorm + Anhang A1 (1995) Betonmaste (1990) Stahlbau (1990) 0 A,B
DIN 1045 DIN 1052 DIN 1054 DIN 4227 DIN 4228 DIN 188001990
0 0 0 0 0 2
A,B,C A A A A A
OEN sterreichische Norm Description OEN EN19922004 OENORM B 19921 (2011) OENORM B 19922 (2008) CAT AN/AP/AV Hochbau Tabelle 4 B 199211 CAT B,C,D Brckenbau B 19922 OENORM B 199311 (2007) CAT A Hochbau CAT B,C,D Brckenbau Stahlbeton OENORM B 4700 (2001) Spannbeton (2000) OENORM B 4750 UNIT Design 5 A,B
OEN EN19932005
OEN 4700 OEN 4750 OEN 4300
0 0 0
A,B,C A A
Stahl OENORM B 4300 (1994)
For the old design codes OEN 4200, OEN 4250, OEN 4253 no INI files exist. The program AQB is so programmed that the appropriate design is done with input of the design code. As materials BOE is input for concrete and BSOE for steel.
320
Version 16.13

SIA Schweizer Norm Description SIA 262 SIA 263 SIA 265 SIA 162 Schweizer Betonbaunorm (2003) Schweizer Stahlbaunorm (2003) Schweizer Holzbaunorm (2003) Schweizer Stahlbetonnorm (1989)
AQUA
UNIT Design 0 2 0 0 A,B A A A
BS British Standard Description BS EN19922004 NA to BS EN 199211:2004 (2005) CAT AN/AP Building construction Table 7.1N EN 199211 CAT B,C,D Bridges British Standard Concrete (1997) British Standard Concrete Bridge (1990) CAT 0 without Prestress CAT 1/2/3 Prestress for Class 1/2/3 British Standard Steelwork (2001) UNIT Design 6 A,B
BS 8110 BS 5400
6 6
A,B A
BS 5950
Version 16.13
321
AQUA
US American Standards and Unified Building Code Description US ACI31808 US ACI31802 US ACI31899 US AASHTO2010 US AASHTO2004 US AASHTO2002 US AISC2005 US AISC American Standard ACI / UBC (2008) American Standard ACI / UBC (2002) incl. ACI31805 American Standard ACI / UBC (1999) American Highway (2010) American Highway (2005) American Highway (2002) American Standard AISC (Steel) 2005 American Standard AISC (Steel) 1998 UNIT Design 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 A,B A,B A A A A A A
SNIP Russian Standards Description SNIP 52101 SNIP 20301 SNIP 22381 SNIP RK50333 SP 521012003 (2004) (Concrete) SNIP II 03.01 84 (89) (Concrete) SNIP II 23.81 (89) (Steel) SNIP RK 5.03332005 (Concrete) Kasakhstan UNIT Design 0 0 2 0 A,B A,B A A
IS Indian Standards Description IS 456 IS IRC18 IS IRC21 IS IRC112 Indian Standard (2000) (Concrete) Indian Roads Congress Prestressed Road Bridges Indian Roads Bridges Congress Road UNIT Design 6 6 6 6 A A A
Indian Roads Congress: Code of Practice for Concrete Road Bridges (2011)
322
Version 16.13

AS Australian Standards Description AS 3600 AS 4100 AS 5100 Concrete Structures (2009) Structural Steel (1998) Bridge Design (2004)
AQUA
UNIT Design 6 6 6 A,B A A
E Instrucciones espaniola Description E EHE Instrucion de hormign estructural Nivel de control de ejecucin: EHE Normal EHE_INTENSIO Intensio EHE_REDUCIDO Reducido UNIT Design 0 A,B
I Decreto Ministeriale Italiane Description I DM2008 Decretto Ministeriale 2008 CAT A1 Costruzioni Civili CAT A2/A3 Ponti Decretto Ministeriale 2005 Decretto Ministeriale 9. gennaio 1996: Parte I: Cemento armato normale e precompresso Parte II: Acciaio Parte III: Manufatti prefabbricati prodotti Parte IV: Costruzioni composte d elemeti in metalli Parte V: Per travi composte acciaio calcestruzzo Decretto Ministeriale 9. gennaio 1996: Parte VIII: Eurocode UNIT Design 0 A,B
I DM2005 I DM96
0 0
A,B A,B,C
I EC
A,B,C
Version 16.13
323
AQUA
Note for I EC: This will select EC as design code with a CountryCode I (39) and additionally introduce the materials of the Italian decreto (CAN, CAP, FEB etc.). NF AFNOR Association francaise de normalisation Description NF EN19922004 Annexe Nationale la NF EN 199211/2 CAT AN/AP Btiment Tableau 7.1NF NF EN 199211/NA CAT B,C,D Ponts Rgle techniques de conception et de calcul des ouvrages et construction en beton arm suivant la methode des tats limites. BAEL91 revises 99 UNIT Design 5 A,B
NF BAEL
A,B
324
Version 16.13

S Svenska Boverkets Konstruktionsregler (BKR) Description S EN19922004 National Annex to Eurocode 2 SSEN 199211:2004/NA:2009, SSEN 19922:2005/NA:2009 CAT A1 byggnader & skerhets klass 1 A2 byggnader & skerhets klass 2 A3 byggnader & skerhets klass 3 B1 vegbruer & skerhets klass 1 B2 vegbruer & skerhets klass 2 B3 vegbruer & skerhets klass 3 C1 gangbruer & skerhets klass 1 C2 gangbruer & skerhets klass 2 C3 gangbruer & skerhets klass 3 D1 jernbanebruer & skerhetsklass 1 D2 jernbanebruer & skerhetsklass 2 D3 jernbanebruer & skerhetsklass 3 Boverkets Handbok om Betong konstruktioner CAT 1/2/3 (Skerhetsklass lg/normal/hg) Boverkets Handbok om Betong konstruktioner CAT 1/2/3 (Skerhetsklass lg/normal/hg) Vgverket BRO 2004
AQUA
UNIT Design 5 A,B
S BBK04
A,B
S BBK94
A,B
S BRO2004
Version 16.13
325
AQUA
DS Danish Standard Description DS EN19922004
UNIT Design 5 A,B
National Annex to Eurocode 2 EN 199211 DK NA:2007 CAT LE low safety & extended control NE normal safety & extended control HE high safety & extended control LN low safety & normal control NN normal safety & normal control (default) HN high safety & normal control LR low safety & reduced control NR normal safety & reduced control HR high safety & reduced control safety acc. to EN 1990 DK NA:2007 consequences classes control acc. to EN 199211 DK NA:2007 inspection level
326
Version 16.13

DS 411 Norm for betonkonstruktioner CAT LE low safety & extended control NE normal safety & extended control HE high safety & extended control LN low safety & normal control NN normal safety & normal control (default) HN high safety & normal control LR low safety & reduced control NR normal safety & reduced control HR high safety & reduced control Norm for betonkonstruktioner Default for superpositions for bridges 0
AQUA
A,B
DS 411bro
A,B
Version 16.13
327
AQUA
NS Norsk Standard Description NS EN19922004
UNIT Design 5 A,B
National Annex to Eurocode 2 NSEN 199211:2004/NA:2008, NSEN 19922:2005/NA:2010 CAT A1 bygninger & plitelighets klasse 1 A2 bygninger & plitelighets klasse 2 A3 bygninger & plitelighets klasse 3 A4 bygninger & plitelighets klasse 4 B vebruer (plitelighets klasse 3) C gangbruer (plitelighets klasse 3) D jernbanebruer (plitelig hetsklasse 3) Prosjektering av Stlkonstruksjoner CAT 1/2/3/4 (Plitelighetsklasse) Liten / Middels / Stor / Saerlig stor Prosjektering av Betongkonstruks joner CAT 1/2/3/4 (Plitelighetsklasse) Liten / Middels / Stor / Saerlig stor
NS 3472
NS 3473
328
Version 16.13

SFS Finnish Standard Description SFS EN19922004 National Annex to Eurocode 2 SFSEN 199211 NA:2007 CAT LE low safety & extended control NE normal safety & extended control HE high safety & extended control LN low safety & normal control NN normal safety & normal control (default) HN high safety & normal control LR low safety & reduced control NR normal safety & reduced control HR high safety & reduced control safety acc. to SFSEN 1990 NA consequences classes control acc. to SFSEN 199211 NA:2007 inspection level National Annex to Eurocode 2 for bridges only CAT B,C,D,E Bridges
AQUA
UNIT Design 5 A,B
SFS TA19922004
NEN Netherlands Standard Description NEN EN19922004 NENEN 199211:2005/NB:2007 (EN 19921(2004)) CAT AN/AP Building construction Table 7.1N EN 199211 CAT B,C,D Bridges UNIT Design 5 A,B
Version 16.13
329
AQUA
NBN Belgian Standard Description NBN EN19922004
UNIT Design 5 A,B
NBN EN 199211 ANB:2010 CAT AN1AN3/AP1AP3 Building construction Table 7.1N EN 199211 CAT B1B3,C1C3,D1D3 Bridges
MSZ Magyar Szabvny Description MSZ UT414 Code of Roadbridges UNIT Design 0 A,B
NZS New Zealand Standards Description NZS 3101 Concrete Structures Standard (1995) UNIT Design 6 A,B
ET Egypt Reinforced Concrete Design Code Description ET RC2001 Based on description Reinforced Concrete Design Handbook Prof.Dr.Shaker ElBehairy, Ain Shams Univers. UNIT Design 0 A,B
GB Chinese Standard Description GB 50010 JS Japan Standard Description JS JRA Japan Road Association Standard (2002) UNIT Design 0 A Chinese Standard Structures (2002) for Concrete UNIT Design 0 A
330
Version 16.13

NBR Brazilian Standard Description NBR 61182003 Norma Brasileira, Projeto de estruturas de concreto Procedimento CAT A Edifcios CAT B Pontes rodovirias CAT C Passarelas de pedestres CAT D Pontes ferrovirias
AQUA
UNIT Design 5 A
Version 16.13
331
AQUA
3.7.
Item
MATE Material Properties

Description
MATE
Unit Default
NO E MUE G K GAM GAMA ALFA E90 M90 OAL OAF SPM FY FT TYPE TITL
Material number Elastic modulus Poissons ratio (between 0 and 0.49) Shear modulus Bulk modulus Specific weight Specific weight under buoyancy Thermal expansion coefficient Anisotropic elastic modulus Anisotropic poisson's ratio Meridian angle of anisotropy about the local x axis Descent angle of anisotropy about the local x axis Material safety factor Design strength of material Ultimate strength of material Material type for default values Material name
MPa MPa MPa kN/m3 kN/m3 1/K kN/m3 deg deg MPa MPa LIT Lit32
1 * * * * 25 * E5 E MUE 0 0 1.0
Materials which can be used for SVAL or QUAD and BRIC elements may be defined with the record MATE. The number of the material must not be used for other materials. With the definition of a literal at TYPE from the following list, default values will be selected: GLAS, ESG VSGh, VSGv TVG Cu, Pb, Mg, W, Zn BRAS, BRON Floatglass, toughened safety glas laminated (horiz./vertical usage), semitempered glas Copper, Lead, Magnesia, Wolfram, Zinc brass, bronce
332
Version 16.13

CLAY, SAND ROC1, ROC2 ROC3, ROC4 BRIC, SLBR, CLIN IGYP, GYPS MOGY, MOCH, MOCE ASPH, BITU CARP, WOOL CORK, LINO EPOX, PHEN, PEST ACRY, PC, PTFE PVC, PMMA POM, PA PEHD. PELD PS. PP, PUR RUBB, NEOP, EBON EPDM, PSUL, BUTA SI, SILA FOAM, FOAS, FOAU FOAC, FOAR, FOAE clay, sand crystal rock, sediment rock light sediments, porous rock
AQUA
brick, sandlimebrick, clincer isolat. gypsum, standard gypsum plaster gypsum/chalc/cement mortar Asphalt, Bitumen Carpet, Felt/Wool Cork, Linoleum Epoxid, Phenol, Polyester resin Acryl, Polycarbonat, Polytetrafluorethylen Polyvinylchlorid, Polymethylmethakrylat Polyazetat, Polyamid/Nylon Polyethylen high/low density Polystyrol, Polypropylen, Polyurethan Rubber, Neopren, Ebonit EthylenPropylenedien,Polysulfid,Butadien Silicone, Silica foamed rubber, silicone, urethan foamed PVC, PUR, PE
The mechanical properties of those materials are not always known with a distinct value or even suitable for a linear material descripotion at all! Further TYPE may be used to preset fluid material constants for: AIR H2O CO2, O, N AR, KR, XE, SF6 Air (1 bar, 20 deg Celsius) Water (1 bar, 10 deg. Celsius) Carbondioxid, Oxygen, Nitrogen Argon, Krypton, Xenon, Sulfurhexafluorid
where MUE is the kinematic viscosity [m2/sec].
Version 16.13
333
AQUA
Sometimes it is more convenient to define the elastic constants by other values than the Elasticity modulus, the Shear modulus and the Poisson ratio. You may transform your values by the following formulas: E Elastic modulus Es subgrade modulus (horizontally constrained) K Bulk modulus G Shear modulus Poissons ratio
K+
E 3(1 * 2m)
G+
E 2(1 ) m)
E + 9KG (3K ) G) Es + E @
m + 3K * 2G 6K ) 2G
1 * m
(1 ) m)(1 * 2m) G+ 3K(1 * 2m) 2(1 ) m)
G + 3KE 9K * E
If not specified, missing values will be calculated according to these formulas. It is, however, possible to define nonconsistent constants. If no values are given, E defaults to 30000 MPa and MUE to 0.2. Orthotropy may be defined via material and thickness of QUAD elements. (see record QUAD in SOFiMSHA and manuals to ASE, SEPP and TALPA). The material law of a transversal orthotropy according to Lechnitzky has one direction that has different properties, while the description in the plane perpendicular to this direction remains isotropic. This covers most practical problems like timber and rock. Unfortunately the designation of the general material constants for timber materials is not compatible with that convention, so we strongly recommend to use TIMB for the description of timber materials. The principal values E and m are related to the isotropic plane, while E90 (MAT still old literal EY) acts normal to that plane and 90 and G90 (attention: input parameter G) describe the transverse straining behaviour between normal direction and isotropic plane. With z being the normal direction we have:
s x + sx * m y * m90 s z E E E 90 334 Version 16.13

y + sy * m sx * m90 s z E E E 90
AQUA
(s x ) s y) z + sz * m* 90 E90 E E m* 90 + m 90 E 90
It should be noted, that poissons ratios 90 and 90* are no longer limited by an upper bound of 0.5 (this would hold for the isotropic case). According to the formula given above, their relation is determined by the ratio of the elasticity moduli; this preserves symmetry of the stress strain matrix, which is required to fulfill elemental equilibrium. The order of the indices of stress and strain components for subsequent equations is defined as: [ x y z xy xz yz ] general threedimensional case [ x y xy z ] plane stain condition, axial symmetry [ x y xy ] plane stress With axial symmetry x denotes the axis of rotation while y represents the radial and z the tangential direction. Furthermore holds:
E1 + E , E 2 + E 90 , m1 + m , m 2 + m 90 , G 1 + E1 , G2 + G 21 ) m 1
General threedimensional case: The threedimensional material matrix is obtained by inversion of the strain stress relations and reads (z being the direction normal to the isotropic plane):
1 * n @ m2 m 1 ) n @ m2 m2 2 2 0 0 E 1 @ E1 @ m 0 E1 @ 1 ) m 1 @ m 1 ) m1 @ m 2 2 m 1 * n @ m ) n @ m m2 2 E @ 2 E 1 @ 1 0 0 0 E @ 1 1 m 1 ) m @ m 1 ) m1 @ m 1 D + m m 1 * m 2 1 E1 @ 2 0 0 0 E @ E @ 1 m 2 m m 0 0 0 0 G 1 0 0 0 G 0 0 0 2 0 G 2 0 0 0 0
Version 16.13
335
AQUA
n+

E1 , m + 1 * m1 * 2 @ n @ m2 2 E2
Plane strain conditions: Here we have in difference to the threedimensional case, the y direction defined as normal to the isotropic plane. The reduced material stiffness matrix yields:
1 * n @ m2 m2 2 E1 @ E1 @ m 0 1 ) m1 @ m 1 * m1 E @ m2 E @ 0 1 m 2 m D + 0 0 G 2 m1 ) n @ m2 m2 2 E 1 @ E1 @ m 0 1 ) m1 @ m n+ E1 , m + 1 * m1 * 2 @ n @ m2 2 E2
Plane stress conditions: Here we have in difference to the threedimensional case, the y direction defined as normal to the isotropic plane. The material stiffness matrix is obtained via inversion of the reduced threedimensional strainstress matrix and reads:
E1 @ m2 E1 0 2 2 1 * n @ m 1 * n @ m 2 2 E1 @ m2 E2 D + 0 2 1 * n @ m2 1 * n @ m 2 2 G 0 0 2
, n+
E1 E2
Axial symmetry: A general case of anisotropy does not need to be considered since axial symmetry would be impossible to achieve under such circumstances. A case of interest in practice is that of a stratified material in which the rotational axis x is normal to the plane of isotropy. For such a case the material stiffness matrix reads:
1 * m2 1 m 21 ) m 1 0 m 21 ) m 1 n 2 m21 ) m1 1 * nm2 0 m1 ) nm2 2 D + A @ G 0 90 0 0 A 2 2 m m 1 * n m 1 ) m ) n m 0 1 1 2 2 2

336 Version 16.13

A+ E2 @ n E , n + 1 , m + 1 * m1 * 2 @ n @ m2 2 E2 1 ) m 1 @ m
AQUA
Skew orthotropy: Consideration of skew orthotropy is also possible. In geological terms, the three dimensional orientation of the isotropic plane is defined by means of the meridian and descent angle. They describe the deviation of the steepest descent to the north direction and the inclination of the layers. Mathematically, the angles are equivalent to the first and third of the Eulerian angles. The transformation is defined by two rotations, the north axis (N) corresponding to the element ydirection and the Gaxis corresponding to the element zdirection. Axes K, N and G form a right handed Cartesian coordinate system. The transformation is defined as follows: 1. 2. Rotation of axes K and N by meridian angle OAL about Gaxis Subsequent tilting of the rotated system (K, N, G=G) by descent angle OAF about axis K.
Apart from 3D continuum elements these transformation rules apply to shells and plates, as well. For planar systems (TALPA) the value OAL defines the slope of the stratification, i.e. the angle between the element xdirection and the stratification direction. Input for OAF is not evaluated for the plane case. For axial symmetry input of OAF and OAL is not evaluated (see above: axial symmetry).
Version 16.13
337
AQUA
3.8.
Item
MAT General Material Properties

Description
MAT
Unit Default
NO E MUE G K GAM GAMA ALFA EY MXY OAL OAF SPM TITL
Material number Elastic modulus Poissons ratio (between 0 and 0.49) Shear modulus Bulk modulus Specific weight Specific weight under buoyancy Thermal expansion coefficient Anisotropic elastic modulus Ey Anisotropic poissons ratio mxy Meridian angle of anisotropy about the local x axis Descent angle of anisotropy about the local x axis Material safety factor Material name
kN/m2 kN/m2 kN/m2 kN/m3 kN/m3 1/K kN/m2 deg deg Lit32
1 * 0.2 * * 25 * E5 E MUE 0 0 1.0
Materials which can be used for SVAL or QUAD and BRIC elements may be defined with the record MAT and MATE. The number of the material must not be used for other materials. The differences between the two records are mainly the used dimensions. MATE is analogue to CONC,STEE etc. (MPa) and has additional strength values, while MAT uses (kN/m2) analogue to NMAT. MAT has older item names for the orthotropic parameters.
338
Version 16.13
AQUA
3.9.
Item
MLAY Layered Material

Description
MLAY
Unit Default
NO T0 NO0 T1 NO1 ... T9 NO9 TITL
Number of composite material Thickness of first layer Material number of first layer Thickness of second layer Material number of second layer Thickness of 9th layer Material number of 9th layer Material Designation
* * * Lit32
1 ! ! ! !
With MLAY you may define for QUAD elements a composite layered material with up to 10 layers. Each layer may be defined with a positive absolute thickness or a negative relative one. The total thickness of the element will be calibrated to the sum of the thicknesses of the material definition. If some layers have negative thickness only these layers will be adapted. Otherwise a uniform scaling will take place. If you have a sandwich element with two outer laminates with a given thickness for example:
MLAY 1 0.02 1 $$ -1.00 2 $$ 0.02 1 $$ upper laminate interior laminate lower laminate
then this data will be applied to match two QUAD elements with a total thickness of 0.10 or 0.15 as follows:
MLAY 1 0.02 0.06 0.02 0.02 0.11 0.02 1 2 1 1 2 1 $$ $$ $$ $$ $$ $$ upper laminate interior laminate if 0.10 total thickness untere Deckschicht upper laminate interior laminate if 0.15 total thickness lower laminate
MLAY 1
For nonlinear calculations a material definition with mean values is stored.
Version 16.13
339
AQUA
3.10.
Item
NMAT Nonlinear Material

Description
NMAT
Unit Default
NO TYPE
Material number Kind of material law LINE Linear material VMIS von Mise law, optional viscoplastic extension DRUC DruckerPrager law, optional viscoplastic extension MOHR Mohr Coulomb law GRAN Granular hardening SWEL Swelling FAUL Faults in rock material ROCK Rock material MISE Mise / Drucker Prager law GUDE Gudehus law LADE Lade law MEMB Textile membrane USP1 to USP8 and USD1 to USD8 reserved for user defined material models 1st parameter of material law 2nd parameter of material law 3rd parameter of material law 4th parameter of material law ... th 12 parameter of material law
LIT
1 !
P1 P2 P3 P4 ... P12
* * * * *
The types of the implemented material laws and the meaning of their parameters can be found in the following pages. In a linear analysis the yield function for the nonlinear material is merely evaluated and output. This enables an estimation of the nonlinear regions for a subsequent nonlinear analysis. If TYPE LINE is given, the material remains linear.
340
Version 16.13

3.10.1. Invariants of the Stress Tensor
AQUA
For the present chapter, as long as not specified differently, the following conventions hold: I1 + s x ) s y ) s z Deviatoric stress tensor: sx + s x * sy + s y * sz + s z * I1 3 I1 3 I1 3
J2 + 1 (s x2 ) s y 2 ) s z 2) ) t xy 2 ) t yz 2 ) t xz 2 2 J3 + s xsysz ) 2t xyt yzt xz * sxt yz 2 * syt xz 2 * s zt xy 2
3 3 J 3 q + 1 sin *1 * 3 3 2J22
3.10.2. Material Parameters
*p vq vp 6 6
Nonlinear material parameters have to be selected very carefully. Especially for soil and rock mechanics the values of the site have to be used, at least for the final design. There are some values available in literature (e.g. EC7, DIN 1055 part 2, EAU), but these values are hardly usable for a nonlinear FEM analysis. If we cite some of the values here, we deny any responsibilities for the correct selection of values for any current project. Angle of friction: The angle of friction is zero for most fine grained cohesive soils under undrained conditions. Friction angles larger than 40 degrees are encountered rarely. Note: A slope without cohesion world cannot be steeper than the materials ultimate friction angle. Cohesion: The cohesion as well as the friction have to be clearly distinguished for drained
Version 16.13
341
AQUA
and undrained conditions. For fine grained soils a pore pressure is created for sudden loading which decreases the possible friction considerably. As time passes, the water will leave the soil, the friction increases, but the cohesion will be reduced by a factor up to 10. Dilatancy: Dilatancy denotes the plastic deformation behavior of a material sample, the corresponding quantity is the dilatancy angle:
yt0 y+0 yu0
plastic deformation associated with reduction of material volume (compaction) volumeneutral plastic deformation (holds, e.g., for steel) plastic deformation associated with volume increase
For soil materials, the plastic deformation behavior depends on the materials effective density, which in turn changes with the materials loading state therefore, the dilatancy angle is in fact not a constant quantity. This coherence is described by the wellestablished stress dilatancy theory (Rowe 1962), which links the mobilized dilatancy angle to the actual shear straining level, the latter being characterized by the mobilized friction angle (cf. section NMAT Hardening Plasticity Soil Model GRAN). Classical elastoplastic material models (e.g. MOHR, DRUC) adopt a constant dilatancy angle. If the dilatancy has considerable effects (e.g. due to arch action) the predominant loading situation should be assessed carefully. As a coarse rule of thumb, for dense soils a value of +/2, for middle dense soils a value of 0.0 and for loose soils a value of /2 can be adopted. In contrast, the advanced theoretical setting of the Hardening Plasticity Soil model directly incorporates a loading state dependent variation of the dilatancy angle according to the above mentioned stress dilatancy theory (cf. section NMAT Hardening Plasticity Soil Model GRAN). Uniaxial Tensile Strength As tensile stresses are not allowed in soils in general, a tension cut off will be applied for most soils. However, it might be advisable to define a small uniaxial tensile strength for numerical reasons. e.g. if the soils becomes stress free at the surface. Characteristic values: DIN 1054100 Appendix A gives characteristic values for soils as follows:
342
Version 16.13

Soil type Designation Density DIN 18196 SE as well as SU with U<6 GE loose mid.dense dense loose mid.dense dense Weight wet
[kN/m3]
AQUA
Weight buoan.
[kN/m3]
cal ' 30.0 32.5 35.0 32.0 36.0 40.0 30.0 34.0 38.0 30.0 34.0 38.0
Sand, low silty sand, gravely sand, uniform or poorly graded Gravel, Boulder, stones with small sand content, uniform or poorly graded Sand, GravelySand, Gravel, well graded
17.0 18.0 19.0 17.0 18.0 19.0
9.0 10.0 11.0 9.0 10.0 11.0
SW, SI, SU, loose GW, GI mid.dense with dense 6<U<15 Sand, GravelySW, SI, SU, loose Sand, Gravel, well GW, GI mid.dense graded with U>15, dense as well as GU Saturated weight = weight buoyancy + 10.0
18.0 19.0 20.0 18.0 20.0 22.0
10.0 11.0 12.0 10.0 12.0 14.0
Version 16.13
343
AQUA
Soil type

Designat Conditi ion DIN on 18196 TA soft stiff hard Weight cal ' ck' cuk
[kN/m2]
[kN/m2]
Anorganic fine grained cohesive soils with high plasticity (wL > 50%) Anorganic fine TM and soft grained cohesive UM stiff soils with hard intermediate plasticity (50% > wL > 35%) Anorganic fine TL and soft grained cohesive UL stiff soils with low hard plasticity (wL < 35%) organic Clay OT and soft organic Silt OU stiff Peats without HN and preloading HZ Peats with moderate preloading Weight with buoyancy = weight - 10.0 *) only based on tests
18.0 19.0 20.0
* * *
* * *
* * *
19.0 19.5 20.5
20 20 20
0 5 10
5 25 60
20.0 20.5 21.0
27 27 27
0 5 10
5 25 60
14.0 17.0 11.0 13.0
* * *
* * *
5 15 5 20
3.10.3. Nonlinear State Variables (hardening parameters)

General nonlinear material laws are normally influenced by the loading history. Therefore, for every load step material point statevariables are stored to the data base, that can be visualized with WinGRAF during postprocessing. Subsequently, the meaning of the stored values is shortly explained. Plastification number Value of the corresponding yield function for the uncorrected (=linear elastic) stress state, possibly scaled to stress units. If >0 the material undergoes plastification. The value is computed for each loading step
344
Version 16.13
AQUA
anew. Therefore, regions that possibly have plastified previously, still can get values <0 in a subsequent loading step. For GRAN the value of the MOHR yield function is computed, here. For the Hardening Plasticity Soil (GRAN) material model, the plastification number is an identifier that holds more detailed information about the current state of loading (see section Hardening Plasticity Soil Model) instead of storing the current value of the yield function, only. Deviatoric hardening variable Effective plastic strain (scalar value), accumulated from corresponding strain rates. It reflects the volume neutral (shearing) portion of the plastic deformation. e p,dev +
.
2 e 3
.
p,xx
) e p,yy 2 ) e p,zz 2 ) 1 g p,xy 2 ) g p,yz 2 ) g p,xz 2 2

. . . . .
Volumetric hardening variable Effective plastic strain (scalar value), accumulated value from corresponding strain rates. e p,v + e p,xx ) e p,yy ) e p,zz Mobilized friction angle m Measures the degree of shearing strain based on the MohrCoulomb criterion. Computed according to:
. . . .
sin m +
Utilization level
s 1 * s 3 2c cot * s 1 * s 3
Ratio u 5 m inp v 1, where the material input parameter inp marks the maximum (ultimate) friction angle.
3.10.4. Material Law VMIS

Elastoplastic material according to van MISE with associated flow rule and optional viscoplastic extension. f + 3 J2 * p1 v 0
Version 16.13
345
AQUA
Application range:
Metals and other materials without friction. Simulation of creep effects. Parameters: Description P1 Yield stress P2 Hardening modulus (tangent modulus) P10 Type of creep law (overstress function) (0=no viscous effects, pure elastoplastic) P11 Creep parameter, exponent m >= 1.0 P12 Viscosity >= 0.0 Unit [kN/m2] [kN/m2] [-] Default ! 0.0 0
[-] [kNs/m2]
1.0 0.0
Formulation of the viscoplastic material behaviour is based on the Perzyna model. Accordingly, the viscoplastic strains are defined by Dvp +
dt g s, dt + l@ s Ff s, g s, + @ dt h s
t
. vp
t0
t0
t0
In case of an associative flowrule (e.g. von Mise material) the plastic potential g equals the yield function. The overstress function F reads
m f(s, ) , f w 0 F + , f t 0 0
This frequently used form can be calibrated to reproduce a wide range of time dependent material phenomena adequately. Reference: M.A.Chrisfield Nonlinear Finite Element Analysis of Solids and Structures. Vol. I. Essentials. Chapter 14. Wiley & Sons (1991)
346
Version 16.13
AQUA
M.A.Chrisfield Nonlinear Finite Element Analysis of Solids and Structures. Advanced Topics. Vol. 2, chapter 6. Wiley & Sons (1997) O.C. Zienkiewicz and R.L. Taylor (1991) The Finite Element Method, volume 2. McGraw Hill, London. O.C. Zienkiewicz and I.C. Cormeau (1974) ViscoPlasticity Plasticity and Creep in Elastic Solids a Unified Numerical Solution Approach. In International Journal for Numerical Methods in Engineering, volume 8, pages 821845.
3.10.5. Material Law DRUC

Elastoplastic material with a conical yield surface according to DRUCKER/ PRAGER and an optionally nonassociated flow rule. The model is extended by means of a spherical compression cap and plane tension limits. Formulation of yield condition and plastic potential using stress invariants: f + g + 2 sin 6c cos @ I 1 ) J 2 * v0 3 3 " sin 3 3 " sin 2 sin n @ I ) J 2 3 3 " sin n 1
This formulation describes a cone in principal stress space that either embraces the MOHR yield surface ( sign) or is inlying and tangent to it (+ sign). For description of the materials viscoplastic extension see NMAT VMIS. Application range: Soil and rock with friction and/ or cohesion. Modelling of timedependent effects (e.g. short term strength) Parameters: Description P1 Friction angle (< 0 inner cone, >= 0 outer cone) P2 Cohesion c Unit [] [kN/m2] Default 0.0 0.0
Version 16.13
347
AQUA
P3 Tensile strength t P4 Dilatancy angle P5 unused

[kN/m2] [] [kN/m2] [0/00] [] [kN/m2] [-] 0.0 0.0 0.0 P1 P2 0
P6 Plastic ultimate strain u P7 Ultimate friction angle u P8 Ultimate cohesion cu P10 Type of creep law (overstress function) (0=no viscous effects, pure elastoplastic) P11 Creep parameter, exponent m >= 1.0 P12 Viskosity >= 0.0 Reference:
[-] [kNs/m2]
1.0 0.0
M.A.Chrisfield Nonlinear Finite Element Analysis of Solids and Structures. Advanced Topics. Vol. II. Chapter 14. Wiley & Sons (1997) O.C.Zienkiewicz,G.N.Pande Some Useful Forms of Isotropic Yield Surfaces for Soil and Rock Mechanics. Chapter 5 in Finite Elements in Geomechanics (G.Gudehus ed.) Wiley & Sons (1977)
3.10.6. Material Law MOHR

Elastoplastic material with a prismatic yield surface according to MOHR COULOMB and a nonassociated flow rule. The model is extended by means of plane tension limits. Formulation of yield condition and plastic potential using stress invariants: f + 1 I1 sin ) J2 (cosq * 3 g + with: sin q sin ) * c cos v 0 3
2 sin n @ I ) J 2 3 3 " sin n 1
Application range: soil and rock with friction and/ or cohesion
348
Version 16.13

Parameters: Description P1 Friction angle P2 Cohesion c P3 Tensile strength t P4 Dilatancy angle P5 unsused P6 Plastic ultimate strain u P7 Ultimate friction angle u P8 Ultimate cohesion cu P10 Type of creep law (overstress function) (0=no viscous effects, pure elastoplastic) P11 Creep parameter, exponent m >= 1.0 P12 Viskosity >= 0.0 Special comments: Unit [] [kN/m2] [kN/m2] [] [kN/m2] [0/00] [] [kN/m2] [-]
AQUA
Default 0.0 0.0 0.0 0.0 0.0 P1 P2 0
[-] [kNs/m2]
1.0 0.0
The following expressions are better suited for checking the yield criterion:
f + sI *
1 * sin 2c cos @ s III * 1 ) sin 1 ) sin
For description of the materials viscoplastic extension see NMAT VMIS. Reference: M.A.Chrisfield Nonlinear Finite Element Analysis of Solids and Structures. Vol. I. Essentials. Chapter 14. Wiley & Sons (1991) M.A.Chrisfield Nonlinear Finite Element Analysis of Solids and Structures. Advanced Topics. Vol. 2, chapter 6. Wiley & Sons (1997) O.C. Zienkiewicz and R.L. Taylor (1991) The Finite Element Method, volume 2. McGraw Hill, London.
Version 16.13
349
AQUA
O.C. Zienkiewicz and I.C. Cormeau (1974) ViscoPlasticity Plasticity and Creep in Elastic Solids a Unified Numerical Solution Approach. In International Journal for Numerical Methods in Engineering, volume 8, pages 821845.
3.10.7. Hardening Plasticity Soil Model GRAN

Extended elastoplastic material with an optimized hardening rule (single and double hardening) for soil materials. Application range: realistic stiffness and hardening behavior of soil, settlement analysis Parameters: Description P1 Friction angle P2 Cohesion c P3 Tensile strength ft P4 Dilatancy angle P5 Stiffness modulus Es,ref (GRAN-extended) P6 lateral earth pressure coefficient k0 (GRAN-extended) P9 Modulus for primary loading E50,ref P10 Exponent m >= 0 P11 Failure factor 0.5 < Rf < 1.0 P12 Reference pressure pref Unit [] [kN/m2] [kN/m2] [] [kN/m2] [-] [kN/m2] [-] [-] [kN/m2] Default 0.0 0.0 0.0 0.0 * 1-sin ! 0.7 0.9 100.0
The extended version of the GRANmodel (twosurface model, double hardening) is activated by specification of the oedometric stiffness modulus Es,ref (P5) only in this case the lateral earth pressure coefficient k0 (P6) takes effect. In case no input of Es,ref is provided, the basis version of the GRAN material model (singlesurface model, single hardening) is adopted. The hardening rule is based on the hyperbolic stressstrain relationship proposed by KONDNER/ZELASKO, which was derived from triaxial testing. Hardening is limited by the materials strength, represented by the classic MOHR/ COULOMB failure criterion. Additionally, the model accounts for the stress dependent stiffness according to equations (46). A further essential feature is
350
Version 16.13
AQUA
the models ability to capture the loading state and can therefore automatically account for the different stiffness in primary loading and un/reloading paths. In the subsequent notation, compression and contraction are defined as negative; for the principal stresses the relation s 1 w s 2 w s 3 holds. Accordingly, for the triaxial state index 3 denotes the axial and index 1 the lateral direction. Summary of essential features: deviatoric hardening based on the hyperbolic stressstrain relationship according to KONDNDER/ZELASKO => plastic straining prior to reaching shear strength parameter: E50,ref; Rf
MOHR/COULOMB failure criterion parameter: ; c
optional accounting of dilatant behaviour (nonassociated flow) parameter:
stress dependent stiffness parameter: m; pref
loading dependent stiffness => differentiation between primary loading and un/reloading parameter: Eur; (elastic, from MAT/MATE record)
optional limitation of tensile stress (tension cutoff) parameter: ft;
Version 16.13
351
AQUA
The extended version (GRANextended) enhances the model by an additional hardening twoparameter cap surface. An appropriate calibration of the caps hardening and shape parameters is done automatically, based on the input of physically sound input parameters and, hence, allows for a realistic modelling of the contractant behaviour and stiffness during primary compression (oedometric testing) => plastic straining preservation of a realistic stress ratio
s k 0 + slateral, e.g. according to Jaky as k 0 + 1 * sin axial

Es,ref; k0; (m; pref)
parameter:
352
Version 16.13

Strength and hardening properties:
AQUA
According to Kondner, the stressstrain behaviour of granular soil under triaxial conditions can be approximated well by a hyperbolic relation.
q + s1 * s3 +
where
* 3 b * a @ 3
(1)
1 +E ] 2@E i 50 b q 1 + qa + f a Rf
Stress dependent stiffness:
(2) (3)
Granular materials show a stiffness behaviour that is dependent on the stress state (and the compactness of the packing). Extending the approach from (Ohde 1939, 1951) which was derived from oedometric testing by cohesive terms the oedometric modulus magnitude depends on the effective axial stress state according to:
Version 16.13
353
AQUA
|s3| @ sin ) c @ cos E s + Es,ref @ p @ sin ) c @ cos ref

Parameter m generally varies between 0.4 and 0.75.
(4)
In contrast to oedometric test conditions, lateral expansion is not constrained under triaxial conditions. Due to the changed boundary conditions the triaxial modulus stiffness E 50 deviates from the stiffness modulus. E 50 is defined as secant stiffness that corresponds to a 50percent mobilisation of the maximum shear capacity (figure 1). Choosing the smaller compressive stress s 1 as reference stress, a relation anlogous to equation (4) can be established for the stiffness evolution of the triaxial modulus E 50 (Kondner & Zelasko 1963, Duncan & Chang 1970), which is then used in the model equations (1) to (3).
|s1| @ sin ) c @ cos E 50 + E50,ref @ @ sin ) c @ cos p ref |s1| @ sin ) c @ cos E ur + Eur,ref @ p @ sin ) c @ cos ref
From empirical observations E 50,ref [ E s,ref Plastic volumetric strain (triaxial stress states):
(5)
An analogous approach for the elastic un/reloading stiffness yields:

m
(6)
Like other plasticity models, the GranularHardening model incorporates a relationship between activated plastic shear strains e p and corresponding plastic volumetric strains e p,v. The according flow rule in rate form reads
354
Version 16.13

e p,v + ep sin y m
. .
AQUA
(7)
For the GranularHardening model, the socalled mobilized dilatancy angle y m is defined from the wellestablished stress dilatancy theory (Rowe 1962) as
sin y m +
sin m * sin cs 1 * sin m sin cs
(8)
(since TALPA v23.36 / ASE v14.57). Therein, the critical state friction angle cs marks the transition between contractive (small stress ratios with m t cs) and dilatant (higher stress ratios with m u cs) plastic flow. The mobilized friction angle m in equation (8) is computed according to
sin m +
s 1 * s 3 2c cot * s 1 * s 3
(9)
At failure, when m 5 , also the dilatancy angle reaches its final value y m 5 y. Accordingly, from equation (8) the critical state friction angle can be derived as
sin cs +
sin * sin y 1 * sin sin y
(10)
SOFiSTiK performs the computation of the critical state friction angle cs automatically on basis of the user specification for the final angles and y. Consideration of a constant dilatancy angle y m 5 y, i.e., the deactivation of relationship (8) can optionally be requested by specifying CTRL MSTE EMAX 0 (ASE: CTRL MSTE W4 0) in the corresponding TALPA / ASE run. Nonlinear state variables: Plastification number Identifier for the current material state of loading: 0 +2 +4 +8 elastic deviatoric hardening volumetric hardening (cap) material failure (MohrCoulomb)
Example: For the current loading stage, a material point experiences hardening in both directions and finally reaches the failure limit. The corresponding value of the identifier amounts to 14=2+4+8.
Version 16.13
355
AQUA
Deviatoric hardening variable
According to section 3.10.3. Nonlinear State Variables. Volumetric hardening variable According to section 3.10.3. Nonlinear State Variables. Mobilized friction angle m Measures the degree of shearing strain based on the MohrCoulomb criterion. Computed according to equation (9). Utilization level Ratio u 5 m inp v 1, where inp is the maximum (ultimate) friction angle provided as material input parameter. Isotropic preconsolidation stress Hydrostatic stress p c marking the highest state of compression that was reached in loading history (cap); the hydrostatic stress being defined as p 5 s x ) s y ) s z3. Mobilized dilatancy angle y m Used dilatancy angle for the current loading stage. Computed according to equation (9), if dilatancy theory is activated. Otherwise equal to material input parameter: y m + y. Special comments: The model can easily be calibrated according to triaxial/oedometric test data. Therefore, deformation behaviour of the material prior to failure can be captured with a good accuracy. This feature, combined with the consideration of specific stiffnesses for primary and un/reloading, respectively, constitutes a significant progress when compared to the behaviour of classic elastoplastic soil material models. Consequently, GRAN is particularly suited for tasks that require more precise settlement predictions. If no precise data is available, then the following estimations may be used for an approximation of the properties of normally consolidated soil:
p ref + 100kPa 356 Version 16.13

m ] 0.4AAA 0.7 R f ] 0.7AAA 0.9 E 50,ref [ Es,ref E ur,ref ] 3 @ E 50,ref
AQUA
As a consequence of the GRAN hardening plasticity formulation, Poissons ratio MUE ( MAT/MATE ) should be chosen to mimic the elastic loading behavior (i.e. unloading, reloading) of the soil skeleton, only. The actual evolution of lateral stresses during primary loading is controlled by the hardening plasticity formulation itself. Therefore as opposed to common practice with elasticideal plastic material models, where calibration for primary loading behavior often results in values MUE>>0.3 for the hardening plasticity formulation suitable values of MUE are significantly lower, usually in the range from 0.2 to 0.3. For higher values, the development of volumetric strains is prone to be overestimated (also at the cost of model performance). Reference: Kondner, R.L.: Zelasko, J.S. (1963): A hyperbolic stress strain relation for sands, Proc. 2nd Pan. Am. ICOSFE Brazil 1, 289394 Schanz, T. (1998): Zur Modellierung des mechanischen Verhaltens von Reibungsmaterialien, Habilitationsschrift, Institut fr Geotechnik der Universitt Stuttgart Duncan, J.M.: Chang, C.Y. (1970): Nonlinear analysis of stress and strain in soil, J. Soil Mech. Found. Div. ASCE 96, 16291653 Desai, C.S.: Christian, J.T. (1973): Numerical Methods in Geotechnical Engineering, Chapter 2, McGrawHill Book Company
3.10.8. Material Law SWEL

Additional parameters for swelling soils Application range: Swelling of soils due to stress disturbance (unloading) Relationship between stress and swelling strains of the final state:
Version 16.13
357
AQUA
0s i t s 0i log s i s v s v * p q i 0i 2 iR + * p1 @ 10 s 0i log 10 s c * p 2 t s i s 0i
i + 1..3 si = s 0i = principal normal stresses equilibrium state of stress wrt swelling (initial condition), transformed to the direction of the principal normal stresses s i
Parameters: Description P1 Swelling modulus Kq P2 Swelling limit stress (absolute value) |c| > 0 (magnitude of smallest compressive stress below which no further increase of swelling occurs) P3 Historical swelling equilibrium stress (absolute value) from oedometer testing |0,hist| > |c| P4 Viscous extension: retardation time >= 0.0 Special comments: Swelling of soils is a complex phemomena that is influenced by various factors. There are two swelling mechanisms of practical importance that can be distinguished for both processes the presence of (pore) water is a common prerequisite. The first mechanism is termed as the osmotic swelling of clay minerals, which basically is initiated by unloading of clayey sedimentary rock. The second mechanism takes place in sulphateladen rock with anhydride content. In this case the swelling effects are due to the chemical transformation of anhydride to gypsum which goes along with a large increase in volume (61%). For both described mechanisms a principal dependency between the increase in volume, caused by swelling, and the state of stress was observed both in laboratory and in insitu experiments. The formula employed represents a Unit [o/oo] [kN/m2] Default 3.3 10.0
[kN/m2]
2000.0
[h]
0.0
358
Version 16.13
AQUA
generalization of the 1dimensional stressstrain relationship that HUDER and AMBERG derived from oedometer tests for the final state. Here the time dependent evolution of the swelling process is not considered.
The equilibrium stress state with respect to swelling s 0 is defined by means of the GRP record. For this we use the option PLQ in order to reference a (previously calculated) load case as primary state for swelling. This state is regarded as an equilibrium state with respect to swelling (normally insitu soil prior to construction work). I.e. swelling strain increments caused by an eventual unloading from the historical equilibrium state s 0,hist to this new primary state s 0 have already occurred. Swelling strain increments in the course of construction work are only due to unloading related to the new primary state for swelling s 0 : D q + q * q iR i,tot i,hist s + * p1 @ log s i 0,hist s + * p1 @ log s i 0i
* * p @ logss
1 0i 0,hist

359
Version 16.13
AQUA
The constitutive equation reproduced above is limited to the final (stationary) state, i.e. it relates the evolved swelling strains to the stress state that is present at time t + R. To account for time dependent behaviour, the relation is extended to the time scale by a formal viscous approach. Correspondingly, the rate of swelling strains is defined as
s * q q R + h
.q
with the retardation time h as a viscosity parameter and q denoting the swelling strains that have developed at the considered time t. In rheological terms this approach can be interpreted as a parallel coupling of a swelling and a dashpot device. The time dependent response can be calibrated via the retardation time h (P4) the greater h the more accentuated is the retardation in the evolution of swelling strains. For h + 0 the response is instantaneous, identical with the nonviscous (instationary) case. Furthermore, for t R the models response converges to the instationary solution independent of the adjusted retardation time h. This property enables application of the viscous model also for stabilisation of the solution process, even if one is not explicitly interested in modelling time effects. The SWEL record is specified in addition to a linear elastic or elastoplastic basic material. Anisotropy is not possible with this model. Reference: P.WittkeGattermann Verfahren zur Berechnung von Tunnels in quellfhigem Gebirge und Kalibrierung an einem Versuchsbauwerk. Dissertation RWTHAachen, Verlag Glckauf 1998 W.Wittke Grundlagen fr die Bemessung und Ausfhrung von Tunnels in quellendem Gebirge und ihre Anwendung beim Bau der Wendeschleife der SBahn Stuttgart. Verffentlichungen des Institutes fr Grundbau, Bodenmechanik, Felsmechanik und Verkehrswasserbau der RWTHAachen 1978
360
Version 16.13
AQUA
W.Wittke, P.Rissler Bemessung der Auskleidung von Hohlrumen in quellendem Gebirge nach der Finite Element Methode. Verffentlichungen des Institutes fr Grundbau, Bodenmechanik, Felsmechanik und Verkehrswasserbau der RWTHAachen 1976, Heft 2, 746 Nichtlineare Stoffgleichungen fr Bden und ihre Verwendung bei der numerischen Analyse von Grundbauaufgaben. Mitteilungen Heft 10 des BaugrundInstituts Stuttgart (1979)
3.10.9. Material Law FAUL

Discrete shear surfaces (crevice planes) f1 = tan c + < 0 g1 = tan + f2 = z < 0 g2 = f2 Application range: Additional discrete faults to a given base rock material. Parameters: Description P1 Crevice friction angle P2 Crevice cohesion c P3 Crevice strength ftu P4 Crevice dilataion angle P5 Meridian angle of crevice plane (OAL) P6 Descent angle of crevice plane (OAF) P9 Tensile fracture energy Gf Special comments: This material law may be specified up to three times in addition to the material law of the base material (elastic, MOHR, DRUC). This allows for the consideration of Unit [] [kN/m2] [kN/m2] [] [] [] [kNm/m2] Default 0.0 0.0 0.0 0.0 (*) (*) 0.0
Version 16.13
361
AQUA
different distinct fault directions. Increasing the number of specified shear planes per material, also increases the number of possible equilibrium states for a material point this may possibly affect the stability of the overall equilibrium iteration process. Specification of meridian angle OAL and descent angle OAF follows the instructions given in the descriptions for input records MAT/MATE. For planar systems the value OAL directly defines the slope of the stratification, i.e. the angle between the local x direction and the global X direction. Input for OAF is not evaluated for the plane case. For P9>0 a scalar damage model with exponential softening of the tensile strength is applied. The softening obeys ft + f tu @ exp * w @
f tu G f
where w denotes the crack opening. In this context, the tensile fracture energy G f represents an objective material parameter. In order to minimize discretization dependent spurious side effects, a characteristic element size is incorporated into the softening formulation. This requires, however, a sufficiently fine finite element discretization in the corresponding system domains. In case of P9=0 a tension cutoff with respect to ftu without consideration of softening is executed.
3.10.10. Material Law ROCK

Elastoplastic material with oriented shear surfaces f1 = tan (p1) p2 + < 0 g1 = tan (p4) + f2 = p3 < 0 g2 = f2 (Kluftflche/Fault)
f3 = tan (p6) p7 + < 0 g3 = tan (p9) + f4 = I p8 < 0 g4 = f4 (Felsmaterial/Rock)
362
Version 16.13

Application range: Plane strain conditions and anisotropic material Parameters: P1 P2 P3 P4 P5 P6 P7 P8 P9 = = = = = = = = = Crevice friction angle Crevice cohesion Crevice tensile strength Crevice dilatancy angle Angle of crevice direction with respect to x axis (0180) Rock friction angle Rock cohesion Rock tensile strength Rock dilatancy angle [degrees] c [kN/m2] z [kN/m2] [degrees] [degrees] [degrees] c [kN/m2] z [kN/m2] [degrees]
AQUA
Default values: (0.) (0.) (0.) (0.) (*) (0.) (0.) (0.) (0.)
Special comments: This law ignores the effect of the third principal stress acting perpendicularly to the model. One can, however, specify the strength of the rock as well as the strength of the sliding surfaces, which are defined by the angle P5 (default value is that of an anisotropic material). The flow rule of the shear failure is non associated if P4 is different from P1. Any of the two limits can be deactivated in special cases by specifying = c = 0.0. Reference: W.Wunderlich,H.Cramer,H.K.Kutter,W.Rahn Finite Element Modelle fr die Beschreibung von Fels Mitteilung Nr. 8110 des Instituts fr konstruktiven Ingenieurbau der Ruhr Universitt Bochum, 1981.
3.10.11. Material Law MISE

Elastoplastic material according to van MISE or DRUCKERPRAGER with associated flow rule. f + p2 @ I1 ) J2 * Application range: Metals and other materials without friction (module ASE, 3D solid elements) p1 v0 3
Version 16.13
363
AQUA
Parameters: P1 P2 P3 P4 P5 = = = = =

[kN/m2] [] [kN/m2] [kN/m2] [kN/m2]
Comparison stress Friction parameter Hardening module Tensile strength z Compressive strength (cap) c
Several substitutes for P1 and P2 can be used for the calculation of common parameters in soil mechanics. Commonly used e.g. is the compression cone:
P1 +
6c cos 3 * sin 6c cos 3 ) sin
P2 +
2 sin 3 (3 * sin ) 2 sin 3 (3 ) sin )
The values for the internal cone are better suited for plane strain conditions:
P1 +
P2 +
If the DruckerPrager criterion is used for modelling concrete behaviour, then in general uniaxial compressive strength ( fc ) and/or tensile strength ( ft ) are provided rather than cohesion and friction angle. Presuming, that also the tensile strength is captured with the DruckerPrager yield surface, i.e. no explicit tensile strength is provided via parameter P4, the model can be calibrated by means of:
P1 + 2 @
f c @ f t f c ) f t
f * f t P2 + 1 @ c 3 f c ) f t
Parameter P4 extends the model by an explicit tension limit, often referred to as Rankine criterion. By specification of parameter P5 the model can optionally be extended by a spherical cap (in principal stress space) that limits the volumetric compressive stress to a maximum value. This can be meaningful in particular for mainly hydrostatic compression. The cap is defined by: f + s 1 2 ) s 2 2 ) s 3 2 * P 5 ) P 5 ) P 5 v 0
2 2 2
Reference: M.A.Chrisfield Nonlinear Finite Element Analysis of Solids and Structures. Vol. I. Essentials. Chapter 14. Wiley & Sons (1991)
364
Version 16.13
AQUA
M.A.Chrisfield Nonlinear Finite Element Analysis of Solids and Structures. Advanced Topics. Vol. II. Chapter 6. Wiley & Sons (1997)
3.10.12. Material Law GUDE

Elastoplastic material in its extended form according to Gudehus with non associated flow rule. f = q2 c7 p2 + c6 p c5 < 0 g = q2 c9 p2 + c8 p with: p = (x + y + z)/3 = (3sin)/(3+sin)
3 3 @ J3 q + 1 g ) 1 @ J 2 * g * 1 @ 2g 2 @ J2
c5 = (12c2cos2)/A ; A = (3sin )2 c6 = (24c cos sin)/A c7 = (12 sin2)/A c8 = (24c cos sin)/B ; c9 = (12 sinsin)/B Application range: soil and rock with friction and cohesion (module ASE, 3D solid elements) Parameters: P1 P2 P3 P4 P5 P6 P7 P8 = = = = = = = = friction angle cohesion tensile strength dilatatancy angle compressive strength (cap) plastic ultimate strain ultimate friction angle ultimate cohesion [degrees] c [kN/m2] z [kN/m2] [degrees] c [kN/m2] u [o/oo] u [grad] cu [kN/m2] Default values: (0.) (0.) (0.) (0.) () (0.) (P1) (P2) B = (3sin )(3sin)
Version 16.13
365
AQUA
Special comments:
This law is capable of describing a multitude of plane or curved yield surfaces. For =1 a circle in the deviatoric plane is obtained. The dilatation angle is usually set either to zero or equal to the friction angle. By specification of parameter P5 the model can optionally be extended by a spherical cap (in principal stress space) that limits the volumetric compressive stress to a maximum value. This can be meaningful in particular for mainly hydrostatic compression. The cap is defined by: f + s 1 2 ) s 2 2 ) s 3 2 * P 5 ) P 5 ) P 5 v 0
2 2 2
Reference: W.Wunderlich, H.Cramer, H.K.Kutter, W.Rahn Finite Element Modelle fr die Beschreibung von Fels Mitteilung 8110 des Instituts fr konstr.Ingenieurbau der Ruhr Universitt Bochum, 1981
3.10.13. Material Law LADE

Elastoplastic material according to LADE with nonassociated flow rule.
3 f + I1 *27 ) p1 @ 3 g + I1 *27 ) p4 @
with
p a I1
@ I v 0
m
p a I1
@ I
m
pa = 103.32 kN/m2 = atmospheric air pressure I1 + * s 1 * P 3 * s 2 * P 3 * s 3 * P 3 I3 + * s 1 * P 3 @ s 2 * P 3 @ s 3 * P 3 Application range: all materials with friction including rock and concrete (module ASE, 3D solid elements)
366
Version 16.13

Parameters: P1 P2 P3 P4 P5 P6 P7 P8 = = = = = = = = Parameter Exponent m Uniaxial tensile strength Parameter for flow rule Compressive strength (cap) Plastic ultimate strain Ultimate Parameter Ultimate Exponent m () () [kN/m2] c [kN/m2] u [o/oo]
AQUA
Default values:
(0.) () () (0.) (P1) (P2)
Special comments: Material LADE has shown very good compliance between analytical and experimental results. In practice therefore, the parameters can be taken from experiments on the materials strength. The law at hand can also describe concrete or ceramics. A simple comparison with the material parameters of the MohrCoulomb law can be made only if the invariant I1 is known. Due to the nonphysical parameters the calibration of the LADE yield function might not seem straight forward at first sight. For this reason, the basic procedure for a material with known uniaxial tensile and compressive strength (e.g. concrete) is described in the following. Of particular interest is the section of the threedimensional yield surface with one of the principal planes (> Kupfer Curve). Parameter P2 (exponent) affects the curvature (convexity) of the yield surface towards the hydrostatic axis the larger P2 the stronger the curvature. In this manner P2 determines the shape of the intersection curve. For most types of concrete a value of P2 between 1.0 and 2.0 is reasonable. Using the known quantities of uniaxial tensile and compressive strength and the chosen parameter P2, P1 can now be determined from the condition: For the stress state corresponding to the uniaxial compressive stress limit the yield condition must be fulfilled. We rewrite the yield function as:
I3 I1 1 P 1 + * 27@p I3 a
Version 16.13
The considered stress state is defined by (translated reference system):
367
AQUA
s I + s II + * ft s III + * ft ) f c I1 + s I ) s II ) s III ,
I3 + s I @ s II @ s III
Where ft+ P 3 and fc are the magnitudes of the uniaxial tensile and compressive strength, respectively, I1 and I3 the required invariants for this stress state. Substituing into the rewritten yield function yields the yet unknown parameter P1. The following table contains exemplary parameters for selected concrete types, derived from the procedure described above (classification according to EC2, Ultimate Limit State). Strength class C20/25 C30/37 C40/50 C50/60 fcd [kN/m2] 13333 20000 26667 33333 P3 (fctk;0.05) [kN/m2] 1500 2000 2500 2900 P2 [-] 1.0 1.5 1.0 1.5 1.0 1.5 1.0 1.5 P1 [-] 24669.11 324095.87 43466.02 689515.99 63426.77 1153410.57 88162.15 1778218.62
By specification of parameter P5 the model can optionally be extended by a spherical cap (in principal stress space) that limits the volumetric compressive stress to a maximum value. This can be meaningful in particular for mainly hydrostatic compression. The cap is defined by: f + s 1 2 ) s 2 2 ) s 3 2 * P 5 ) P 5 ) P 5 v 0
2 2 2
Reference: P.V.Lade Failure Criterion for Frictional Materials in Mechanics of Engineering Materials, Chap 20 (C.s.Desai,R.H.Gallagher ed.) Wiley & Sons (1984)
368
Version 16.13

3.10.14. Material Law MEMB
Parameters for textile membranes P1 P2 Maximum yielding force in kN/m default: no yielding for tension
AQUA
Factor for compression stiffness 0.0 no compressive stress possible 1.0 full compressive stress possible 0.1 intermediate values for scaling the elasticity modulus
3.10.15. User Defined Material Laws

Parameters for userdefined material laws (USP1..USP8 und USD1..USD8) For the advanced user the modules TALPA (for QUADelements) and ASE (for BRICelements) offer the possibility to plug in selfdeveloped nonlinear material models via an interface (currently only for WINDOWSOS). The following paragraphs describe the interface in detail. The userdefined material models have to be provided in a Dynamic Link Library (DLL) with arbitrary name. The variable SOFISTIK_USERMATDLL must be set with the name of this DLL. This can either be done by specification of SET SOFISTIK_USERMATDLL=my_material at the CMDcommand prompt or via adding the entry SOFISTIK_USERMATDLL=my_material into the SOFISTIK.DEF file. In both cases the user defined material models, in the DLL my_material.dll, are loaded at runtime. The interface routine itself reads: The parameter list consists of: NMAT3D_USD( Ss, SsPrim, deltaSn, SnIe, StateV, Mtype, ParMat, ElcMat, D, C, Ctrl, deltaTime, iNonl, iUpd, iErr, NrEl, iGP )
Version 16.13
369
AQUA
Input parameters: Parameter Ss SsPrim deltaSn SnIe StateV Mtype Dim 6 6 6 6 10 1 Type Double Double Double Double Double
Description Elastic stress tensor (trial stress) [xx,yy,zz,xy,xz,yz] Stress tensor primary state [xx,yy,zz,xy,xz,yz] Strain increment related to primary state [xx,yy,zz,xy,xz,yz] not used State variables
ParMat ElcMat
12 16
Integer Identifier for material type USP1-USP8 -> 101-108 USD1-USD8 -> 109-116 Double Non-linear material parameters P1-P12 Double Elastic material constants from record 001/No:1, @1-@14 (where appropriate multiplied with factor of stiffness FACS!). Additionally FACS at pos 15 and, as the case may be thickness of QUADelement at pos 16. Elastic material stiffness matrix Elastic compliance Control values from CTRL MSTE- record not used
D C Ctrl deltaTime NrEl iGP
(6,6) (6,6) 5 1 1 1
Double Double Single Double
Integer Element number Integer Identifier for Gauss-Point
370
Version 16.13

Return values: Parameter Ss SnIe StateV D iNonl iUpd Dim 6 6 10 (6,6) 1 1 Type Double Double Double Double not used Updated state variables Description
AQUA
Updated stress tensor [xx,yy,zz,xy,xz,yz]
iErr
Updated (tangential) material stiffness matrix Integer =0 for linear-elastic response =1 for non-linear response Integer =0 no update of stiffness matrix =1 update of stiffness matrix (only ASE) Integer Error indicator =0 no error =1 error -> program terminates =-99 no user defined material model provided -> program terminates
Version 16.13
371
AQUA
3.11.
Item
BMAT Elastic Support / Interface

Description
BMAT
Unit Default
NO C CT CRAC YIEL MUE COH DIL GAMB TYPE
Material number Elastic constant normal to surface Elastic constant tangential to surface Maximum tensile stress of interface Maximum stress of interface Friction coefficient of interface Cohesion of interface Dilatancy coefficient Equivalent mass distribution Reference PESS Plane stress condition PAIN Plane strain condition HALF Circular disk at halfspace CIRC Circular hole in infinite disk SPHE Sperical hole in infinite space NONE no reference Number of a reference material Reference dimension (thickness/radius)
kN/m3 kN/m3 kN/m2 kN/m2 kN/m2
1 0. 0. 0. 0. 0
t/m2 LIT
MREF H
NO !
The bedding approach works according to the subgrade modulus theory (Winkler, Zimmermann/Pasternak). It facilitates the definition of elastic supports by an engineering trick which, among others, ignores the shear deformations of the supporting medium. The bedding effect may be attached to beam or plate elements, but in general it will be used as an own element. (see SPRI, BOUN, BEAM or QUAD and the more general description of BORE profiles) The determination of a reasonable value for the foundation modulus often presents considerable difficulty, since this value depends not only on the material parameters but also on the geometry and the loading. One must always keep this dependance in mind, when assessing the accuracy of the results of an analysis using this theory. The subgrade parameters C and CT will be used for bedding of QUAD elements or for the description of support or interface conditions. A QUAD element of a slab foundation will thus have a concrete material and via BMAT the soil properties at-
372
Version 16.13
AQUA
tached to the same material number. The value C is than acting in the main direction perpendicular to the QUAD surface in the local zdirection, while CT is acting in any shear direction in the QUAD plane. If subgrade parameters are assigned to the material of a geometric edge (GLN), spring elements will be generated along that edge based on the width and the distance of the support nodes. Instead of a direct value you may select a reference material and a reference dimension for some cases with constant pressure [1]: Planar layer with horizontal constraints e.g. for modelling elastic support by columns and supporting walls (plane stress condition):
1 Cs + E @ H (1 ) m)(1 * m)
1 Ct + E @ H 2(1 ) m)
Planar layer with horizontal constraints for settlements of soil strata (plane strain condition):
(1 * m) Cs + E @ H (1 ) m)(1 * 2m) 2 Cs + E @ R p(1 ) m)(1 * m)
Ct + E @ 1 H (1 ) m)
Equivalent circular disk with radius R on an infinite halfspace:
Circular hole in unfinite disk with plane strain conditions (bedded pipes or piles):
1 Cs + E @ R (1 ) m)(1 * 2m) Cs + E @ 2 R (1 ) m)
C t + Cs
Spherical hole with radius R in infinite 3D elastic continua:
C t + Cs
Including a dilatancy factor describing the normal strain induced by shear deformations, we have for the stresses the following equations:
s + C s @ (u n ) DIL @ ut) t + Ct @ ut Version 16.13 373
AQUA
Nonlinear effects are controlled by CRAC, YIEL, MUE and COH: Cracking: Upon reaching the failure stress, the interface fails in both the axial and the lateral direction. The failure load is always a tensile stress. If the bedding reaction is applied to a QUAD element, a deformation in the direction of the local zaxis will create compressive (negative) stresses. Upon reaching the yield stress, the principal deformation component of the interface increases without an increase of the stress. Defining a friction and/or a cohesion coefficient, the lateral shear stress can not become larger than: Friction coefficient * normal stress + Cohesion Please note, that before reaching this limit the stiffness CT will produce the shear stress only if a deformation is present. If the principal interface has failed (CRAC), then the lateral bedding acts only if 0.0 has been entered for both friction coefficient and cohesion. The nonlinear effects can only be taken into account by a nonlinear analysis. The friction is an effect of the lateral bedding, while all other effects act upon the principal direction. [1] Katz, C., Werner, H. (1982) Implementation of nonlinear boundary conditions in Finite Element Analysis Computers & Structures Vol. 15 No. 3 pp. 299304
Yield load:
Friction/cohesion:
374
Version 16.13
AQUA
3.12.
Item
HMAT Material Constants HYDRA

Description
HMAT
Unit Default
NO TYPE
Material number Type of material law DARC Darcy (linear) FORC Forchheimer MISS Mibach FOUR Fourier (linear) EC Concrete/Steel/Aluminium JONA Jonasson hydration HSCM ShrinkageCore model WESC Danish model acc. to Wesche FVOL isotrope stress factors FSIN anisotrope stress factors FSIT anisotrope stress factors Temperature or pore pressure level Isotrope permeability or conductivity or anisotrope permeability/conductivity or parameters A, B (Forchheimer), or parameters C,M (Mibach)
LIT
! *
TEMP KXX KYY KZZ KXY KXZ KYZ S NSP A B C QMAX TK TITL
grad/kPa m/sec W/Km * * * * 1/m J/Km3 kJ/m3 h Lit32
0 0. KXX KXX 0. 0. 0. 0. 0. * * * 0. 15
Specific Capacity/Storage coefficient effective porosity or moisture grade for EC4C Constant a for JONA / HSCM / WESC Constant b for JONA / WESC Constant c for WESC Maximum heat quantity for hydratation Reference time Designation of material
Version 16.13
375
AQUA
Material properties have to be selected according to literature or experimental data. But some rough estimates (without warranty) are given here. For any material there might be up to 15 different sets of materials for different temperatures [ Celsius] or pore water pressures [kPa = kN/m2]. With a nonlinear analysis the material values will then be interpolated between those values. Within HYDRA the user has the possibility to define material properties for the elements either via a given material number (engineering constructions) or via the nodes (element material number = 0), especially for ground water models. Both methods may be used together within the same system.
3.12.1. Hydraulic Parameters

Hydraulic permeabilities (acc. Dyck, Peschke): Type of soil Sandy gravel Gravelly sand Medium sand Silty sand Sandy silt Silty clay Clay k [m/sec] 310-3 ... 510-4 110-3 ... 210-4 410-4 ... 110-4 210-4 ... 110-5 510-5 ... 110-6 510-6 ... 110-8 10-8
Positive pressures represent saturated flow regions while negative values describe unsaturated soils. Conductivities and Capacities will be interpolated. Free surface problems also use a variation of the porosity to account for the effective capacity of the free surface. Material values may be defined isotropic or anistropic depending on a stress state from the database. This is performed by additional data given with the same material number and the types FVOL, FSIN or FSIT. The difference between FSIN and FSIT is given by the fact that FSIN modifies the values across the crack, while FSIT does this perpendicular to the crack. It is recommended to use a linear stress field for that purpose and not a plasticity field.
376
Version 16.13

3.12.2. Heat Conduction.
Thermal properties (S = specific capacity*Weight): Material P.concrete LW concrete concrete brickwork insulations Steel copper Aluminium Timber Water Conductivity l [W/Km] 0.14 ... 1.20 0.70 ... 1.20 1.60 ... 2.10 0.50 ... 1.30 0.020 ... 0.090 50 380 200 0.13 ... 0.20 0.58 Capacity c [J/kgK] 1050 1050 1050 950 850 850 850 850 2500 4187 (S = c) Elongation coeff. [-]
AQUA
Emission rate e [-]
1.010-5 0.93 0.06 0.67 0.04 0.78 0.05 0.30
1.210-5 1.610-5 2.410-5 0.1810-3
With the definition of a literal at TYPE (default as specified with MATE) from the following list, default values will be selected according EN 12524: AIR Air (1 bar, 20 deg Celsius) H2O Water (1 bar, 10 deg. Celsius) CO2, O, N Carbondioxid, Oxygen, Nitrogen AR, KR, XE, SF6 Argon, Krypton, Xenon, Sulfurhexafluorid GLAS, ESG VSGh, VSGv TVG Cu, Pb, Mg, W, Zn BRAS, BRON CLAY, SAND ROC1, ROC2 ROC3, ROC4 BRIC, SLBR, CLIN IGYP, GYPS MOGY, MOCH, MOCE ASPH, BITU Version 16.13 Floatglass, toughened safety glas laminated (horiz./vertical usage), semitempered glas Copper, Lead, Magnesia, Wolfram, Zinc brass, bronce clay, sand crystal rock, sediment rock light sediments, porous rock brick, sandlimebrick, clincer isolat. gypsum, standard gypsum plaster gypsum/chalc/cement mortar Asphalt, Bitumen
377
AQUA
CARP, WOOL CORK, LINO EPOX, PHEN, PEST ACRY, PC, PTFE PVC, PMMA POM, PA PEHD. PELD PS. PP, PUR RUBB, NEOP, EBON EPDM, PSUL, BUTA SI, SILA FOAM, FOAS, FOAU FOAC, FOAR, FOAE

Carpet, Felt/Wool Cork, Linoleum Epoxid, Phenol, Polyester resin Acryl, Polycarbonat, Polytetrafluorethylen Polyvinylchlorid, Polymethylmethakrylat Polyazetat, Polyamid/Nylon Polyethylen high/low density Polystyrol, Polypropylen, Polyurethan Rubber, Neopren, Ebonit EthylenPropylenedien,Polysulfid,Butadien Silicone, Silica foamed rubber, silicone, urethan foamed PVC, PUR, PE
The type EC and the moisture ratio NSP will select the non linear properties depending on the material type available in the database (concrete, lightweight concrete, structural steel and aluminium and timber) according to EN. With explicit definition of a TEMPvalue it is possible to create and modify tabulated values. The types EC4C and EC4S allow a direct approach without a material definition in the database.
378
Version 16.13
AQUA
4500 1.80 1.60 1.40 1.20 1.00 0.800 0.600 0.400 0.200 0.0 100.00 200.00 300.00 400.00 500.00 600.00 700.00 800.00 900.00 0.00 1000.00 1200.00 1100.00 [ C] 4000 3500 3000 2500 2000
S [kJ/m3/K]
k [W/m/K]
1500 1000 500 0.0 100.00 200.00 300.00 400.00 500.00 600.00 700.00 800.00 900.00 0.00 1000.00 1200.00 1200.00 1200.00 1100.00 1100.00 1100.00 [ C]
Conductivity and Capacity of Concrete The thermal conductivity of the concrete is given by an upper (A=1.0) and a lower (A=0.0) limit. The special effect for S is the evaporation of pore water.
50.0 45.0 40.0 35.0 30.0 25.0 20.0 15.0 10.0 5.00 0.0 100.00 200.00 300.00 400.00 500.00 600.00 700.00 800.00 900.00 0.00 1000.00 1200.00 1100.00 [ C] 12000
18000 16000 14000
k [W/m/K]
10000 8000 6000 4000 2000 0.0 100.00 200.00 300.00 400.00 500.00 600.00 700.00 800.00 900.00 0.00 1000.00 [ C]
S [kJ/m3/K]
Conductivity and Capacity of Structural Steel

1.50 1.40 1.30 1.20 1.10 1.00 0.900 0.800 0.700 0.600 0.500 0.400 0.300 0.200 0.100 100.00 200.00 300.00 400.00 500.00 600.00 700.00 800.00 900.00 0.00 1000.00 1100.00
k [W/m/K]
7.00 6.50 6.00 5.50 5.00 4.50 4.00 3.50 3.00 2.50 2.00 1.50 1.00 0.500
100.00
200.00
300.00
400.00
500.00
600.00
700.00
800.00
1200.00
900.00
0.00
Conductivity and Capacity of Timber
1000.00
[ C]
S [kJ/m3/K]
[ C]
Version 16.13
379
AQUA
3.12.3. Hydration of Concrete

For the hydration of concrete it is required to know the maximum heat release QMAX, a function for the effective age of concrete (see HYDRA CTRL TEFF) and a formula for the hydration degree governing all other properties. There are numerous possibilities with different parameters. All of them have in common: TEMP QMAX TK S Eine Referenztemperatur [C] The maximum heat quantity [kJ/m3] The reference time k [h] The exponent for maturity function acc. Saul 10 ! 15 1.00
TYPE JONA Function of Jonasson, an extension to the Byfors definition:

a tw a + expb ln 1 ) t k
Examples of those constants a,b and k can be found in Appendix A of Heft 512 of the German DAfStB, printed with the input record HMAT but the general rule is that you need tests! Unfortunately there are publications with exchanged parameters a and b. A,B Parameters a and b [} 1.15,1.00
The values have to be determined from experiments, values for the total heat in the literature are often defined in [kJ/kg] . However the following values might give a rough idea: TYPE HSCM ShrinkageCore model:
a+
1 ) a tw * t k
a t w * t k
t w u t k
k is a period with very low chemical reaction, named d in the original formula. Values for a mass concrete are given by Dussinger: k = 2.88 [h] a = 0.029 [1/h] TYPE WESC Danish model according to Wesche:
380
Version 16.13

t b k a + exp * tw
b+ w f cc(t) + a expct *0.55c + c 1 0 f cc(28d) z
AQUA
The water cement ratio w0/z has to be incorporated in the input value c. Please note that parameter a is used in the original with two different meanings. The following parameters for the Wesche model can be found in the literature. Values for a mass concrete (Z 35L) are given by Dussinger: k b w0/z a c1 = 24.87 [h] = 0.84 [] = 0.68 [] = 1.63 [] = 4.4 [] => c = 4.4 S 0.68 = 2.99
Hint: If the maturity function according to Saul is used, the exponent s there might be specified with item S.
Version 16.13
381
AQUA
3.13.
Item
CONC Properties of Concrete

Description
CONC
Unit Default
NO TYPE
Material number (1999) Type of concrete: C, LC regular / lightweight for more types see following remarks Nominal strength class (fck/fcwk/fc etc.) Compressiv strength of concrete Tensile strength of concrete Lower fractile strength value Elastic modulus Poissons ratio or shear modulus Unit weight Thermal expansion coefficient Typical material safety factor Type of service state line LINE = constant elastic modulus A,B C = shorttime lines (Eurocode2) Strength for nonlinear analysis Elastic modulus for servicability Design bond strength Fatigue strength Design tensile strength Equiv. tensile strength after cracking Ultimate tensile strength Shear modulus Bulk modulus Density Energy at break for compressive failure Energy at break for tensile failure Friction in cracks Material name
LIT
1 *
FCN FC FCT FCTK EC MUE GAM ALFA SCM TYPR
N/mm2 N/mm2 N/mm2 N/mm2 N/mm2 kN/m3 1/K LIT
* * * * * 0.2 25 1E5 * *
FCR ECR FBD FFAT FCTD FEQR FEQT GMOD KMOD RHO GC GF MUEC TITL
N/mm2 N/mm2 N/mm2 N/mm2 N/mm2 N/mm2 N/mm2 N/mm2 N/mm2 kg/m3 N/mm N/mm Lit32
* * * * 0.0 FCTD FEQR * * * * * * *
382
Version 16.13

3.13.1. Eurocode / DIN 10451 / OEN B 4700
AQUA
According to Eurocode EN 1992 and other design codes derived from that the following types are available: C LC = regular concrete = lightweight concrete
The cylindrical strength is always to be input for FCN. The possible values are given in table 3.1 and 3.2 of EN, resp. table 9 and 10 of DIN 10451 resp. table 4 of OEN B 4700 and not repeated here in detail. The default value is 20. FCN = fck fck,cube FCN fck,cube 12 15 55 67 16 20 60 75 20 25 70 85 25 30 80 95 30 37 90 105 35 45 100 115 40 50 45 55 50 60
Some properties are dependent on so called boxed values or other national regulations. The definition of NORM COUN is used to select those boxed values. As OEN and DIN 10451 differ considerably from the EC 2, you should use NORM to select the proper design code family. The default values for strength and elastic modulus are derived as follows: FC = 0.85 fck (fck < 55) (fck > 55) (EN 1992 1992) (EN 1992 2004) (Tbl. 5.3.)
FCT = 0.3 fck 2/3 = 2.12 ln((fck+8)/10+1) EC EC = 9500 ( fck + 8 ) 0.3 = 22000 ( fcm /10 ) 0.3
FBD = 2.25 fct,0.05/
The coefficients cc and lc for the long term strength effects are defined in the national annexes. The Eurocode suggests values between 0.8 and 1.0 and recommends as default the value of 1.0. However SOFiSTiK uses a default on the safe side of 0.85, if not specified explicitly in the INIfile according to the national annex. An explicit definition of FC = ccSFCN is possible of cause. However, for the fatigue, bond or tensile strength values all corrective factors and the safety should be included in the input data.
Version 16.13
383
AQUA
For the elasticity modules we have to distinguish between a secant modulus Ecm (Input value EC of this record) for elastic deformations, especially constraining forces and a tangential modulus Ec0,28 = 1.05 Ecm or Ec0,28 = Ecm / i , used for creep and nonlinear analysis (input item ECR) where Heft 525 of DAfStb chapter 9.1 provides: i = 0.8 + 0.2 fcm / 88 < 1.0
For lightweight concrete (LC) according to EC24, the elasticity module EC must be defined either explicitly or by means of GAM. For GAM also the density class is accepted and GAM and EC will then be defined appropriately. For the density in kg/m3 we have = (1.5)100 Ecml = Ecm ( /2200 ) 2
For lightweight concrete, the tensile strength and bond values and limit strains will be scaled by a factor 1. For the ultimate limit stress strain law the bilinear version is selected. The different coefficients for natural sand and other components are selected by AQUA automatically based on the defined weight and strength. The fatigue strength may be specified with item FFAT. The formula given in DIN 10451 (124) is as follows:
f cd,fat + b cc(t 0) f cd 1 * b cc(t 0) + e 0.2(1*28t 0)
f ck 250
For detailed analysis of concrete according to appendix 1 you need to know the kind of cement. You may specify this by appending a literal to the concrete grade N S R normal cement ( = 0.0) slow hardening cement ( = 1.0) fast hardening / high strength cement ( = +1.0)
In case of a fire design it is required to distinguish between quartzitic and calcareous aggregates. For the second case an additonal character C may be appended to the cement type: NC, SC and RC. The usual stressstrain curve of the C types is the parabolicrectangular stress strain diagram of Eurocode 2 / DIN 1045 / OeNORM B 4200 / SIA 162. For non linear analysis or deformation analysis, there are other types A/B available, following the expression:
384
Version 16.13

s + kn * n 2 fc 1 ) (k * 2)n
with n = / c1 k = Ec0 c1/fc
AQUA
For fc the value fck+8 is used for the curves A and B . The maximum strain is limited according to the strength. The B line does not possess a descending branch, and it is thus possibly more stable numerically. The C line has its stress values even for very large strains and will be the most robust case. The safety factors SCM are preset to 1.5 (in Italy to 1.6). However, they should be selected at the design explicitly, because they are dependent on the loading combinations. For concrete with high strength the factor will be increased by , which will be incorporated in the strainstress laws immediately, to allow a global safety factor to be used for the design. For nonlinear analysis with a unified safety factor according to DIN 10451 the strength of the concrete will be reduced to a value of 0.85fck, while those of the reinforcements will be raised. These non linear analysis stressstrain laws are generated automatically. For steel fibre concrete according to DBVMerkblatt (Oct. 2001, 4.2) it is allowed to use higher concrete tensile bending strength values for elements not thicker than 60 cm. If desired the user has to enter that value of FCTD explicitly. (with a factor of 1.6d). However only if a value is given for FCTD FEQR or FEQT the tensile strength of the concrete is applied for the design and nonlinear analysis. Values are defined as follows: FCTD FEQR FEQT f c sys fct = f,ctd = feq,ctd,i = feq,ctd,ii = f,ctk,fi fc / fct = feq,ctk,i fc sys / fct = feq,ctk,ii fc sys / fct
= 0.85 (C) / 0.75 (LC) = 1.0 0.8 (d = 15 60 cm, Bild 4.1) = 1.25 (> F0.6)
With these values the stress strain laws according to pictures 4.2 or 4.3. of the DBV paper are created. The increased saftey factor according 2.4.2.5 EN 1992 (2004) for cast in place piles with kf = 1.1 has to be specified by the user explicitly.
Version 16.13
385
AQUA
The old DIN can be addressed with: B LB SB
3.13.2. DIN 1045 old / DIN 4227 / DIN 18806:

= regular concrete (DIN) = lightweight concrete (DIN) = prestressed concrete (DIN)
The default FCN is 25 for B and LB, and 45 for SB. FCT is defined by: FCT = 0.25 FCN 2/3 Defaults in accordance with old DIN 1045 / DIN 4227 / DIN 18806: FCN FC: B (DIN 1045) B (DIN 4227) FBD: B (DIN 1045) EC 10 7 22000 15 10.5 1.4 26000 25 17.5 15.0 1.8 30000 35 23 21 2.2 34000 45 27 27 2.6 37000 55 30 33 3.0 39000
as well as the following highstrength concretes: FCN FC EC 65 40.0 40500 75 45.0 42000 85 50.0 43000 95 55.0 44000 105 60.0 44500 115 64.0 45000
The elastic modulus or the weight has to be specified in case of lightweight concrete. However, the density class according to DIN 4219 (1.0 2.0) may be input for item GAM. The default for GAM and EC then complies with DIN 1055. A bilinear stressstrain curve is usually employed for lightweight concrete. For detailed analysis of creep and shrinkage according to DIN 4227 you need the kind of cement and the consistency. You may specify this by appending a Literal to the class of concrete
386
Version 16.13

KS KP KR SL PL RL SR PR RR
AQUA
Normal cement (Z35 F/Z 45F) consistency stiff Normal cement (Z35 F/Z 45F) consistency plastic Normal cement (Z35 F/Z 45F) consistency soft slow hardening cement (Z 25, Z35L / Z45L) / stiff slow hardening cement (Z 25, Z35L / Z45L) / plastic slow hardening cement (Z 25, Z35L / Z45L) / soft very fast hardening cement (Z 55) / stiff very fast hardening cement (Z 55) / plastic very fast hardening cement (Z 55) / soft
DIN 4227 has some contradictions about the bond stress. Chapter 13 gives values which correspond quite well to the ratios given in table 7 of appendix A1. But these values do not match those given at DIN 1045 Table 19. Thus we have decided to enlarge the FBD values for concrete SB by a factor of 1.43. With that amendment the value may be used for the bond design according to chapt. 13 of DIN 4227. For standard concrete a parabolarectangular stressstrain diagram will be selected according to Eurocode EC2 / DIN 1045 / NORM B4700 / SIA 162. SCM will default to 1.00. If you analyse composite sections you might want to change the value. High strength concrete will have lesser ultimate strains.
3.13.3. NORM B 4700 / B 4750

Although the OENORM B 4700 calls itself close to Eurocode, it deviates just with the classification of concrete based on the cubic strength instead of the cylindrical strength. As the designation is C resp. LC the user has to select the option NORM OEN. B LB C LC = regular concrete based on cube strength (NORM 4700) = lightweight concrete on cube strength (NORM 4700) = regular concrete on cylindrical strength (NORM 4700) = lightweight concrete, cylindrical strength (NORM 4700)
The default FCN is 25 resp. 20. Defaults in accordance with OeNORM B 4700: FCN FC FCT EC 20.0 15.0 1.9 27500 25.0 18.8 2.2 29000 30.0 22.5 2.6 30500 40.0 30.0 3.0 32500 50.0 37.5 3.5 35000 60.0 45.0 4.1 37000
Version 16.13
387
AQUA
SCM is preset to 1.5, FCTK to 0.7FCT.
3.13.4. Swiss Standard SIA

The SIA 262 (2003) is very similar to the Eurocodes, but there are numerous deviations (EModulus, bond strength, stressstrain law). As type we have therefore: C LC = cylindrical strength of regular concrete (SIA 262) = cylindrical strength of lightweight concrete (SIA 262)
The elastic moduli are calculated based on the mean strength. For lightweight concrete the values are corrected depending on the specific weight. The default stressstrain diagram is always according to the deformation stress strain law of EC2, even for the design. SCM will be preset with 1.5. FCN = fck fck,cube C fck,cube LC 12 15 13 16 20 18 20 25 22 25 30 28 30 37 33 35 45 38 40 50 44 45 55 50 50 60 55
According to the old SIA 162 (1989) as type we have SIAB SIAL = cube strength of regular concrete (SIA 162) = cube strength of lightweight concrete (SIA 162)
The elastic moduli are the mean values from Figure 31 in Section 5.18 of SIA. Half of the elasticity moduli are used for lightweight concrete. The default stress strain diagram is the parabolicrectangular one in accordance with Eurocode 2 / DIN 1045 / OeNORM B 4200 / SIA 162. SCM will be preset with 1.2. FCN FCNmin FC FCT EC 20.0 10.0 6.5 2.0 29000 25.0 15.0 10.0 2.0 31000 30.0 20.0 13.0 2.0 33500 35.0 25.0 16.0 2.5 35000 40.0 30.0 19.5 2.5 36000 45.0 30.0 23.0 2.5 37000
388
Version 16.13

3.13.5. French BAEL99
AQUA
The Association francaise de normalisation has published with the BAEL 91 (Rgle techniques de conception et de calcul des ouvrages et construction en beton arm suivant la methode des tats limites) a design code with similar regulations as the Eurocode but also with some deviations in several points. We have implemented the revision of 1999. This code allows a characteristic strength of the concrete depending on the age of the concrete and a calculation strength depending on the duration of the loading tl, to be defined by the user explicitly. Further we have: FC = 0.85/ fck = 1.00 = 0.90 = 0.85 (tl > 24 h) (24h > tl > 1 h) (1h > tl) (fck < 60) (fck > 60)
FCT = 0.6 + 0.06 fck = 0.275 fck 2/3 EC = 11000 fck1/3
FBD = 0.60 s2 fct,0.05/ ; s = 1.5 High strength concrete up to 80 is defined in appendix F. These have modified stressstrainlaws. There is also a class DUCT for the UHPRFC Ductal FM. For the stress strain law the values GF is taken as w0.3/lc.
3.13.6. Spanish EHE

The Spanish EHE (Instruccin de hormign estructural) is very similar to the Eurocode. Deviations are mainly in the designations, the elastic modulus and in the design algorithms itself. HA HP = Hormign masa/armado = Hormign pretensado 20, 25, 30, 35, 40, 45, 50 25, 30, 35, 40, 45, 50
Version 16.13
389
AQUA
3.13.7. Swedish BBK
The Swedish BBK has rather complex provisions for the safety factors, which are influenced by the safety class (see NORM) and are different for the elasticity modulus and the strength. The following types are available for the 94Release. K LK = 16, 20, 25, 30, 35, 40, 45, 50, 55, 60, 70, 80 = 8, 12, 16, 20, 25, 30, 35, 40, 45, 50, 55, 60, 70, 80
The new release (2004) uses now the designations according to the EC, but keeps the safety concept of the old BBK. Then we have: C LC = 16, 20, 25, 28, 30, 35, 40, 45, 50, 54, 55, 58, 60 = 8, 12, 16, 20, 25, 30, 35, 40, 45, 50, 55, 60
As the BBK does not state any details about the transition zone in the work law, the user has the possibility to influence with FCR between 0.6FCK and 1.0FCK the shape of this curve.
3.13.8. Danish DS 411

The Swedish BBK has very complex provisions for the safety factors, which are influenced by the safety class (see NORM). The following types are available: C = 16, 20, 25, 30, 35, 40, 45, 50, 55, 60
For Emodulus and tensile strength specific formulas are provided in the design codes. For the design it is allowed to use a rectangular stress block, but the default is the ParabulaRectangleDiagram.
3.13.9. Norwegian NS 3473

The classification of the Norwegian concretes NS is based on the cylindrical strength. Avilable values are 20 / 25 / 30 / 35 /45 / 55 / 65 / 75 / 85 / 95. For Lightweight concrete (LNS) the highest strength class is 75.
3.13.10. Italian design codes

The design code Decreto Ministeriale Italiane published in 1996 as well as the 2005 version of the Norme Tecniche classifies the concrete based on the cubic strength Rck. Even the Version of 2008 favours this type of strength.
390
Version 16.13

CAN CAL CAN CAN CAP
AQUA
= 2008 regular concrete with cube strength fwk (=1.50) = 2008 light weight concrete with cylindrical strength fck (=1.50) = 2005 regular concrete with cube strength Rck (=1.90) = 1996 regular concrete with cube strength Rck (=1.60) = 1996 prestressed concrete with cube strength Rck (=1.50)
The default values for design strength and elastic modulus are as follows: FC = 0.830.85Rck (1996) (1996) (1996) = 0.85 fck = 0.30 fck 2/3 = 22000 ( fcm/10) 0.3 (2008) (2008) (2008)
FCT = 0.27 Rck 2/3 EC = 5700 Rck 1/2
FBD = 2.25 fct,0.05 /
3.13.11. Hungarian design codes

The classification of the Hungarian design codes is based on the cylindrical strength. Avilable values are 16 / 20 / 25 / 30 / 35 / 40 / 45 / 50 / 55.
3.13.12. British Standard BS 8110

As type we have: BS = normal weight concrete BS 8110
The nominal strength FCN is the cube strength. The design strength is obtained by FC = 0.67 FCN British Standard employ a parabolic rectangle curve, starting from a design cube strength = FC/0.67 with 0.24 strain at full plasticity and an initial stiffness of 5.5 according to Figure 2.1. The safety factor SCM is preset to 1.5. The bond strength will be set to the nonphysical maximum value for table 3.28 of BS 8110 of fc. For Hong Kong slight modifications to British Standards are selected with the country code 852. The initial stiffness will then be 5.0 .
Version 16.13
391
AQUA
3.13.13. American concrete institute ACI 318M

As class we have the specified compressive strength fc in MPa: ACI = normal weight concrete ACI 318M
The test values of the cylindrical strength have to exceed the class value by a certain amount based on the standard deviation. Chapter 5.3 specifies default values for this required distance as 7.0, 8.5 and 10.0 MPa for class values of fc up to 21, until 35 and above. As the value of f c should not exceed the value of 25/3 MPa in general and different reductions have to be applied for lightweight concrete, we use the tensile stress to define the value of f c . The modulus of rupture fr is the upper fractile value of the tension strength. ACI 9.5.2.3 defines: f r + 0.75 * f c t 0.75 * 253 or for lightweight concrete: f r + 0.70 * 0.75 * f c f r + 0.70 * min(f c , 1.8 * f ct*m)
The ratio of the fractiles is thus 1.26. The mean value fctm will be preset to 0.5 * f c. All other values will be derived from this value by a factor. If needed the lower fractile may be given, which will then set the upper value. But this value is only used for those cases where explicitly the value fr is used within a formula. The bond strength will be set to the nonphysical maximum value for chapter 12.2 of ACI 318 to a value of fc.
3.13.14. Brasilian NBR 61182003

As class we have NBR or C, where the used cement type is appended to the strength class: NBR 25 (for Cement Classes CP I and CP II) NBR 25L (for Cement Classes CP III and CP IV) NBR 25R (for Cement Classes CP VARI) The modulus of elasticity is given by Eci = 5600Sfck1/2 and Ecs = 0.85Eci. The design curve is a ParabolaRectangle with 0.85Sfcd, as tensile strength we have
392
Version 16.13
AQUA
fct,m = 0.3Sfck2/3; fct,kinf = 0.7Sfct,m; fct,sup = 1.3Sfct,m. Bond strength fbd = 1S2S3Sfctk,inf/c ; 1=2.25.
3.13.15. Australian AS 3600 and New Zealand NZS 3101

TYPE AS or TYPE NZS selects the respective standard. The characteristic compressive strength (i.e. 20, 25,32, 40, 50 or 65 MPa) can be entered using FCN (e.g. CONC TYPE AS FCN 50). Only selected material parameters are currently predefined explicitly for AS and NZS standards. The modulus of elasticity is a function of the mean strength value which is not provided in these design codes. Therefore the modulus of elasticity is estimated similar to the EC.
3.13.16. Japanese Standards

Japan has few official standards. As type we have the values from the books of the Japan Road Association (2002): JIS = Japan concrete
The nominal strength FCN (21 to 60) as well as the elasticity and shear modulus are given in table 3.3.3 (JRA). The design strength is 0.85 fcn.
3.13.17. Chinese Standards

According to GB 500102002 we have: GB = Standard and high strength concrete
The nominal strength FCN (15 to 80) and the the design strength are taken from table 4.1.3./4. Youngs modulus is derived from 4.1.5.
3.13.18. Indian Standards IS / IRC

As type we have: M IS IRC = Generic type for all design codes = Indian Standards IS 456 (10 bis 80) = Indian Roads Congress IRC 21 (15 bis 60)
With the IRC 112 a complety new design code has been released, which is strongly related to the Eurocode EN 1992. The nominal strength FCN is now the cylindrical strength. However there are a lot of deviations in the coefficients, which are not all described here. For example the mean strength fcm is defined as fck+10 and the tensile strength is about 13% less. More details may be found in the chapter for the Eurocode.
Version 16.13
393
AQUA
The nominal strength FCN is the cube strength in the IS 456 / IRC 21. The design strength there is obtained by FC = 0.67 FCN The elasticity modulus is preset according to IS to 5000 * f ck, for IRC according to table 9. For the Indish Standards the default is the limit state method which uses a standard parabola rectangle diagram. The working stress method ((IRC resp. Annex B of IS 456) may be selected via the type CE. The mean tensile strength is preset to 0.7 * f ck , the safety factor SCM to 1.5. The bond strength will be set according to chapter 26.2.1.1. of IS 456.
3.13.19. Egyptian Standard ET RC2001

As type we have: CET where Standard concrete of the quality 15,20,25,30 SCM = 1.5 GAM = 24.0 EC = 4400. * FCT = 0.8 *
f ck
FC = 0.67 fck
f ck FCTK = 0.6 * f ck 95% fctk = 1.0 * f ck FBD = 0.3 * f ck1.5

3.13.20. Russian Standard SNIP
This design code has a wide range of classifications. Thus the user has to enter some specific values in some cases. Especially the safety factors for the loads are depending on the environmental conditions and are not to be defined with the material here. SNIP Concrete with compressive strength class 10, 15, 20, 25, 30, 35, 40, 45, 50, 55, 60 as well for old SNIP 2.03.01 with possible appendices to the class value: T thermal treatment
394
Version 16.13
AQUA
LSNI
TW thermal treatment in Autoclave A fine granular concrete group A (grain > 2.0) AT thermal treatment fine granular group A B fine granular concrete group B (grain < 2.0) BT thermal treatment fine granular group B W fine granular in Autoclave Light weight concrete with compressive strength class the property porous may be selected by appending a letter P to the class value.
The compressive and tensile strength is selected according to tables 5.15.3. The elasticity modulus is taken from table 5.4.
3.13.21. Linear Elastic Concrete

A linear elastic material without tensile stresses is specified for CE. This can be used for analysis of stress distributions of foundations or older design codes with the working stress method. FC is the allowed compressive stress in those cases. The modulus of this stress strain law should be less than EC in general and may be specified with Item ECR. Values less than 100 are treated as explicit modular ratio m = Es/Ec.
Version 16.13
395
AQUA
396
Version 16.13
AQUA
3.14.
Item
STEE Properties of Metals

Description
STEE
Unit Default
NO TYPE
CLAS FY FT FP ES MUE GAM ALFA SCM EPSY EPST REL1 REL2 R K1 FDYN FYC FTC TMAX GMOD KMOD QS TITL
Material number (1999) Type of the material S/Y Reinf./prestr. steel EC BST/PST Reinf./prestr. steel DIN S Structural steel EC/DIN AL,AC,AW Aluminium alloy more types see comments Steel class or quality Yield strength (f0.01 or f0.02) Tensile strength Elastic limit Elastic modulus Poissons ratio Unit weight Thermal expansion coefficient Default for AL: Typical material safety factor Permanent strain at yield strength Ultimate strain Coefficient of relaxation (0.70 ) Coefficient of relaxation (0.55 ) Relative bond strength Bond coefficient for crack width EC2 Allowed stress range Compressive yield strength (f0.02) Compressive strength Maximum plate thickness Shear modulus Bulk modulus Poisson ratio / shear modulus (obsoleted) Material name
LIT
1 *
* N/mm2 N/mm2 N/mm2 N/mm2 kN/m3 1/K
* * * * * 0.3 * 1.2E5 2.38E5 * * * * 0 * * * FY FT * * * * *
o/oo o/oo % LIT / % N/mm2 N/mm2 N/mm2 mm N/mm2 N/mm2 * Lit32
Version 16.13
397
AQUA
There are some, but not very rigorous checks about the usage. While structural steel types (e.g. S 235, ST, AL etc) can be used only for cross sections, prestressing steel is only allowed for reinforcements, cables and tendons.
3.14.1. Structural Steel

FY Eurocode: EN 199311 t < 40 mm Tab. 3.1 235 * S 235 275 S 275 355 S 355 440 S 450 275 S 275N 355 S 355N 420 S 420N 460 S 460N 275 S 275M 355 S 355M 420 S 420M 460 S 460M 235 S 235W 355 S 355W 460 S 460Q FT EPST FP EPSY ES GAM
360 430 510 550 390 490 520 540 370 470 520 540 360 510 570
210000 210000 210000 210000 210000 210000 210000 210000 210000 210000 210000 210000 210000 210000 210000
78.5 78.5 78.5 78.5 78.5 78.5 78.5 78.5 78.5 78.5 78.5 78.5 78.5 78.5 78.5
398
Version 16.13

FY FT EPST FP EPSY ES
AQUA
GAM
Eurocode: EN 199311 40 < t < 80 mm Tab. 3.1 215 360 S 235T 255 410 S 275T 335 470 S 355T 410 550 S 450T 255 370 S 275NT 335 470 S 355NT 390 520 S 420NT 430 540 S 460NT 255 360 S 275MT 335 450 S 355MT 390 500 S 420MT 430 530 S 460MT 215 340 S 235WT 335 490 S 355WT 440 550 S 460QT Eurocode: EN 100256 S 500Q S 550Q S 620Q S 690Q S 890Q S 960Q TMAX ...
*) *) *) *) *) *) *) *) *) *) *) *)
210000 210000 210000 210000 210000 210000 210000 210000 210000 210000 210000 210000 210000 210000 210000
78.5 78.5 78.5 78.5 78.5 78.5 78.5 78.5 78.5 78.5 78.5 78.5 78.5 78.5 78.5
210000 210000 210000 210000 210000 210000
78.5 78.5 78.5 78.5 78.5 78.5
*) Material values
in dependence on the defined max. thickness TMAX
For structural steel that should get the material values of the product standard EN 100252 till 6 the plate thickness TMAX has to be input. E.g. the input STEE 1 S 355 TMAX 80 STEE 2 S 355M TMAX 100 defines in the first case the limit values of the stiffnesses for the structural steel of the quality 355 according to EN 100252 for the plate thickness of 63 mm < t 80 mm und in the second case the limit values of the stiffnesses for the structural steel of the quality 355M according to EN 100253 for the plate thickness of
Version 16.13
399
AQUA
80 mm < t 100 mm.
Note: In the National Annexes the material values may be specified differently. FY DIN: ST 33 ST 37 ST 52 * S S S S S S S * GU GU GU GU GU GU 235 275 355 460 235 275 355 52 17 20 200 240 400 FT EPST FP EPSY ES 210000 210000 210000 210000 210000 210000 210000 210000 210000 210000 100000 210000 210000 210000 210000 169000 206000 206000 210000 210000 210000 210000 210000 210000 210000 210000 GAM 78.5 78.5 78.5 78.5 78.5 78.5 78.5 78.5 78.5 78.5 72.5 72.5 72.5 72.5 72.5 72.5 78.5 78.5 78.5 78.5 78.5 78.5 78.5 78.5 78.5 78.5
190 330 240 370 360 520 TMAX 40 (t < 40 mm): 240 360 275 430 360 510 460 600 TMAX 80 / 100 (40 < t < 80 / 100 mm): 215 340 255 410 335 490 260 240 300 200 240 250 285 355 520 370 500 380 450 390 430 540 230 285 .2 .2
OENORM: ST 44 ST 55 SIA: * S S S S S S S S 235 275 355 460 235 275 355 460
TMAX 40 (t < 40 mm): 235 360 275 430 355 510 460 550 TMAX 100 (40 < t < 100 mm): 215 340 255 410 335 490 430 530
3100
Version 16.13

FY British Standard: BS 275 BS 355 BS 460 BS 275 BS 355 * BS 460 BS 275 BS 355 BS 460 BS 275 BS 355 BS 460 BS 275 BS 355 BS 460 BS 275 BS 355 EA: EA 37 EA 42 EA 52 FT EPST FP EPSY ES
AQUA
GAM
TMAX 16 (t < 16 mm): 275 430 355 500 460 550 TMAX 40 (16 < t < 40 mm): 265 430 345 500 440 550 TMAX 63 (40 < t < 63 mm): 255 430 335 500 430 550 TMAX 80 (63 < t < 80 mm): 245 430 325 500 410 550 TMAX 100 (80 < t < 100 mm): 235 430 315 500 400 550 TMAX 150 (100 < t < 150 mm): 225 430 295 500 235 275 355 360 430 510
205000 205000 205000 205000 205000 205000 205000 205000 205000 205000 205000 205000 205000 205000 205000 205000 205000 210000 210000 210000
78.5 78.5 78.5 78.5 78.5 78.5 78.5 78.5 78.5 78.5 78.5 78.5 78.5 78.5 78.5 78.5 78.5 78.5 78.5 78.5
Version 16.13
3101
AQUA
FY BSK BSK235 BSK275 BSK355 BSK355N BSK355M BSK420 BSK460 BSK235 BSK275 BSK355 BSK355N BSK355M BSK420 BSK460 BSK275 BSK355 BSK355N BSK355M BSK420 BSK460 BSK275 BSK355 BSK355N BSK235 BSK275 BSK355 BSK355N FT

EPST FP EPSY ES 210000 210000 210000 210000 210000 210000 210000 210000 210000 210000 210000 210000 210000 210000 210000 210000 210000 210000 210000 210000 210000 210000 210000 210000 210000 210000 210000 GAM 78.5 78.5 78.5 78.5 78.5 78.5 78.5 78.5 78.5 78.5 78.5 78.5 78.5 78.5 78.5 78.5 78.5 78.5 78.5 78.5 78.5 78.5 78.5 78.5 78.5 78.5 78.5
TMAX 16 (t < 16 mm): 235 340 275 410 355 490 355 470 355 450 420 500 460 530 TMAX 40 (16 < t < 40 mm): 225 340 265 410 345 490 345 470 345 450 400 500 440 530 TMAX 63 (40 < t < 63 mm): 255 410 335 490 335 470 335 450 420 500 430 530 TMAX 80 (63 < t < 80 mm): 245 410 325 490 325 470 TMAX 100 (80 < t < 100 mm): 215 340 235 410 315 490 315 470
3102
Version 16.13

FY BSK BSK460Q BSK500Q BSK550Q BSK620Q BSK690Q BSK460Q BSK500Q BSK550Q BSK620Q BSK690Q NS NS NS NS NS NS NS NS NS NS NS NS NS NS NS NS NS NS NS NS NS NS NS NS NS 235 275 275N 275M 355 355N 355M 420N 420M 460N 460M 460Q 235 275 275N 275M 355 355N 355M 420N 420M 460N 460M 460Q FT EPST FP EPSY ES 210000 210000 210000 210000 210000 210000 210000 210000 210000 210000 210000 210000 210000 210000 210000 210000 210000 210000 210000 210000 210000 210000 210000 210000 210000 210000 210000 210000 210000 210000 210000 210000 210000 210000
AQUA
GAM 78.5 78.5 78.5 78.5 78.5 78.5 78.5 78.5 78.5 78.5 78.5 78.5 78.5 78.5 78.5 78.5 78.5 78.5 78.5 78.5 78.5 78.5 78.5 78.5 78.5 78.5 78.5 78.5 78.5 78.5 78.5 78.5 78.5 78.5
TMAX 50 (t < 50 mm): 460 550 500 590 550 640 620 700 690 770 TMAX 100 (50 < t < 100 mm): 440 550 480 590 530 640 580 700 650 760 TMAX 40 (t < 40 mm): 235 360 275 430 275 390 275 380 355 510 355 490 355 470 420 540 420 520 460 570 460 550 460 570 TMAX 80 (40 < t < 80 mm): 215 340 255 410 235 370 255 360 335 490 335 470 335 450 390 520 390 500 430 550 430 530 440 550
Version 16.13
3103
AQUA
FY DM96: FEI 360 FEI 430 FEI 510 FEI 360 FEI 430 FEI 510 FEG 400 FEG 430 FEG 520 MSZ: S S S 37 45 52 FT

EPST FP EPSY ES 206000 206000 206000 206000 206000 206000 206000 206000 206000 206000 206000 206000 200000 250 290 345 240 290 345 415 450 230 290 315 250 689 689 340 340 345 485 690 400 415 450 415 415 450 520 550 310 400 425 400 758 793 480 480 450 586 760 GAM 78.5 78.5 78.5 78.5 78.5 78.5 78.5 78.5 78.5 78.5 78.5 78.5 78.5
TMAX 40 (t < 40 mm) 235 360 275 430 355 510 TMAX 63,80,100 (t > 40 mm): 210 340 250 410 315 490 TMAX 40 (t < 40 mm): 180 225 255 230 290 350 370 450 520 200 240 280
AISC/ASTM; A 36 A 42 A 50 A 53 A 290 A 345 A 415 A 450 A 500A A 500B A 500C A 500D A 514 A 517 A 242 A 588 A 992 A 70W A 100W
(TMAX 63,152 mm) (TMAX 63,152 mm) (CORTEN, TMAX 19,25,102 mm) (CORTEN, TMAX 4,6,8 mm)
3104
Version 16.13

FY ABNT: NBR 250 NBR 350 NBR 415 Australian: AS 400 AS 400 AS 350 * AS 350 AS 350 AS 300 AS 300 AS 300 AS 250 AS 250 AS 250 AS AS AS AS * AS AS AS AS AS AS AS 400 400 400 350 350 350 300 300 300 250 250 250 350 415 FT 400 450 520 EPST FP EPSY ES 205000 205000 205000
AQUA
GAM 78.5 78.5 78.5
Flats and Sections: 400 520 TMAX 17 (0 mm < t < 17 mm) 380 520 TMAX 100 (17 mm < t < 100 mm) 360 480 TMAX 11 (0 mm < t < 11 mm) 340 480 TMAX 40 (11 mm < t < 40 mm) 330 480 TMAX 100 (40 mm < t < 100 mm) 320 440 TMAX 11 (0 mm < t < 11 mm) 300 440 TMAX 17 (11 mm < t < 17 mm) 280 440 TMAX >17 (17 mm < t) 260 410 TMAX 11 (0 mm < t < 11 mm) 250 410 TMAX 40 (11 mm < t < 40 mm) 230 410 TMAX >40 (40 mm < t) Hexagons, Rounds and Squares: 400 520 TMAX 50 (0 mm < t < 50 mm) 380 520 TMAX 100 (50 mm < t < 100 mm) 360 520 TMAX >100 (100 mm < t) 340 480 TMAX 50 (0 mm < t < 50 mm) 330 480 TMAX 100 (50 mm < t < 100 mm) 320 480 TMAX >100 (100 mm < t) 300 440 TMAX 50 (0 mm < t < 50 mm) 290 440 TMAX 100 (50 mm < t < 100 mm) 280 440 TMAX >100 (100 mm < t) 250 410 TMAX 50 (0 mm < t < 50 mm) 230 410 TMAX >50 (50 mm < t)
Version 16.13
3105
AQUA
FY JIS JIS 400 400 JIS 490 490 JIS 520 520 520 JIS 570 570 570 IS/IRC IS 250 GB Q 235 235 235 235 345 345 345 345 390 390 390 390 420 420 420 420 235 215 315 295 355 335 325 450 430 420 250 FT 400 400 490 490 520 520 520 520 530 530 250

EPST FP EPSY ES GAM
TMAX 40 (t 400 mm) 200000 77.0 TMAX 100 (40 mm < t 100 mm) (SS 400, SM 400 and SMA 400W identical) TMAX 40 200000 77.0 TMAX 100 ( 40 mm < t 100 mm) TMAX 40 200000 77.0 TMAX 75 (40 mm < t 75 mm) TMAX 100 75 mm < t 100 mm (SM 520, SM 490Y and SMA 490W identical) TMAX 40 200000 77.0 TMAX 75 (40 mm < t 75 mm) TMAX 100 (75 mm < t 100 mm) 211000 77.0 78.5
GB 500172003 215 360 205 200 190 310 295 265 250 350 335 315 295 380 360 340 325 490
TMAX 16 210000 TMAX 40 (16 mm < t < 40 mm) TMAX 60 (40 mm < t < 60 mm) TMAX 100 (60 mm < t < 100 mm) TMAX 16 210000 TMAX 35 (16 mm < t < 35 mm) TMAX 50 (35 mm < t < 50 mm) TMAX 100 (50 mm < t < 100 mm) TMAX 16 210000 TMAX 35 (16 mm < t < 35 mm) TMAX 50 (35 mm < t < 50 mm) TMAX 100 (50 mm < t < 100 mm) TMAX 16 210000 TMAX 35 (16 mm < t < 35 mm) TMAX 50 (35 mm < t < 50 mm) TMAX 100 (50 mm < t < 100 mm)
78.5
520
78.5
570
78.5
3106
Version 16.13

FY SNIP C 235 235 245 245 255 255 275 275 285 285 345 345 345 345 345K 375 375 390 440 440 590 FT EPST FP EPSY ES
AQUA
GAM 78.5 78.5 78.5 78.5 78.5 78.5
SP 52102 (Table B.5) / SNIP II2381, 2 (Table 51) 230 350 TMAX 20 206000 220 350 TMAX 40 (20 mm < t 40 mm) 240 360 TMAX 20 206000 230 360 TMAX 30 (20 mm < t 30 mm 240 360 TMAX 20 206000 230 360 TMAX 40 (20 mm < t 40 mm) 270 370 TMAX 10 206000 260 360 TMAX 20 (10 mm < t 20 mm) 270 380 TMAX 10 206000 260 370 TMAX 20 (10 mm < t 20 mm) 315 460 TMAX 20 206000 305 450 TMAX 40 (20 mm < t 40 mm) 280 440 TMAX 80 (40 mm < t 80 mm) 260 420 TMAX 100 (80 mm < t 100 mm) 335 460 TMAX 10 (4 < t 10 mm) 206000 345 480 TMAX 20 206000 325 470 TMAX 40 (20 mm < t 40 mm) 380 525 TMAX 50 (4 < t 50 mm) 206000 430 575 TMAX 30 (4 < t 30 mm) 206000 400 555 TMAX 50 (30 mm < t 50 mm) 575 670 TMAX 40 (10 < t 40 mm) 206000
78.5 78.5 78.5 78.5 78.5
The specifications which are a part of the steel quality and are printed in italics (e.g. T, T8, 4) describe the thicknesses. They have to be input by the user only in the case of a CADINP input. The strength values especially for the high strength steels may vary depending on the manufacturer and the alloy considerably, a check of the assumed values against the actual values is strongly recommended. The maximum allowed plate thickness may be specified via TMAX, reducing the strength values according to the design codes. As different strength values within the section may lead to consistency problems for some design tasks, we allow only for a unified approach based on the maximum thickness. It will be checked during the generation of sections. For many grades one may append an identifier for a maximum plate thickness for a direct definition. Attention: The maximum thickness will be also used to control if the design of a composite section with DESI in AQB will allow compressive strains beyond the yield limit. For sections of classes 3 and 4, this limit will be observed by default.
Version 16.13
3107
AQUA
For sections of class 1 or 2, the strain becomes unlimited by definition of TMAX 0.0. The safety factor SCM is preset to 1.1 for most structural steel materials. The safety factor becomes effective immediately for the calculation of the full plastic internal forces of steel and composite sections. For the Russian design steel the defaults are provided according to the control procedure GOST 27771 ( = 1.025). These values are almost identical to those of the old SNIP, however the latter document provides higher values for thinner elements and in some cases for rolled steel in a separate column. All these extensions have to be specified by the user explicitly. For the hungarian MSZ the default values are not valid for all possible derivatives of the material. Further the strength to be used for the design is given as FP as a rounded value obtained from FY and a saftey factor depending on the strength itself.
3108
Version 16.13

3.14.2. Aluminium alloy
FY AWP 3004 AWP 3005 AWP 3103 AWP 5005 AWP 5052 AWP 5049 AWP 5454 AWP 5754 AWP 5083 AWP 6061T4 AWP 6061T6 AWP 6082T4 AWP 6082T6 AWP 7020T6 AWP 8011 AW AW AW AW AW AW AW AW AW AW AW AW AW AW AW AW AW AW AW 6060T5 6060T6 6060TX 6060DT 6061T4 6061T6 6063T5 6063T6 6063TX 6063DT 6005T6 6106T6 6082T4 6082T5 6082T6 6082ER 6082DT 7020T6 7020DT 180. 150. 120. 95. 160. 190. 220. 190. 250. 110. 240. 110. 240. 280. 110. 120. 140. 150. 160. 110. 240. 110. 160. 180. 190. 200. 200. 110. 230. 260. 240. 240. 275. 280. FT EPST 220 170 140 125 210 240 270 240 305 250 290 205 295 350 125 160 170 195 215 180 260 160 195 225 220 250 250 205 270 310 295 310 350 350 10 10 20 20 40 30 20 30 30 120 60 120 60 90 20 80 80 80 120 120 80 70 80 80 100 80 80 140 80 100 100 100 100 100 BC B B B B B B B B B A B A B A B B A A A B A B A A A A A B B A A A A A np 23 38 31 25 17 20 22 20 22 23 23 25 25 19 37 14 16 18 20 8 55 13 24 21 31 20 20 8 28 25 17 17 19 18
AQUA
TMAX 6.0 6.0 25.0 12.5 40.0 25.0 25.0 25.0 40.0 12.5 12.5 / 80.0 12.5 6.0 / 12.5 /100.0 12.5 12.5 5.0 / 25.0 15.0 3.0 / 25.0 20.0 25.0 20.0 3.0 / 25.0 25.0 10.0 / 25.0 20.0 5.0 / 10.0 / 25.0 10.0 25.0 25.0 5.0 / 15.0 15.0 / 40.0 5.0 / 20.0 15.0 / 40.0 20.0
Version 16.13
3109
AQUA
FY Eurocode AC 42100 AC 42200 AC 43000 AC 43300 AC 44200 AC 51300 DIN: AL AL AL AL AL AL AL AL 18 20 22 25 27 28 31 35 147. 168. 63. 147. 56. 70. FY 80 100 160 180 140 210 230 290

FT EPST 203 224 126 203 119 126 20. 15. 12.5 20. 30. 20. FP EPSY 60.0 * 88.0 * 144.5 * 144.5 * 110.5 * 168.0 * 229.5 * 246.5 * TMAX 5.0 20.0 30.0 BC np TMAX
FT EPST 180 200 215 250 270 275 310 350
EC 9 and the new DIN 4113 (2002) use the American system for classification of aluminium alloys. As there are more than 300 different materials available, with significant differences of properties, the user should check the thickness limit and strength parameters thoroughly. For the default values the following scheme has been used: For plates we use the type AWP to distinguish them properly from the profile and tubes. For untreated alloys only the number of the alloy is necessary. For tubes and profiles the type AW is used and either ER or DT (drawn tubes) or the important criteria of the heat treatment as T4, T5, T6 or TX for T66 has to be appended to the alloy as characters. For the castings the case of a cocille and temper F or T6 has been selected as default. As the reduction of the strength in the HAZ is depending on the welding process and the thickness, the user has to define a separte Materialnumber for those regions with a explicitly reduced values for FY and FT. DIN 4113 requires the stress for Aluminium to be reduced for creep effects according to chapter 6.3 with a factor c between 0.8 and 1.0. As the exact evaluation
3110
Version 16.13
AQUA
would be rather complex, this is accounted for by the global factor of safety 1/c. The default on the safe side is a value of 1.25. Better values have to be specified explicitly by the user. A reduction for generally higher temperatures has to be specified explicitly, but the reduction for the fire case is available via the stress strain law. The values ES and GAM are for all classes with 70000 [MPa] and 28.0 [kN/m3] preset, the values FP and EPSY are selected according to the data of table 10 of the DIN 4113.
Version 16.13
3111
AQUA
3.14.3. Reinforcing and Prestressing Steel

FY Eurocode: S 220A S 220B S 220C S 450A S 450B S 450C S 500A S 500B S 500C S 550B S 600B Y 1100 Y 1030 Y 1230 Y 1450C Y 1570C Y 1670C Y 1770C Y 1860C Y 1770 Y 1860 Y 1960 Y 2060 Y 2160 Y 1700 Y 1820 220 220 220 450 450 450 500 500 500 550 600 900 835 1080 1100 1300 1385 1470 1545 1520 1600 1685 1600 1770 1460 1565 FT EPST 220 220 220 486 486 486 550 550 550 620 670 1100 1030 1230 1450 1570 1670 1770 1860 1770 1860 1960 2060 2160 1700 1820 25 50 75 25 50 75 25 50 75 50 50 3.5 3.5 3.5 6.0 6.0 6.0 6.0 6.0 6.0 6.0 6.0 6.0 6.0 6.0 6.0 FP EPSY . . . . . . . . . ES 200000 200000 200000 200000 200000 200000 200000 200000 200000 200000 200000 205000 205000 205000 130000 205000 205000 205000 205000 195000 195000 195000 195000 195000 195000 195000 GAM REL1 78.5 78.5 78.5 78.5 78.5 78.5 78.5 78.5 78.5 78.5 78.5 78.5 78.5 78.5 78.5 78.5 78.5 78.5 78.5 78.5 78.5 78.5 78.5 78.5 78.5 78.5
ECL3 ECL3 ECL3 ECL1 ECL1 ECL1 ECL1 ECL1 ECL1 ECL1 ECL1 ECL1 ECL1 ECL1 ECL1
3112
Version 16.13

FY DIN: BST BST BST PST PST PST PST PST PST PST 220 420 500 835 1080 1100 1375 1420 1470 1570 220 420 500 835 1080 1100 1375 1420 1470 1570 240 420 500 550 600 835 1080 1375 1420 1470 1570 500 500 450 830 900 1080 1300 1440 1520 1600 FT EPST 340 500 550 1030 1230 1450 1570 1570 1670 1770 360 500 550 620 670 1030 1230 1570 1570 1670 1770 525 540 520 1030 1100 1230 1570 1670 1770 1860 7 6 6 6 6 6 6 17 10 10 10 10 7 6 6 6 6 6 20 45 65 20 20 20 20 20 20 20 FP EPSY 735 950 1150 1220 1250 1300 .2 .2 .2 .2 .2 .2 .2 .2 .2 .4 .4 .4 .4 .4 .2 .2 .2 .2 .2 .2 ES 210000 210000 210000 205000 205000 130000 205000 205000 205000 195000 210000 210000 210000 210000 210000 205000 205000 205000 205000 205000 195000 205000 205000 205000 205000 205000 205000 205000 205000 195000 195000
AQUA
GAM REL1 78.5 78.5 78.5 78.5 78.5 78.5 78.5 78.5 78.5 78.5 78.5 78.5 78.5 78.5 78.5 78.5 78.5 78.5 78.5 78.5 78.5 78.5 78.5 78.5 78.5 78.5 78.5 78.5 78.5 78.5 78.5
3.3 3.3 7.5 7.5 2.0 7.5 7.5
OENORM: BSOE 240 BSOE 420 BSOE 500 BSOE 550 BSOE 600 PSOE 835 PSOE 1080 PSOE 1375 PSOE 1420 PSOE 1470 PSOE 1570 SIA: B 500A B 500B B 450C Y 1030 Y 1100 Y 1230 Y 1570 Y 1670 Y 1770 Y 1860
3.3 3.3 7.5 2.0 7.5 7.5
4.0 4.0 4.0 4.0 4.0 2.5 2.5
Version 16.13
3113
AQUA
FY BBK94: KS 26 KS 40 40D 40DD KS 50 KS 60 60D KS 500 BBK04: KS 260 KS 500 KS 600 KSY 1030 KSY 1670 KSY 1770 KSY 1860 KSY 2060 DS411: BDS 410 BDS 500 BDS 550 NS3473: BNS 500 BAEL99: FEE 215 FEE 235 FEE 400 FEE 500 270 370 390 410 510 590 620 500 260 500 600 835 1470 1500 1650 1790 410 500 550 500 215 235 400 500

FT EPST 1030 1670 1770 1860 2060 215 235 400 500 FP EPSY .2 ES 200000 200000 200000 200000 200000 200000 200000 200000 200000 200000 200000 205000 205000 205000 205000 205000 200000 200000 200000 200000 200000 200000 200000 200000 GAM REL1 78.5 78.5 78.5 78.5 78.5 78.5 78.5 78.5 78.5 78.5 78.5 77.0 77.0 77.0 77.0 77.0 78.5 78.5 78.5 78.5 78.5 78.5 78.5 78.5 <32 <32 <25 <16 <12 <16 <25 <32 <32 <32 <32 4.0 4.0 4.0 4.0 4.0 <32 <32 <32 <32
30
50 50 50 50 35 35 35 35 35
3114
Version 16.13

FY DM96: FEB 22 FEB 32 FEB 38 FEB 44 FEB 39 Norme2005 FEB 450 Norme2008 FEB 450A FEB 450C MSZ: B B B Y Y Y Y Y EHE: B B Y Y Y Y Y Y 240B 360B 500B 1030 1230 1670 1770 1860 400 500 1570 1670 1770 1860 1960 2060 215 315 375 440 390 450 450 450 240 360 500 830 1080 1435 1520 1580 400 500 1340 1420 1500 1580 1670 1750 FT EPST 335 490 450 540 440 540 540 540 380 500 600 1030 1230 1670 1770 1860 440 550 1570 1670 1770 1860 1960 2060 50 50 35 35 35 35 35 35 22.5 67.5 FP EPSY 210 310 420 720 920 1230 1320 1375 ES 200000 200000 200000 200000 200000 200000 200000 200000 200000 200000 200000 195000 195000 195000 195000 195000 200000 200000 205000 205000 205000 205000 195000 195000
AQUA
GAM REL1 78.5 78.5 78.5 78.5 78.5 78.5 78.5 78.5 78.5 78.5 78.5 78.5 78.5 78.5 78.5 78.5 78.5 78.5 78.5 78.5 78.5 78.5 78.5 78.5
2.0 2.0 2.0 2.0 2.0
Version 16.13
3115
AQUA
FY British Standard: SBS 250 SBS 460 SBS 500 PSBS 1570 PSBS 1620 PSBS 1670 PSBS 1720 PSBS 1770 PSBS 1860 ACI/ AASHTO: SACI 40 SACI 50 SACI 60 SACI 65 SACI 70 SACI 75 SACI 80 PSAC 160 PSAC 250 PSAC 270

FT EPST FP EPSY ES GAM REL1
250 460 500 1256 1296 1336 1376 1416 1488
250 460 500 1570 1620 1670 1720 1770 1860
5 5 5 5 5 5
200000 200000 200000 205000 205000 205000 205000 205000 205000
78.5 78.5 78.5 78.5 78.5 78.5 78.5 78.5 78.5
8.0 8.0 8.0 8.0 8.0 8.0
280 350 420 460 490 520 550 1100 1730 1860
420 560 620 460 560 690 725 1250 1730 1860
200000 200000 200000 200000 200000 200000 200000 207000 197000 197000
78.5 78.5 78.5 78.5 78.5 78.5 78.5 78.5 78.5 78.5
2.0 8.0 8.0
3116
Version 16.13

FY NBR CP 25 CP 40 CP 50 CP 60 CA 85 CA 150RN CA 150RB CA 160RN CA 160RB CA 170RN CA 170RB CA 175RN CA 175RB CA 180RN CA 190RN CA 190RB IS/IRC: SIS 240 SIS 415 SIS 500 PSIS 800 PSIS 1050 PSIS 1350 PSIS 1500 PSIS 1600 GB: SGB 235 SGB 335 SGB 400 PSGB 1470 PSGB 1570 PSGB 1670 PSGB 1770 PSGB1570S PSGB1720S PSGB1860S 250 400 500 600 850 1280 1350 1360 1440 1490 1580 1490 1580 1530 1610 1710 240 415 500 800 1050 1350 1500 1600 FY 210 300 360 1040 1110 1180 1250 1110 1220 1320 FT EPST 300 440 550 660 1050 1500 1500 1600 1600 1700 1700 1755 1755 1800 1900 1900 240 415 500 1000 1250 1650 1800 1900 FY FP EPSY 800 1000 1320 1440 1520 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 .5 .5 .5 .5 .5 ES 210000 210000 210000 210000 200000 195000 195000 195000 195000 195000 195000 185000 185000 185000 185000 185000 200000 200000 200000 200000 200000 200000 200000 195000 210000 200000 200000 210000 205000 205000 205000 195000 195000 195000
AQUA
GAM REL1 78.5 78.5 78.5 78.5 78.5 78.5 78.5 78.5 78.5 78.5 78.5 78.5 78.5 78.5 78.5 78.5 78.5 78.5 78.5 78.5 78.5 78.5 78.5 78.5 78.5 78.5 78.5 78.5 78.5 78.5 78.5 78.5 78.5 78.5
6.0 6.0 5.0 5.0 5.0 5.0 3.5 3.5 3.5 3.5 3.5
7.5 3.0 5.0 2.0 5.0 2.0 7.0 2.5 7.0 7.0 2.5
7 6 6 6 6 FT 235 335 400 1470 1570 1670 1770 1570 1720 1860
2.5 2.5 8.0 8.0 8.0
400 410 410 410 390 390 390
5.0 5.0 5.0 5.0 5.0 5.0 5.0
Version 16.13
3117
AQUA
FY GBJ: SGB SGB SGB PSGB I II IV IV 235 335 380 751 250 400 450 500 840 1340 1360 1468 1500 1533 235 295 345 390 0.80ft 0.80ft 0.80ft 0.80ft 0.93ft 0.93ft 0.93ft 0.93ft 0.93ft 0.93ft

FT EPST 235 335 835 835 250 400 450 500 1030 1670 1700 1790 1830 1870 380 440 490 560 930 1030 1080 1180 1420 1470 1520 1620 1720 1860 FP EPSY 0.84ft 0.84ft 0.84ft 0.84ft 0.84ft 0.84ft 15 15 15 15 15 15 ES 210000 210000 190000 190000 200000 200000 200000 200000 200000 205000 205000 195000 195000 195000 200000 200000 200000 200000 200000 200000 200000 200000 200000 200000 200000 200000 200000 200000 GAM REL1 78.5 78.5 78.5 78.5 78.5 78.5 78.5 78.5 78.5 78.5 78.5 78.5 78.5 78.5 77.0 77.0 77.0 77.0 77.0 77.0 77.0 77.0 77.0 77.0 77.0 77.0 77.0 77.0 8.0 2.5 5.0 5.0
AS/NZS: SAS 250 SAS 400 SAS 450 SAS 500 PAS 1030 PAS 1670 PAS 1700 PAS 1790 PAS 1830 PAS 1870 JIS: SJS SJS SJS SJS PSJS PSJS PSJS PSJS PSJS PSJS PSJS PSJS PSJS PSJS 235 295 345 390 930 1030 1080 1180 1420 1470 1520 1620 1720 1860
3.0 1.0 1.0 2.0 2.0 2.0
3118
Version 16.13

FY ET RC2001 SET 350 SET 450 SET 520 SET 520M SET 600 SP 521012003 SNIA 240 SNIA 300 SNIA 400 SNIA 500 SNIB 500 RK 5.0333 2005 SNIA 600 SNIA 800 SNIA 1000 SNIP 2.03.01: SNIA I SNIA II SNIA III SNIA IV SNIA V SNIA VI SNIA VII SNIB I SNIB 1000 SNIB 1100 SNIB 1200 SNIB 1300 SNIB 1400 SNIB 1500 350 450 520 520 600 FY 235 300 400 500 410 FT EPST 240 280 360 450 400 FT 400 500 500 600 500 FP 190 235 320 345 290 FP EPSY 350 450 520 520 600 FYC 235 300 400 460 360 ES 200000 200000 200000 200000 200000 ES 200000 200000 200000 200000 200000
AQUA
GAM REL1 78.5 78.5 78.5 78.5 78.5 GAM 78.5 78.5 78.5 78.5 78.5 TMAX 40. 40. 36. 36. s 1.10 1.10 1.13 1.15 1.20
600 800 1000
800 1000 1000
360 360 360
540 575 600
200000 200000 200000
78.5 78.5 78.5
1.15 1.15 1.20
225 280 365 510 680 815 980 410 850 915 1000 1050 1170 1250
235 295 390 590 788 980 1175 1000 1000 1100 1200 1300 1400 1500
175 225 290 405 545 650 785 290 680 730 785 835 940 1000
225 280 365 450 500 500 500 375 500 500 500 500 500 500
210000 210000 200000 190000 190000 190000 190000 170000 200000 200000 200000 200000 200000 200000
78.5 78.5 78.5 78.5 78.5 78.5 78.5 78.5 78.5 78.5 78.5 78.5 78.5 78.5
1.05 1.05 1.10 1.15 1.15 1.20 1.20 1.20 1.20 1.20 1.20 1.20 1.20 1.20
For the steel type BST you may attach to the grade two extra characters switching to new DIN 10451:
Version 16.13
3119
AQUA
SA SB MA MB

Reinforcing bars with standard ductility Reinforcing bars with high ductility Reinforcing bar mats with standard ductility Reinforcing bar mats with high ductility
The safety factor SCM is preset for most reinforcing and prestressing steels to 1.15 and 1.05 (BS) respectively. The safety factor becomes effective immediately for the calculation of the full plastic internal forces of steel and composite sections. For nonlinear analysis with a constant safety factor according to DIN 10451 the strength of the concrete will be reduced, while those of the steel will be raised. For this a special serviceability stressstrain law is generated with a safety factor of 1.3. The Russian SNIP has a reduced strength for shear links and inclined bars. This value is taken from the value FP. In the very general case, it might be necessary to use a separate material with a reduced strength. For the hungarian MSZ the defualt values are not valid for all possible derivatives of the material. Further the strength to be used for the design is given as FP as a rounded value by the minimum from FY/1.15 and FT/1.3. Attention: Some material parameters may depend on other parameters not known to the program. E.g. the dynamic stress range of the reinforcements is not only depending on the diameter TMAX of the bars but also on the curvature and the type of the material of the duct (steel, plastic). In all those cases it is necessary to use different material numbers and to specify the deviating values explicitly.
3120
Version 16.13

3.14.4. Relaxation
AQUA
Relaxation of tendons is implemented in AQUA/AQB as a product. While the time factor is specified in AQB, AQUA defines the stress dependant factor for the reference time of 1000 h. This may be accomplished either by a linear relation established by two values at 0.55fpk and 0.70fpk or via selected literals for item REL2 as quadratic function according to CEB / EN1992 or the general function according to BPEL annexe 2 or AS 3600. Literal CEB1 CEB2 CEB3 ENC1 ENC2 ENC3 ECL1 ECL2 ECL3 RN TBR AS IRC IRCL 0.60fpk 4.00 % 1.00 % 2.00 % 0.70fpk 8.00 % 2.00 % 4.00 % 0.80fpk 12.00 % 5.00 % 6.67 % CEB model code 1990 normal improved bars Euronorm EN 1992 (2004) ordinary (1000 = 8.0) low relaxation(1000 = 2.5) bars (1000 = 4.0) Eurocode EC 2 < 2004 ordinary low relaxation bars BPEL 91 relaxation normale trs basse relaxation AS 3600/5100 Rb (Chapter 6.3.4) IRC 112
0.66S1000Se.9.1(t/1000)0.75(1)105 1.98S1000Se8.0(t/1000)0.75(1)105
5.39S1000Se6.7(t/1000)0.75(1)105
4.50 % 1.00 % 1.50 % Annexe 2
8.00 % 2.50 % 4.00 % 8.00 2.50 1.00 2.00 3.00 5.00 2.50 % % % % % % %
12.00 % 4.50 % 7.00 % Annexe 2
Version 16.13
3121
AQUA
3.14.5. Bond Properties
The bond properties are specified highly different within the codes. They depend both on the concrete and the steel properties. When defining the concrete the maximum bond stress for optimal bond properties is specified. The value R defines then the relative bond strength for this steel as specified in: Tab. 7 DIN 4227 A1 ( R = 0.3 0.9) Tab. 15 DIN 10451 ( R = 0.3 0.8) / Tab. 4.115 DINFB102 Tab 5.3 chap. 5.2.2.2. EC 2 (R = 0.7 1.0) 9.3.1 GB 50010 (R = /0.14 = 0.737 1.077) If different bond properties should be applied, different materials have to be specified. The bond value is needed for Crack width Limitation of stress increase for tendons Depending on which effect is more severe, you might have to choose between different code factors for this value. Please see also remarks for FBD in record CONC. The second coefficient is used for those design codes using special values not deductable from the relative bond coefficients alone. This is especially the Eurocode, but also the russian SNIP: 4.14 SNIP 2.03.01 ( K1 := = 1.0 1.4) 7.2.12 SP 52101 ( K1 := 2 = 0.5 0.8) The defaults are given in principal in the following table. However, there are some deviations depending on the design code and the strength possible: R Reinforcing steel Prestressing steel 1.0 0.75 K1 0.8 1.6
3122
Version 16.13

3.14.6. StressStrain Relations
The stressstrain law may have up to 4 segments: Up to the proportional limit (FP/ES,FP)
AQUA
Up to the yield limit (EPSY,FY) EPSY may be defined absolute (positive) or relative to the strain limit (negative) Up to the tensile strength (EPST,FT) Constant to the nearly infinity (1000 o/oo) Depending on the steel type and grade the values EPSY and EPST as well as FP will be preset. With explicit definitions you may suppress: If FP is not lesser than FY the first part will be omitted. If EPST is not greater than EPSY the third part will be omitted. More general stressstrain laws are specified via record SSLA. In general the stressstrain laws are identical for serviceability and ultimate limit design. However, for reinforcing steel according to EC2 and DIN 10451 there are numerous explicit changes. As the safety factor concept will not generate an affine curve for the ultimate state, the safety factor will be applied immediately. Although the tensile strength for reinforcement steel with standard ductility will be reached at 25 o/oo, it is not allowed to use this in the design according to DIN 10451. The stress strain laws for design and non linear analysis differ therefore for those materials.
Version 16.13
3123
AQUA
3124
Version 16.13
AQUA
3.15.
Item
TIMB Timber and Fibre Materials

Description
TIMB
Unit Default
NO TYPE CLAS EP G E90 QH QH90 GAM ALFA SCM FM FT0 FT90 FC0 FC90 FV FVR FVB FM90 G90 OAL OAF
Material number (1999) Type of material see following table Quality class / Strength type of matrix for compound fibres Elastic modulus parallel to fibre Shear modulus Elastic modulus normal to fibre Poissons ratio yz (polywood panels) Poissons ratio xy / xz (solid wood) Unit weight Temperature elongation coefficient Material safety factor Bending strength Tensile strength parallel to the fibre Tensile strength normal to the fibre Compressive strength parallel to fibres Compressive strength normal to fibres Shear strength at center (shear force) Shear strength at the edge (torsion) Shear strength for plate bending Bending strength normal to fibres Shear modulus for plate bending Meridian angle of anisotropy Descent angle of anisotropy
LIT N/mm2 N/mm2 N/mm2 kN/m3 1/K N/mm2 N/mm2 N/mm2 N/mm2 N/mm2 N/mm2 N/mm2 N/mm2 N/mm2 N/mm2 degree degree
1 * * * * * * * * 0.0 1.3/* * * * * * * * * * * 0.0 0.0
Version 16.13
3125
AQUA
Item Description

Unit Default
KMOD KMO1 KMO2 KMO3 KMO4 KDEF TMAX RHO TITL
Strength modification permanent loading or long term loading or middle term loading or short term loading or very short term loading modification for long term deflections maximum thickness for plates characteristic density Material designation
mm kg/m3 Lit32
* * * * * * * * *
TIMB allows the definition of all materials with a preferred fibre orientation. As type you have the timber classes of Eurocode, respective DIN, OENORM and SIA and the German compound fibre types. As the EN 1995 does not specify any strength values, those values have to be specified for all other countries explicitly. With the EN 1995 (EC5) and the derived design codes correction factors kmod have been introduced for the permissible stresses and kdef for the deformations. The distinct value is depending not only on the material but also on the service class and the duration of the loading. The following table shows the values for solid timber, however there are much more values available within the program and the user may change theses values explicitly. Service Class Class of load duration permanent long term medium term short term very short term k-def 1 0.60 0.70 0.80 0.90 1.10 0.60 2 0.60 0.70 0.80 0.90 1.10 0.80 3 0.50 0.55 0.65 0.70 0.90 2.00
The service class may be either specified in general with the definition of the design code NORM or be appended to the class definition with a colon. The input of TIMB C 30:2 selects a solid soft wood of strength class 30 and the service class 2. Types and defaults:
3126
Version 16.13

TYPE C CLAS 14 / 16 / 22 / 24 / 35 / 40 / 30 / 35 / 60 / 70 24 / 28 / 24c / 28c 25 / 40 / 1 / 4 / 18 27 45 40 / / / / 20 / 30 / 50 50 / Explanation
AQUA
DIN 1052-2004:
Solid soft wood Tab. F5 Solid hard wood Tab. F7 homog. laminated timber Tab.F9 combined laminated timber Tab.F9 Plywood Tab. F11/F12 Particle board, Tab. F15/F16/F17/F18 OSB, Tab. F13/F14 Hardboard Fibre board Medium hardboard Medium density Soft Fibre board
D GL PLY PART OSB FIB
32 / 36 / 32c / 36c 50 / 60 5 / 6 / 7
2 / 3 / 4 HB MHB MDF SB
SIA 265:
C D GL 20 / 24 / 27 / 35 / 45 Solid soft wood, Tab. 6 30 Solid hard wood (Beech / Oak) 24 / 28 / 36 homog. laminated timber Tab. 7 combined laminated timber Tab. 7 24k / 28k / 36k
Version 16.13
3127
AQUA
TYPE S MS BS NA BS LA/LB/LC FTK/L/BE CLAS 7 / 10 / 13 10 / 13 / 17 11 / 14 / 16 / 18 1 / 2 / 3 1 / 2

Explanation
DIN 1052 A-1

Timber, Sorted acc. DIN 4076 Timber, Sorted acc. DIN 4076 glued laminated timber
DIN 1052 old

Soft wood glued laminated timber Hard wood
NORM B3001
spruce,fir,pine / larch beech,oak Glas-/Carbon-/Syntheticcompound fibre materials Epoxid resin Unsaturised poliester resin Vinil ester resin
GFK/CFK/ Values strongly depend SFK on fibre properties! 40000 / 5000 12.5 EP 30000 / 4500 12.5 UP 20000 / 3500 10.7 VE
There are many composite materials in timber constructions. Although a precise treating is possible with composite sections or MLAY, the design codes provide equivalent materials for that purpose. As the strength is no strongly dependant on the thickness of the construction part, the definition of that value with TMAX is mandatory. The description of a transverse orthotropy material law has one direction that has different properties (fibre direction), while the description in the plane perpendicular to this remains isotropic. The law defined with TIMB is formal equivalent, however not identical with that defined via MATE. If x is chosen as this special direction it holds:
x + sx * m90 E y +
( s y ) s z) E90
sy sx * m sz * m* 90 E90 E90 E
s sx z + sz * m y * m* 90 E90 E90 E 3128 Version 16.13

E m* 90 + m 90 E 90
AQUA
It should be noticed, that the poissons ratios 90 and 90* are no longer bound to 0.5 and are strongly connected to the ratio of the elasticity moduli, as the resulting stressstrain matrix has to be symmetric. The order of the indices of stress and strain components notation is defined as follows: [ x y z xy xz yz ] general threedimensional case [ x y xy z ] plane strain condition, axial symmetry [ x y xy ] plane stress For the axial symmetric case x denotes the axis of rotation while y represents the radial and z the tangential direction. Furthermore holds:
E 1 + E 90 , E2 + E , m 1 + m 90 , m 2 + m , G 1 + G 90 , G 2 + G
General threedimensional case: The threedimensional material stiffness matrix is obtained by inversion of the strainstress matrix and reads (z being the direction normal to the isotropic plane = fibre direction):
1 * n @ m2 m ) n @ m2 m2 2 E @ 1 2 0 0 E1 @ m 0 E1 @ 1 1 ) m 1 @ m 1 ) m1 @ m 2 2 m 1 * n @ m ) n @ m m2 2 E @ 2 E 1 @ 1 0 0 0 E @ 1 1 m 1 ) m @ m 1 ) m1 @ m 1 D + m m 1 * m 2 1 E1 @ 2 0 0 0 E @ E @ 1 m 2 m m 0 0 0 0 G 1 0 0 0 G 0 0 0 2 0 G 2 0 0 0 0 n+ E1 , m + 1 * m1 * 2 @ n @ m2 2 E2
Plane strain conditions: The x direction is defined as the fibre direction (=normal to the isotropic plane). The reduced stressstrain matrix yields:
Version 16.13
3129
AQUA

m2 E @ 1 * m1 E1 @ m 0 2 m 1 * n @ m2 E @ m2 2 E1 @ 0 1 m 1 ) m 1 @ m D + G 2 0 0 m1 ) n @ m2 m 2 2 E 1 @ E1 @ m 0 1 ) m1 @ m n+ E1 , m + 1 * m1 * 2 @ n @ m2 2 E2
Plane stress conditions: The x direction is defined as the fibre direction (=normal to the isotropic plane). The material stiffness matrix is obtained via inversion of the reduced strain stress matrix and reads:
E1 @ m2 E2 0 2 2 1 * n @ m2 1 * n @ m2 E1 @ m2 E1 D + 0 2 1 * n @ m2 1 * n @ m 2 2 G 0 0 2
, n+
E1 E2
Axial symmetry: The general case of anisotropy does not need to be considered since axial symmetry would be impossible to achieve under such circumstances. A case of interest in practice is that of the fibre direction parallel to the rotational axis x, i.e. the x direction is normal to the plane of isotropy. For such a case the material stiffness matrix reads:
1 * m2 1 m 21 ) m 1 0 m 21 ) m 1 n 2 m21 ) m1 1 * nm2 0 m1 ) nm2 2 D + A @ G 0 90 0 0 A 2 2 m m 1 * n m 1 ) m ) n m 0 1 1 2 2 2

A+ E2 @ n E , n + 1 , m + 1 * m1 * 2 @ n @ m2 2 E2 1 ) m 1 @ m
3130
Version 16.13
AQUA
Definition of fibre direction: Depending on the element type we have slightly different orientations of orthotropy: For beams the fibre direction is identical with that of the beam axis. For planar systems (TALPA) the value OAF is the angle between the fibre direction and the element xdirection. The values E90 and 90 then hold within the isotropic plane whose normal is given by the (skew) fibre direction. For shells and plates it might be possible (eg. plywood) that there are fibres in both x and y direction. The anisotropy effects thus reduces to different shear moduli for in plane membrane shear (Gm=0.5E90/(1+)) and the transverse shear force directions (G). This may be accomplished either with an explicit definition E90 == E or with a layered material (MLAY). For the case of vertical boards tied together, you may use the orthotropy factors of thickness description (> QUIAD) or use a 3D model. In threedimensional systems (continuum elements) the default fibre direction is the element zdirection. Other fibre directions can be specified by defining the threedimensional orientation of the isotropic plane (=plane, whose normal direction is the fibre direction) via meridian and descent angle, known from geology (compare MATE).
Version 16.13
3131
AQUA
3.16.
Item
MASO Masonry / Brickwork

Description
MASO
Unit Default
NO STYP
SCLA MCLA
Material number (1999) Type of brick stone SB Standard solid Brick LS Limestone Brick LC Lightweight concrete C concrete CC cellular concrete BS British Standard 56281 BS2 Britisch Standard 56282 Strength of brick stone Group or strength of mortar i,ii,iia,iii,iiia Standard mortar DM Thin bed mortar LM21,LM36 Light mortar numerical Qualified mortar Elastic modulus Shear modulus Poissons ratio Unit weight Temperature elongation coefficient Material safety factor Elastic modulus in lateral direction Poissons ratio in lateral direction Meridian angle of anisotropy Descent angle of anisotropy Nominal strength o Compressive strength Tensile strength Shear strength Adhesional shear strength HS=2oHS Brick tensile strength RZ Material name
LIT
1 SB
N/mm2 LIT
* *
N/mm2 N/mm2 N/mm2 kN/m3 1/K N/mm2 degree degree N/mm2 N/mm2 N/mm2 N/mm2 N/mm2 N/mm2 Lit32 * * * * * 2.5 * * 0.0 0.0 * o/0.35 * * * * *
E G MUE GAM ALFA SCM E90 M90 OAL OAF FCN FC FT FV FHS FTB TITL
3132
Version 16.13
AQUA
As there are not yet any specific design routines, the parameters follow DIN 199611 (EC6). According to DIN 10531 you should use a value of 2.5 for SCM and 2.67 for FC. For masonry according to BS 56281 the group identifier A to D has to be included as a prefix to the stone class. You may then select the mortar designations I to IV. FT is the tensile strength for bending according Table 3 parallel to bed joints, FV is the vertical shear strength according pict. 2 and clause (25, part 2), FHS is the basic shear value according clause 25 part 1, FTB is the bending tensile strength according Table 3 perpendicular to bed joints. FT and FTB vary considerably and should therefore be specified.
Version 16.13
3133
AQUA
3.17.
Item
SSLA StressStrain Curves

Description
SSLA
Unit Default
EPS
SIG TYPE
Strain value or type of state in a header record SERV Serviceability ULTI Ulimate Limit CALC Calculatoric Mean values Stress value or safety factor in Header record Type of vertex POL discontinous slope SPL continuous slope LIM no extension EXT extension to infinite strains Temperature level Modification of total length SHIFT Shift of the stressstrain curve about the thermal length modification Tension Stiffening for Reinforcement I Initial crack II Completed crack pattern I_S I for short time loading II_S II for short time loading I_F I, first crack at fctk,0.05 I_FS I_S first crack at fctk,0.05 Reinforcement ratio As/Abeff Material number of the concrete Factor for tensil concrete strength fctm
o/oo LIT
N/mm2 LIT
POL
TEMP EPST
grad LIT
TS
LIT
MUET MNRB FCTF
1 1.0
Stressstrain curves are generally used for design or nonlinear sectional analysis in AQB / STAR2 / ASE. If the default stressstrain curves are not applicable, stressstrain curves must be defined immediately after the input of the material. Three different stressstrain diagrams can be specified for the checks
3134
Version 16.13
AQUA
of the ultimate state, the serviceability state and for a nonlinear analysis, each set may have multiple temperature levels, to be defined in ascending order. A stressstrain curve starts with one of the possible headers: SSLA SERV safety_factor [LIM/EXT] [TEMP tempval] SSLA ULTI safety_factor [LIM/EXT] [TEMP tempval] SSLA CALC safety_factor [LIM/EXT] [TEMP tempval] The safety factors are predefined as specified with the material, but may be changed if needed. In particular it is possible to modify a standard stressstrain law with an own safety factor, by defining a header record only. The design codes use the safety factors quite differently, some materials will be divided by the safety factor in total, others reduce only the maximum stress value and keep the elasticity modulus. A positive safety factor will select the first case, while a negative value will select the second one. For the standard design tasks the material safety factors are chosen by AQB depending on the loading condition and design code. The stressstrain curve follows. Each consists of several data points in an ordered sequence. For each data point it is specified whether it should behave as a vertex (linear polygon line) or it should be part of a smooth curve (quadratic or cubic parabola). The user must make sure that a sufficiently large strain range gets covered and that the zero point constitutes a data point of its own. Strains outside the defined range will have for TYPE EXT the last defined stress value and will use the tangent at the last point, provided this has a positive elasticity module. If the TYPE is specified as LIM, stresses outside the defined range will become zero, which however lead to trouble in numerical behaviour of nonlinear iterations. On the other hand the stresses outside the defined range are extrapolated by an input of TYPE EXT. Default is EXT, however for ultimate limit state of concrete it is LIM.
Version 16.13
3135
AQUA
For concrete without explicit data points it is possible to define with EPST a factor for the strains. This may be used to account for creep effects as specified in the EN 1992 with 1+. For a fiber or a FEsection the general analysis method will account for temperatures according to the Eurocodes EN 1992 to 1999 automatically. However for special cases it is also possible to define up to 15 discrete temperature levels TEMP, to be interpolated. If no explicit strains are specified for one level the standard laws according Eutrocode will be approximated as default For a zonal method, the section will be subdivided in several zones (polygons) by different material numbers, where every zone has a constant average temperature to be specified for each of these materials with TEMP. One may change the thermal strain at this temperature with the item EPST. Finally input of the literal SHIFT will shift the stress strain law by this strain, to activate all eigenstresses directly. The contribution of the concrete between the cracks (Tension Stiffening) may be taken into account by a modification of the stress strain law of the concrete or the steel. With a single record SSLA SERV a modification of the reinforcement stress strain law for that purpose is possible. However a solution is only possible if the ratio of reinforcement is large enough to avoid the complete rupture of the reinforcement, which is equivalent to the requirement that the initial crack stress in the reinforcement must not exceed the yield limit. The reinforcement ratio MUET is only determined in advance for an annular section (or those with a similar evenly distributed reinforcement). For all other cases, the design task should adopt the stress strain law accordingly.
3136
Version 16.13
AQUA
3.18.
Item
MEXT Extra Material Constants

Description
MEXT
Unit Default
NO EXP TYPE VAL VAL1 VAL2 VAL3 VAL4 VAL5 VAL6 VAL7 VAL8 VAL9
Number of material Name of an exposure class Type of constant Value of material constant First additional material value Second additional material value Third additional material value 4th additional material value 5th additional material value 6th additional material value 7th additional material value 8th additional material value 9th additional material value
Lit4 LIT * * * * * * * * * *
1 !
With MEXT you may define special material values for any type of material. The values may be assigned to different regions (edges) of the material with separate values. This is defined by a freely selectable literal EXP. Defaults for those values may be specified in the INIfile. It has to be checked individually to which extend the defined data is really used in the analysis modules. The follwong idents for TYPE are allowed:
3.18.1. AIR Air Contact Ratio

The value AIR defines the air contact ratio between 0.0 and 1.0 to be used for the creep and shrinkage process. Up to 10 values may be defined for the individual construction stages.
3.18.2. CNOM Nominal Cover

The value CNOM defines the nominal cover for reinforcements. This value is defined in many design codes based on the exposure class and my be provided within the INIfiles. The full range of tables may become quite lareg however.
3.18.3. CRW Crack width

The crackwidth CRW is used for the design of the crackwidth.
Version 16.13
3137
AQUA
3.18.4. KR Equivalent roughness

With KR, VAL defines the equivalent roughness according to Table 10.8.1 of EC 1 part 24, which is especially needed for wind loads on circular sections:
Surface glass polished metal smooth painting spray painting blasted steel cast iron
Roughness k [mm] 0.0015 0.002 0.006 0.02 0.05 0.2
Surface galvanised steel spinning concrete cast in situ concrete rust masonry
Roughness k [mm] 0.2 0.2 1.0 2.0 3.0
Hint: In table 4 of DIN 1055 part 4 slightly larger values are defined for k.
3.18.5. TEMP Temperature environment

With type TEMP the temperature environment and the transition conditions are defined: VAL The temperature itself VAL1 The thermal resistance VAL2 The emmission grade for the Boltzmann law
3138
Version 16.13
AQUA
3.19.
Item
BORE Bore Profile with Beddings

Description
BORE
Unit Default
NO X Y Z NX NY NZ ALF TITL
Number of the bore profile Coordinates of the start point
[m]1001 [m]1001 [m]1001 degree LIT32
1 0.0 0.0 0.0 * * * 0.0 *
Direction of the bore profile Default: in gravity direction (since not available in AQUA: NZ=1.0) Rotation angle of the local axis Title of the bore profile
With BORE a bore profile is described defining material layers along an axis the use of which is different. General description of soil mechanic strata (not used within SOFiSTiK at present) Properties of the constrained soil modulus for the analysis of settlements or a half space modelling with HASE. Soil bedding modulus for the pile elements. These values are derived from the soil modulus above by a multiplication with a form factor with typical values between 0.5 and 2.0. More precisely the soil modulus is transferred to a Winkler bedding constant [kN/m3] by a division with some structural dimension and is then integrated by a multiplication with the width of the pile section. Please refer to the explanations of the record BBLA for formulas and examples.
Version 16.13
3139
AQUA
3.20.
Item
BLAY Layer of the Soil Strata

Description
BLAY
Unit Default
S MNO ES MUE VARI
Ordinate along the profile axis (depth) Material number from this ordinate Stiffness modulus from this ordinate Poissons ratio Type of stiffness ES variation within a layer CONS constant LINE linear PARA parabolic Increment of ES within a current layer Max. pressure at pile foot Max. lateral pressure Cohesion SoilPile friction angle
[m]1001
[kN/m2]
1096
* * * CONS
Lit4
DES PMAX PMAL C PHI
[kN/m2]1096 [kN/m2]1096 [kN/m2] [kN/m2]

1096 1096
* * * * *
deg
BLAY is used for the definition of the soil layers of a corresponding BORE profile. This data is then used in program HASE for the determination of the stiffness and resistance properties of soil and piles. The following example illustrates the functionality of the BLAY command:
BORE BLAY BLAY BLAY BLAY NO #nb X S #s1 ES S #s2 ES S #s3 ES S #s4 #x Y #Es1 #Es2 #Es3 #y Z VARi VARi VARi #z para line DES #dEs2 cons PMAX #P1 PMAX #P2 PMAX #P3
3140
Version 16.13
AQUA
Figure 3.19a: Distribution of BLAY properties along the BORE axis
Bore profile #nb consist of three soil layers First layer L1 starts at the depth #s1 and ends at the next defined depth #s2. L1 is assigned a parabolic stiffness distribution. Since there is no explicit stiffness increase #dEs1 defined, a continuous distribution is realized the concluding stiffness value will be equal to the stiffness value of the subsequently defined BLAY (#Es2). Second layer L2 has a linear stiffness distribution. This time, #dEs2 is defined, so the concluding stiffness value will be #Es2+#dEs2. Third layer L3 has a constant stiffness distribution with the value #Es3. If there is only one BLAY defined, then the ending depth is by default 999m. If the number of BLAY record is larger than 1, the last BLAY defines the ending depth S while the other properties of this BLAY are ignored. Apart from stiffness modulus ES, all other properties of the BLAY record (MNO, MUE, PMAX, PMAL, C, PHI) are constant within a layer. Stiffness modulus ES and Poissons ration MUE can alternatively be set by reference of a material number, where corresponding elastic material properties are defined. If within the same BLAY record MNO and ES and/or MUE are defined, the values defined within BLAY have precedence over those defined by material MNO. If the Poissons ratio MUE is defined and larger than 0.0, then ES is interpreted as the elastic modulus, and a Boussinesq method is used in program HASE (see HASE manual for more details).
Version 16.13
3141
AQUA
By default (no input) the nonlinear resistance properties (PMAX, PMAL and C) are switched off, meaning that the xpile nodal forces are not limited (elastic analysis). As in the default case, the input of a resistance property smaller or equal zero will result in the xpile contact forces to be unlimited. Any input of the resistance properties larger than zero will activate the nonlinearities along the xpile. PHI is not supported at the moment. Please note: As a prerequisite for a meaningful soillayer interpolation, all defined bore profiles (BORE) within a grid must have the same number of layers (BLAY). For a consistent input of the BLAYresistance properties it is required that within a layer of each of the used bore profiles the resistance properties be either defined or undefined. Otherwise the interpolated properties can have unpredictable values. In other words, the input where the resistance properties within a layer for some bore profiles are defined, while for the others are not defined, will most likely yield undesired results.
3142
Version 16.13
AQUA
3.21.
Item
BBAX Axial Beddings

Description
BBAX
Unit Default
S1 S2 K0 K1 K2 K3 M0 C0 TANR TAND KSIG D0 D2 CA0 CA2 PMAX
Start parameter (depth) End parameter (depth) Constant value of pile bedding Parabola variation Linear variation Quadratic variation Load value (e.g. negative skin friction) Maximum skin friction Soil/pile friction angle coefficient Soil/pile dilatancy angle coefficient Lateral pressure coefficient Constant rotational stiffness Linear rotational stiffness Constant axial damping Linear axial damping Max. pile foot force (Extended Piles, only)
[m]1001 [m]1001 [kN/m2]

1096
* 999.99 0 0 0 0 0 0

[kN/m]1095 [kN/m]1095
[kNm]1099 [kNm]1099 [kNsec/ m2]1220 [kN]1101
0.0 0 0 0 0 0
The axial bedding describes the skin friction of the pile in dependence from the deformation and from the lateral bedding force of the pile. A positive value of the load M0 acts on the pile in the direction of the pile head.
skin friction
displacement
Axial bedding
Version 16.13
3143
AQUA
Further explanations for the axial beddings are contained in the record BBLA.
3144
Version 16.13
AQUA
3.22.
Item
BBLA Lateral Beddings

Description
BBLA
Unit Default
S1 S2 K0 K1 K2 K3 P0 P1 P2 P3 PMA1 PMA2 CL0 CL1 CL2 CL3 SM0 SM2
Start parameter (depth) End parameter (depth) Constant value of the pile bedding Parabola variation Linear variation Quadratic variation Form factors as variation along the periphery
[m]1001 [m]1001 [kN/m2]

1096
* 999.99 0 0 0 0 1 1 1 1 0 0 0 0 0 0

[kN/m]1095 [kN/m]1095
Maximum compression at S1 Maximum compression at S2 Constant lateral damping Parabola variation Linear variation Quadratic variation Constant mass distribution Linear variation of mass distribution
[kNsec/ m2]1220 [t/m]1181 [t/m]1181
Elastic supports have many related parameters. Therefore those values are combined to special property elements for a geometric line. All the corresponding GLBA and GLBL records follow the GLN record in the order defined by the s ordinate. All data for the s ordinate refer to the parametric system of coordinates. The default is the global z axis, if the line consists only of a start point without geometry segments. Within a section the bedding is interpolated: z*z K + K0 ) K1 @ z * z
1 2 1 12
z*z z*z ) K2 @ z * z1 ) K3 @ z * z1 2 1 2 1
Version 16.13
3145
AQUA
The pile bedding at the beginning of the section is K0, and the one at its end is K0+K1+K2+K3. The individual values correspond to constant, parabolic, linear and quadratic distributions.
Parts of the bedding The default value for S1 is the latest S2 value. The initial default is 999.99. The factors for the variation along the periphery are effective in the four quadrants (angle of 0, 90, 180 and 270 degrees). The angle refers to the local z axis. For linear analyses the factor (P0+P2)/2 is used for the principal bending (MY,VZ), while (P1+P3)/2 is used for the transverse bending (MZ,VY).
P2 P3 P1 P2 P1
P3
P0
P0
P2 P3 P1 P3
P2 P1
P0
P0
Distribution of the bedding in transverse direction The form factor is generated from the fact that the acting bedding force pL per length is given by the following simplified relation from the deformation uL:
L
p L + D C l u L + D E s u L D eff Version 16.13
3146
AQUA
According DIN we have e.g. Deff = min(D,1.0). For more complex cases where the bedding stress is not uniform but more like a cosine, there are of course other values possible. Therefore several design codes recommend to use any value between 0.5 and 2.0 to get the most unfavourable results. Thus SOFiSTiK will not change the prescribed values in any kind. For the bedding in axial direction a similar form factor may be defined based on a shear modulus instead of the stiffness modulus following the relation:
p A + p D C a u a + p D
Es u a 2(1 ) m) D eff
Thus the factors cancel each other in general and it is sufficient to use the stiffness modulus Es for the axial bedding as well. In most cases the maximum skin friction is the more essential part of the relation. However some value has to be specified, otherwise there would be no skin friction at all. Further there is a a rather sophisticated approach for the interaction of both directions available. The friction has very different causes: s + KSIG @ s v ) K( x ) @ v(x ) ) TAND @ u( x ) t + K(x ) @ u( x ) t TANR @ s ) C0 The first part of the pressure is described by the vertical earth pressure and the horizontal pressure coefficient. The second part is given by the elastic constants which consist of a stiffness and a dilatation.
Version 16.13
3147
AQUA
3.23.
Item
SVAL Cross Section Values

Description
SVAL
Unit Default
NO MNO
Crosssection number Material number or preferred beamtype CENT centric beam BEAM excentr. beam (Reference axis) TRUS only truss (no bending) CABL only cables Cross section area Shear area for y Shear area for z Torsional moment of inertia Moment of inertia y Moment of inertia z Moment of inertia yz Warping modulus Coordinates of shear centre Relative to the gravity centre Ordinate of the left edge fibre Ordinate of the right edge fibre Ordinate of the top edge fibre Ordinate of the bottom edge fibre Shear stress due to Mt = 1.0 Shear stress due to Vy = 1.0 Shear stress due to Vz = 1.0 Fully plastic axial force Fully plastic shear force Fully plastic shear force Fully plastic torsional moment Fully plastic bending moment Fully plastic bending moment Buckling strain curve main+lateral Cross section designation
/LIT
1 1
A AY AZ IT IY IZ IYZ CM YSC ZSC YMIN YMAX ZMIN ZMAX WT WVY WVZ NPL VYPL VZPL MTPL MYPL MZPL BCYZ TITL
[m2]1012 [m2]1012 [m2]1012 [m4]1014 [m4]1014 [m4]1014 [m4]1014 [m6]1016 [mm]1011 [mm]1011 [mm]1011 [mm]1011 [mm]1011 [mm]1011 [1/m3]1018 [1/m2]1017 [1/m2]1017 [kN]1101 [kN]1102 [kN]1102 [kNm]1103 [kNm]1104 [kNm]1104 LIT Lit24
1.0 * 3 A /12 IY 0 0 0 0 * * * * * * * C
3148
Version 16.13
AQUA
This record allows the input of cross sections without the corresponding geometric data, which are necessary of course in detailed stress analysis, yield zone theory or reinforced concrete dimensioning. They can be used in the static analysis or simplified checks with full plastic internal forces. With NO and a Literal for MNO you may also subsequently specify which element type should be selected for elements with automatic type selection with that section. This definition can be redefined at any time for any existing section. All other input values will be ignored in that case. Plastic internal forces may be needed for cross sections with trial values. It is explicitly stated, however, that the use of this input record for dimensioning is by no means in accordance with the intentions of the programs author for a consistent data input, and the user bears the sole responsibility in this case. If IT is defined as zero, special attention should be paid so that the torsional degree of freedom does not lead to undefined rotation capability during the assembly of the total static system (Error message: Parts of the system can move freely.). The default for IY is equivalent to a rectangular section with a width of 1 m and the given area A. In accordance with Saint Venants estimate, the default value for the torsional moment of inertia is
A4 IT = 4 2 (I y + I z )
This value is exact for circular and elliptical sections. Deviations for a rectangular section: a/b exact approx. 1/1 0.140 0.152 2/1 0.458 0.486 10/1 3.13 3.01
The defaults for ymin up to zmax assume as a first guess a rectangular cross section and apply then appropriate corrections from the radius of gyration. The default values for the full plastic internal forces come out of the cross sectional area. WT supplies the default for MTPL, while MYPL and MZPL make use of the extreme coordinates ymin through zmax.
Version 16.13
3149
AQUA
All the full plastic internal forces are without safety factor. In the case of the buckling strain lines the literals 0, A, B, C, D, E are used for the same curves in the main and the lateral direction and AB, BC and CD for different curves. SVAL can make an identical copy of an already defined cross section by entering SVAL NEWNOOLDNO. This serves to accelerate the method, when different cross section values must be applied later on. SVAL can also be used for defining a reduced cross section. This can be done either by using a negative NO to modify an already defined cross section, or by making a copy of an existing cross section by means of a negative MNO. The values A through ZSC are then viewed as factors for the corresponding values, and are thus preset to 1.0. The new cross section has no geometric properties any more. Example:
PROF PROF SVAL SVAL SECT 1 HEB 300 2 HEB 300 -1 IT 0.5 3 -2 IT 0.5 4; SV IT -0.5 ; PROF 1 HEB 300
Cross section 1 receives 50% of the torsional moment of inertia. The geometry of the cross section gets erased. Cross section 3 has 50% of the torsional moment of inertia of cross section 2, has no geometry, and is hence identical to cross section 1. Cross section 2 was not modified. Cross section 4 is a cross section with IT reduced by half and with complete geometry. (Only possible with AQUA)
3150
Version 16.13
AQUA
3.24.
Item
SREC Rectangle, Tbeam, Plate

Description
SREC
Unit Default
NO H B HO BO SO SU ASO ASU MNO MRF RTYP
Cross section number Total height Width for rectangular, Tbeam Thickness of the plate (upper part) Thickness of the plate (lower part) Offset of top reinforcement Offset of bottom reinforcement Minimum top reinforcement layer 2 Minimum bottom reinforcement layer 1 Material number Material number of reinforcement +1000 material link reinforcement Reinforcement subtype CORN = single points at corner CU = perimetric reinforcement SYM = symmetrical ASYM = asymmetric two sided ASYT = asymmetric three sided for more options see below Torsional moment of inertia Shear deformation area for VY Shear deformation area for VZ Diameter of top reinforcement Diameter of bottom reinforcement
[mm]1011 [mm]1011 [mm]1011 [mm]1011 [mm]1024 [mm]1024 [cm2]1020 [cm2]1020 LIT
1 1[m] 0 0 H/10 SO 0 0 * * *
IT AY AZ DASO DASU
/m4 /m2 /m2 [mm]1023 [mm]1023
1. 0. 0. * DASO
Version 16.13
3151
AQUA
Item Description

Unit Default
REF
YM ZM BCYZ INCL SPT BEFF TITL
Location of zero point C = gravity centre R/L/M = right / left / middle UR/UL/UM = upper right/left/middle LR/LL/LM = lower right/left/middle PR/PL/PM = plate right/left/middle SC = shear centre explicit offset of the mid point explicit offset of the mid point Buckling curve selector Inclination of shear links Number of stress points 0/ 2/ 4/ 6 Width of equivalent hollow section Cross section designation
LIT
[mm]1011 [mm]1011 LIT cot LIT [mm]1011 Lit32
* 0 0 * *
Depending on the definition of values one of the following section types is generated: H H,B H...BO Plate with implied width of 1 m or width BO Rectangular cross section TBeam cross section
Following this classification different clauses of the design codes will be applied to the sections. When nothing is input for REF, the zero point of the coordinate system of the cross section is assumed to be at the gravity centre.
3152
Version 16.13
AQUA
The required dimensions of the cross section can be calculated by AQB. For this task, B or H can be input negative when only that dimension should be changed. The full height of the web and the entire plate are used in determining the torsional moment of inertia and the torsional shear stresses; for the equivalent hollow cross section used in computing the torsion reinforcement only the web or only the flange is used, depending on which part is larger. The check of the shear stress due to shear force takes place at the most unfavourable location (at the height of the gravity centre for the web or at the intersection of web and flange). For the interests of massive constructions the effective torsional moment of inertia can be reduced by IT. The input of a positive value specifies a value in m4, while a negative value is interpreted as a factor. A value of 0.0 is allowed but may lead to kinematic systems. Shear deformation areas are typically not used for concrete, but are important for steel and timber. They can be defined, by specifying SAY or SAZ. The input of a positive value specifies a value in m2, while a negative value is interpreted as a factor for the default value of the rectangular cross section and the web or the plate.
Version 16.13
3153
AQUA
The distribution of the reinforcement is controlled with the option RTYP, the diameter and some entries for maximum distances between bars of the selected INI File of the design code. There are four basic options: Columns: CU SYM CORN CORN:n CSYM layer 0 at all 4 sides (circumferential) layer 0 at upper and lower side, however if the distance is greater than MaxBarDistanceC (300 mm), same as U layer 0 concentrated in the corners, bars between according to the selected design code as CORN, but bars in corners with multiplicity of n layer 0 concentrated in the corners, no bars between
In all cases the diameter will be preset to the smallest allowed value from the INI File (MinBarDiameterC = 12mm), and the absolute minimum reinforcement according to the number of bars (minimum 4) with that diameter. Beams: ASYM ASYT two layers at lower (1) and upper (2) side, thus no design for torsion if distance > MaxBarDistanceT (350 mm). three layers (1,2,3) at lower, upper and optional at the sides if distance becomes > MaxBarDistanceT (350 mm).
Die further reinforcement options without minimum shear links (appended zero) and Generate single point reinforcements instead of distributed reinforcements yield a matrix of possible literals: Distributed CU SYM ASYM ASYT Single Point CORN CSYM CASY CAST Distributed Singel Point no minimum shear no minimum shear CU0 COR0 SYM0 ASY0 AST0 CSY0 CAS0 CAST
If the reinforcement is desired as single bars, there will be some maximum allowable distances established in the design codes for columns, bending members and torsional members. They might trigger additional bars between the corners. To allow for an optimal design procedure however it is possible to define an integer factor (1 to 15) for the bars in the corners with an optional appendix. A definition of CORN:3 defines a section where the same bar diameter is concentrated in the corners with a multiplicity of three:
3154
Version 16.13
AQUA

The bars in the corners will receive a larger equivalent diameter dSn, unless a further character S is appended to the input literal. If the distance of the lower and upper reinforcements is greater than the limit MaxBarDistanceT, addititonal reinforcement at the side of the web will be introduced with layer number 3. As this is mandatory for torsion, you might suppress this by entering a literal ASYM for RTYP or a zero value for IT, but then these sections will not be designed for torsion any more. This layer may become partially active for biaxial bending for the ultimate design. Further we introduce a reinforcement at the lower side of the plate with layer number 4, if the upper layer is within the topmost quarter of the plate height. The cover of the reinforcement from the side edge is equal to the minimum cover from the upper or lower edge, but not larger than onefourth of the width. Please note, that DIN 10451 uses the cover of the compressive reinforcement (effective distance D/2) as a limit for the lever arm during the shear design of the cracked section. Thus the diameter has an effect on the shear design, STB only uses the option SYM for ASO/ASU. MRF = 0 must be specified for unreinforced cross sections. The input of MRF is not allowed for steel or wooden cross sections. When MRF is specified to be smaller than 1000, the same material type will be assumed for the link reinforcement as is used for the longitudinal one.
Version 16.13
3155
AQUA
3.25.
Item
SCIT Circular and Tube Sections

Description
SCIT
Unit Default
NO D T SA SI ASA ASI MNO MRF RTYP
Cross section number Outer diameter Thickness (0.0 = solid section) Outer reinforcement offset Inner reinforcement offset Outer reinforcement (explicit values also in [cm2/m]) Inner reinforcement (omitted if nothing is input) Material number of cross section Material number of reinforcement + 1000 material of shear links Reinforcement subtype CU = perimetric reinforcement CU0 = no minimum area for shear links Diameter of reinforcement Torsional moment of inertia Shear deformation area for VY Shear deformation area for VZ Cross section designation
[mm]1011 [mm]1011 [mm]1024 [mm]1024

[cm2]1020 [cm2]1020
1 T/10 SA * *
DAS IT AY AZ TITL
[mm]1023 /m4 /m2 /m2 Lit32
28 1 * * *
Shear deformations are not considered for concrete sections. For all other materials they are always included. Values for IT, AY and AZ are either absolute values or if defined negativ factors to the theoretical values. The definition of CTRL RFCS in AQUA is also effective for the SCIT section. The old record SCIR defines the same section via the radius and should not be used any more.
3156
Version 16.13

T D
AQUA
Circular cross section The distance SI is taken relativ to the inner radius for an annular section, but on the outer radius for a solid section.
Version 16.13
3157
AQUA
3.26.
Item

TUBE Circular and Annular Steel Cross Sections
Description
TUBE
Unit Default
NO D T MNO BC
Cross section number Outer diameter Wall thickness (0= solid circle) Material number of cross section Buckling strain curve 0 (none), a (warm), b (cold) c (solid circle) d (special purpose only) e (old AISC for special purpose) Cross section designation
[mm] [mm] LIT
1 0 1 a/c
TITL
Lit32
Shear deformations are always considered. Deviations of those values have to be defined via SCIT or SECT/CIRC/SV or SVAL.
3158
Version 16.13
AQUA
3.27.
Item
CABL Cable Sections

Description
CABL
Unit Default
NO D TYPE
Section number Nominal diameter Type of cable section 1x7,1x19,1x37,....1x547 DIN number from 3052 to 3071 type according ENV DIN 3051 Part 10 VVS1 to VVS4 full locked coil cables Pfeifercables PE/PG/PVnnn Stahltoncables DINA/HIAMnnn Type of Inlay FE, FEN, FEC = Fiber Inlays SE, SES, SEL = Steel Inlays Material number of prestressing steel Sectional or fill factor or metallic cross section area Rupture or cable factor or characteristic breaking load Weight factor (kg/m/mm2) * 100 or weight Loss factor (clamping of endpoints etc.) Reference of factors F/K/W DIN according to DIN EN according to EN Cross section designation
[mm] LIT
INL
LIT
FE
MNO F K W KE REF
mm2 kN * kg/m LIT
1 * * * 1.0 *
TITL
Lit32
Version 16.13
3159
AQUA

1x7 1x19 1x547 3052 3053 3054 3055 3056 3057 3058 3059 3060 3061 3062 3063 3064 3065 3066 3067
Cables without a type will be taken as a round steel bar. The following cable types are available: DIN 3052 Spiral cable with 7 wires DIN 3052 Spiral cable with 19 wires ... DIN 3052 Spiral cable with 547 wires DIN 3052 Spiral cable 1x7 DIN 3053 Spiral cable 1x19 DIN 3054 Spiral cable 1x37 DIN 3055 Stranded cable 6x7 DIN 3056 Stranded cable 8x7 DIN 3057 Strand 6x19 Filler DIN 3058 Strand 6x19 Seale DIN 3059 Strand 6x19 Warrington DIN 3060 Strand 6x19 DIN 3061 Strand 8x19 Filler DIN 3062 Strand 8x19 Seale DIN 3063 Strand 8x19 Warrington DIN 3064 Strand 6x36 WarringtonSeale DIN 3065 Strand 6x35 Warrington covered DIN 3066 Strand 6x37 WarringtonSeale DIN 3067 Strand 6x36 WarringtonSeale
3160
Version 16.13

3068 3069 3070 3071 6x7 8x7 6x19 6x19S 6x19W 6x25F 6x36SW 8x36SW 6x35NW 6x19M 6x37M 17x7 18x7 34x7 36x7 VVS VVS1 VVS1P VVS2 VVS2P VVS3 VVS3P VVS4 VVS4P DIN 3068 Strand 6x24 Standard DIN 3069 multiple Strand 18x7 DIN 3070 Flat strand 10x10 DIN 3071 multiple Strand 36x7 ENV DIN 3051-10 / Eurocode ENV DIN 3051-10 / Eurocode ENV DIN 3051-10 / Eurocode ENV DIN 3051-10 / Eurocode ENV DIN 3051-10 / Eurocode ENV DIN 3051-10 / Eurocode ENV DIN 3051-10 / Eurocode ENV DIN 3051-10 / Eurocode ENV DIN 3051-10 / Eurocode ENV DIN 3051-10 / Eurocode ENV DIN 3051-10 / Eurocode ENV DIN 3051-10 / Eurocode ENV DIN 3051-10 / Eurocode ENV DIN 3051-10 / Eurocode ENV DIN 3051-10 / Eurocode
AQUA
Pfeifer full locked coil cables BTS full locked coil cables in opposite/crosslay stranding BTS full locked coil cables in equal lay/compound stranding BTS full locked coil cables in opposite/crosslay stranding BTS full locked coil cables in equal lay/compound stranding BTS full locked coil cables in opposite/crosslay stranding BTS full locked coil cables in equal lay/compound stranding BTS full locked coil cables in opposite/crosslay stranding BTS full locked coil cables in equal lay/compound stranding
PEnnn Pfeifer cables PE3 to PE100 (Y 1450) PGnnn Pfeifer cables PG5 to PG125 (Y 1770 ES 160000) PVnnn Pfeifer cables PV40 to PV2000 (Y 1570 ES 160000) The ultimate forces of the cables are obtained only based on the tensile strength values given above) DINAnn Stahlton cables DINA13 to DINA199 HIAMnn Stahlton cables HIAM56 to HIAM421 Cable sections differ from circular sections in several reducing factors which are preselected for the specific design code and the type of inlay:
Version 16.13
3161
AQUA
FE FEN FEC SE SES SEL

= Fibre inlay = Natural fibre inlay = Chemical fibre inlay = Steel inlay = Steel cable inlay = Steel strand inlay
In DIN 3051 part 3 the factors are defined as:

2 Metallic cable section q m + f d p
Minimum ultimate force Weight per length
F min + kFr+kq msz G + q m w
The loss factor ke taking into account the type of fixing of the cable endings is defined in DIN 18800 for example. In the Eurocode or DIN 3051 part 10 there are slightly different definitions, which are also used by the fully locked cables: metallic cable section Minimum ultimate force Weight per length
A 0 + Cd 2 F 0 + Kd2f r M + W d 2
The user has to check all factors in detail, as they depend on the type of anticorrosive lining and the intended usage (e.g. for cableways). Cable sections may only be used for cable elements or automatic elements, which derive their type from the cable section type. ATTENTION: Prestressing steel cables have a different safety factor for concrete and steeel design. Please be sure that the value is selected properly or specify the correct value with the steel material. The correct modulus of elasticity is not given in the DIN or EN, but has to be taken from the manufacturers data. Common values are: Fully locked cables 160 10 kN/mm2 Spiral cable Galfan EN 12385 160 10 kN/mm2 Spiral cable stainless steel EN 12385 130 10 kN/mm2 Strand ropes 100 10 kN/mm2
3162
Version 16.13

See also: CS INTE SV POLY CIRC PANE PLAT PROF Reinforcement CUT SPT SFLA WIND WPAR
AQUA
3.28.
Item
SECT Freely defined Cross Sections

Description
SECT
Unit Default
NO MNO MRF
Cross section number Material number for cross section Material number for reinforcement + 1000material link reinforcement Angle of rotation Offset of all cross section ordinates
1 1 *
ALPH YM ZM FSYM
Degrees [mm]1011 [mm]1011 LIT
0 0 0 NO
Suppress rotation of principal axes YES IYZ always set to zero NO IYZ set to zero when smaller then 0.001(IY+IZ) preferred beam type CENT centric beam BEAM excentr. beam (Reference axis) TRUS only truss (no bending) CABL only cables COMP centric compressive member COLU excentr. column Buckling strain curve for yy axis Buckling strain curve for zz axis Small part addition (presently not used) Cross section designation
BTYP
LIT
BEAM
BCY BCZ KTZ TITL
LIT LIT Lit32
* BCY *
Version 16.13
3163
AQUA
Item Description

Unit Default
FEM LTEM T LTAU
Name of a Data base containing a FEM mesh of the section Load case of a temperature field Time value of the temperature field Loadcase number of the FEM database in which the unit shear stress distributions are saved (for each construction stage 4 load cases) Not yet released: Load case number for primary stresses Beam number for primary stresses Beam section for primary stresses
Lit96 sec
last 9900
LSIG BNO X
1 0.0
Freely defined cross sections always begin with the record SECT, which defines the cross section number. All subsequent input records describe this one cross section, which may consist of several partial cross sections (external outline, inner perimeter, reinforcement arrangement etc.). The input for each cross section ends either by the next SECT record or by the END record. Freely defined cross sections are divided into three groups (see 1.1): * * * solid cross sections thinwalled cross sections FEsections
A coordinate system y z is established for every SECT definition, the origin of which is in general on the reference axis defined by the two nodes of a beam. All coordinate data of the input records which follow a SECT record refer to this coordinate system. The directions of the axes are identical to those of the local beam element and defined in accordance with Chapter 2.1 (y to the left, z downward). The local coordinate axes y and z of a centric beam are only shifted parallel to the cross section coordinate system, so that the origin is at the centre of gravity of the cross section. Prestressing Tendons (AQBS, GEOS) always refer to the input coordinate system. It may be appropriate to take this into account when selecting the zero point. If desired, however, it is also possible to rotate the cross section by any angle or into the direction of the principal axes as well as to translate it (items ALPH, YM
3164
Version 16.13
AQUA
and ZM). The definition of ALPH will force AQB to do the stress analysis for the rotated principal axis system. The input of CTRL AXIS 2 within AQB has then no effect on this section any more. On the other hand a definition of FSYM YES will suppress the rotation of the principal axis completely. This is intended for sections describing only half of a full symmetric section, but may have very dangerous effects if applied to general sections. The value of Iyz has considerable effects on deformations and also forces within constrained systems. This option enforces also uniaxial bending (Vy=0, Mz=0) within AQB. With BTYP you may specify your preferred beam element type for that section. This info may be used for the mesh generation and the specifivcation of minimum reinforcements. For the design of a reinforced concrete cross section with AQB, it is always necessary, to specify the location of the intended reinforcement single, linear, or perimetric reinforcement by means of the records RF, LRF, CRF or CURF. Freely defined cross sections cannot be dimensioned with STB/STBA. MRF defines the material number of reinforcement. Only if the link reinforcement has a different quality of material a combined value is to be entered. Then this combined value represents the default for the records CUT. ALPH can be used to rotate the cross section about the x axis. A value of 999 for ALPH causes a rotation of the cross section in the principal directions by an angle less or equal to 90 degrees. During all rotations, it is not the reference coordinate system but the cross section elements that are rotated. The material number should, in general, be specified by SECT. The declaration of a material number with individual cross section elements is only appropriate for composite cross sections. In case of composite sections, ideal cross section values are calculated, based on the material defined in SECT; e.g.:
A i +
SA @ E
Eref
There are some other properties controlled by the type of the reference material. For timber and steel shear deformation areas and stresses will be calculated including also ideal section values, while for concrete the classical concrte design techniques will be applied. All cross section elements are addressed with an arbitrarily selected identification number, which has up to four characters in general. In AQB and AQUP you may Version 16.13
3165
AQUA
specify a mask to select specific elements for the output. You might for example then select all elements with a zero at the end. The buckling strain curve can be input for checks according to DIN 18800 and EC3. The permissible input values are 0 (none), a, b, c or d. Appropriate technical knowledge is required for making this choice in case of general cross sections. AQUA, however, attempts to model most cases with the following defaults: strong axis Profiles without welding joints Annular and SHshapes U, L and solid circle shapes Double Tshapes h/b>1.2; t40mm t>80mm others all others Istrong It tmax tmax Istrong It tmax tmax a c a d b weak axis a c b d c
> 1.67 Iweak and < 0.50 Iweak 40 mm > 40 mm < 1.67 Iweak or > 0.50 Iweak 40 mm > 40 mm
b c
c d
b c
b c
The buckling curve e may be input to select the old AISCcurve with the Euler hyperbola for > 0.5 and a quadratic parabola for the plastic region. The safety factors have to be large enough for this curve! Hint: For some records (e.g. TVAR and PROF) it makes a difference if those records are defined within a section or separately. A definiton of SECT 0 will allow to terminate the current section.
3166
Version 16.13

3.28.1. Parametric Sections
AQUA
It is very common, especially in the bridge design, that very similar sections are derived from a template. AQUA will therefore not only allow this parametric approach, but it will also store the parametric information along with the cross section in the database, in order to allow easy prototyping. Primary solution for that task are formula expressions to be defined for any coordinate or permanent radius (CIRC, CRF) with up to 256 characters in the form of =formula. These formulas will be saved with the section and may be reevaluated for any section with different values along an axis (see GAX/GAXP) or with explicit definitions locally with TVAR commands. The following variables will be predefined for an axis: #S_ACT #INCR #INCL #S_XI(x) The actual distance along the axis The inclination to the right as arcus The inclination to the left as arcus Array of svalues of the support lines along the axis #S_XI(2.5) is the Svalue in the middle of 2nd and 3rd support
Then we may define coordinates relative to up to three other reference points. As a reference you may use every stress point, polygon vertex or centre of a circle having an explicit identifier. The reference is done via this explicit 4character identifier, treating the specified coordinates as relative to that reference. If CTRL REFD 0 has been specified the coordinates are to be taken as absolut, however a @ character specified then as prefix to the reference will enforce a relative definition which is required for relative references containing formulas. On the other side for CTRL REFD 1 the @ will switch to the absolute mode just for this definition only. It is also possible to specify the position of the reference point by an axis, for that case the reference has to be specified as the ID of that axis with a colon prefix, e.g. :AX_0. The local coordinates (y,z) are then given by the 3Ddistance to the same parameter on the reference axis projected in the plane of the section. If points with multiple identifiers are present, then only the first occurrence of that point is used and the others are neglected. If a reference point is not part of the section itself, you should use the material number 0 for it. However, you may have an arbitrary number of nested references, i.e. a reference point may use a reference itself. For thin walled elements start and end point may be addressed by a reference with an index. Version 16.13
3167
AQUA
As the references may be used on single points, start points and end points, the following examples use a generic description. Thus REF holds for REFP resp. REFA or REFD. Case 1: Carthesian References
PT PTZ
z PT0 y PTY y
PT
You may define the coordinates relative to the reference point in absolute Cartesian coordinates y and z (left picture) by specifying: REF PT0 For a derived instance the relative distance is kept as an absolute value or taken from the given formula for this type of reference. You may define the coordinates relative to two reference points in absolute cartesian coordinates y and z by specifying: REF PTY PTZ Now the yordinate is taken relative to PTY while the zordinate is taken relative to PTZ. If a reference of only one coordinate is desired the reference of the other coordinate may be specified as 0000 relative to the origin of the coordinate system. As shortcut it is also possible to specify only a single reference with a preceeding > to inherit only the right ordinate y or a ^ for the elevation value (z). It is also possible to specify negative references. The coordinates will then be used with an alternate sign, allowing easy description of mirroring.For the coordinates itself, the double of the coordinate values of the mirroring center or line have to be specified. (ynew=2Symirryorg) REF REF REF -PTY PTY -PTY -PTY PTY Mirroring to a point Mirroring to the y-axis Mirroring to the z-axis Version 16.13
3168

Case 2: Polar References
PTD
AQUA
PTD
PT0
PT0
The point PTD (at item REFD, RFDA or RFDE) defines the direction of the reference relative to the PT0 point Instead of a point it is also possible to specify the name of a variable or a formula containing the angle of the direction in radians: =#VARNAME The ycoordinate is then measured in the radial direction along, while the zcoordinate is perpendicular and positive to the left. The input is done via: REF REF REF PT0 PT0 PT0 ~PTD +PTD *PTD absolute coordinates affine scaling only along direction affine sclaing in both directions
For a variant construction the (+) will maintain the ratio of distances in the radial direction and maintain the value perpendicular to that. Case 3: Constructional References
PT3 PTD
PT0
PT
If three points are given, then the third point may be provided with a prefix operator defining the distance or elevation to be taken from that point and searching the corresponding point on the line REFRFD: REF REF REF PT0 PT0 PT0 PTD PTD PTD >PT3 ^PT3 PT3 Distance (y) Elevation (z) Perpendicular point
If for the first two cases the third point is specified as the point itself, this will create points with the same selected coordinate, which is needed for example for points with a fixed distance, but a height depending on the cross inclination. Version 16.13
3169
AQUA
For a circle you may specify an additional point. The distance of this point to the centre will then specify the radius of the circle. For steel shapes the angle of orientation is used in a similar way. REF .... REFR PTR
Examples showing most of these features are given with AQUA31.DAT to AQUA33.DAT in the example directory AQUA.DAT.
3.28.2. Import of FESections

For advanced design tasks like a hot design it is not sufficient to describe the section just by its outer contour. For such cases it is possible to import a plane Finite Element mesh from a secondary database into a section. The secondary database will contain in general also temperature distribution fields. A spatial defined section will be projected automatically into the best fitting global coordinate plane. The section will be converted to single integration points given by the center of all QUAD elements. These may be imported group wise with POLY to specify any construction sequences or in total if no such definition is made. As this feature allows the evaluation of all sectional values for any type of section (e.g. secondary torsion for a solid section) it is the most general type of section definition. All additional elements (Stress points, reinforcements, shear cuts) are defined as usual. With the definition of LTAU the unit warping and the shear stress distributions will be saved to the original database. So it becomes possible to view those results with WING/WINGRAF.
3170
Version 16.13

See also: SECT
AQUA
3.29.
Item
CS Construction Stages
Description
CS
Unit Default
NO
First active number in construction sequence Title of construction stage Last active number in construction sequence
TITL ATIL
LIT32
With CS you may specify a cross section for (up to 9) construction stages. All elements following this record will be added within that stage. The current construction stage will also contain all the elements of the previous construction stages. If part of the section is active only temporarily, a value for ATILmay be specified. This is then the last construction stage where this part is active. The CSstage records have to be given in monotonic ascending sequence of NO, but for this case multiple records with the smae NO value may be given. However the designation should be given with the first record of such a CS block.
10
20
21
22
24
30
40
The picture above defines a general construction process. As phase 21 has no impact on the section itself it does not need to be defined. The same holds for any other construction phase like prestress stages. The input scheme in general is given by: CS CS CS CS CS 10 ; black section parts 20 ATIL 20 ; red section parts 22 ATIL 22 ; blue section parts 24 ATIL 39 ; black section parts 30 ; green section parts
Version 16.13
3171
AQUA
This will generate 6 construction stages:: NO NO.1 NO.2 NO.3 NO.4 NO.5 is the total section for the final phases starting from 40 is the first construction stage for Phases 1019 is the second construction stage for phases 2021 is the third construction stage for phases 2223 is the fourth construction stage for phases 2429 is the fifth construction stage for phases 3039
The defintions of ATIL for phases 20 and 22 will be extended automatically to the next defined construction stage, only for phase 24 the end value has to be specified explicitly. The transition to the final stage may be defined either by an explicit construction stage 40 or by the latest removal of any other phase. There is no generation of intermediat values, a CS 20 ATIL 33 will not generate a construction stage at 34. The construction stages are assigned to the individual elements with the group definition of the analysis program, a construction stage number defined there is inserted between the defined numbers here. The number NO will be incremented by default. You may want to use larger gaps to allow prestressing stages to be mixed in. With the construction stages defined in AQUA as 10, 20 and 30 the selection of stage 25 would use the 20section and all tendons up to stage 25. For every construction stage it is also possible to specify with SV for every material a factor for the elasticity and the shear modulus after the CS record.
3172
Version 16.13

See also: SECT
AQUA
3.30.
Item
SV Additional Cross Section Properties

Description
SV
Unit Default
IT AK YSC ZSC CM CMS AY AZ AYZ LEVY LEVZ MNO DEFF FACE FACG
Torsional moment of inertia Area of Bredts box Coordinates of the shear center in the reference coordinate system Warping modulus Warping shear modulus Shear deformation area y Shear deformation area z Shear deformation area yz Minimum lever arm for VY Minimum lever arm for VZ Material number for the following option effective thickness of sectional part Factor Emodulus for construction stage Factor Gmodulus for construction stage
[m4]1014 [m2]1012 LIT/* LIT/* [m6]1016 [m4]1014 [m2]1012[ m2]1012 [m2]1012 [mm]1011 [mm]1011 [mm]1011
1.0 * * * * * * * * * 2A/U 1.0 FACE
In general, these cross section properties will be computed automatically. You only have to specify explicit deviations. AK defines the area of the equivalent hollow cross section according to Bredt. This value is used for determining the longitudinal reinforcement and the link reinforcement due to torsion. However, in general AK should be defined implicitly by specifying the torsion resisting reinforcements. An absolute value (0. or positive) can be input for IT. If a negative value is input, the moment of inertia computed by the program is multiplied by a factor. The value 0.5, for example, results in a cross section with 50 percent of the torsional moment of inertia.
Version 16.13
3173
AQUA
YSC and ZSC can define a mandatory centre of rotation or, in case of only one value, a restraining plane. The literal S can be used in both cases to set this ordinate to the value of the center of gravity. AY and AZ are not set for solid cross sections of concrete (CTRL STYP 0/1). If you want to use them, then CTRL STYP 3 should be entered. If shear deformations are not to be taken into account, despite a detailed shear stress evaluation, AY, AZ , AYZ and CMS should be set to 0. For shear force dimensioning in state II, minimum lever arms can be specified with LEVY and LEVZ, in order to obtain more economical results (e.g. 0.90d) or cover extreme cases (e.g. moment=0). Positive values are absolute, negative values are relative to the height or width of the section. For the analysis of creep and shrinkage effects an effective depth deff is required. This value is defined by the area of the section A and the length of the periphery U which has air contact by the formula 2A/U. The air contact ratio may be defined for the vertices of a polygon and for circles. If not otherwise stated, outer peripheries will have a ratio of 1.0 and inner peripheries of 0.0. However you may specify the value for every material within a section via record SV explicitly. For construction stages it is possible to define with SV MNO two factors for the elasticity and the shear modulus. They will be mainly used for the evaluation of the sectional values. A consistent treating in AQB for all effects is still under investigation.
3174
Version 16.13

See also: SECT CIRC VERT CUT SPT
AQUA
3.31.
Item
POLY Polygonal CrossSection Element / Blockout

Description
POLY
Unit Default
TYPE
Type of polygon O Outer perimeter I Inner perimeter (obsolete) OPY,OPZ Outer perimeter symmetric w.r.t y/zaxis RECT centric rectangle width/height DY/DZ REC+ positive rectangle (eccentric position below) REC negative rectangle (eccentric position above) GRP Group of a FEMesh selected with SECT FEM Material number (composite sections) 0 = hole Differential coordinates of the polygon in the reference coordinate system Size of the rectangle definitions Maximum edge length of polygon Literal of exposure class Default reference point for all vertices Default reference direction for all vertices Default reference of initial coordinates for templates
LIT
MNO YM ZM DY DZ SMAX EXP REFP REFD REFS
[mm]1011 [mm]1011 [mm]1011 [mm]1011 [mm]1011 Lit4 LIT4 LIT4 LIT4
(SECT) 0 0 ! !
Unless a REC*type has been selected, the record POLY must be followed by the input of the polygon vertices with VERT . The sequence of the polygon (clockwise or counterclockwise) has no effect. The polygon will be closed by the pro-
Version 16.13
3175
AQUA
gram automatically. In case of symmetry, the polygon is extended by mirroring before being closed. A hole is automatically created when polygons or circles overlap, a true hole is thus defined by a polygon or circle with material number 0. The definition of a special inner polygon with the same material number or the formerly common method of combining several polygons (outer perimeter and inner perimeters) into one single polygon by making two passes along the same edge should normally be avoided. The input of YM and ZM causes a corresponding shift of the given polygon. The coordinates of VERT or DVER refer then to the shifted (by YM, ZM) coordinate system. The symmetry data also refers to the shifted coordinate system. Thus, for example, similar openings can be generated easily. A rectangle can easily be defined by means of a special type. These define a rectangle with sides DY and DZ, with its centre or upper or lower midside point at the coordinates YM,ZM. AQUA stores the shear stress only for polygon or stress points. If you want to see smooth shear stress distributions with AQUP it is mandatory to subdivide the polygon edges. This can be done most easily with a value SMAX. As an alternate way we have the value PHI at VERT, but this requires to define additional vertices at the symmetry axis to allow a subdivision of the closing edges. For the REC*types SMAX is preset to DZ/4. The exposition class EXP allows the definition of special materialparameters (MEXT) to individual poygon edges. The value specified here becomes the default for that polygon. For all references it is possible to select a third item (REFS). This will define the starting coordinates for all successive references to be taken from the relative position of the axis with that name to the central reference. The coordinates themselves have to be given with the initial definitions as absolute reference to the origin. This feature allows to define references to points to be entered later in the input deck when specifying the 3rd reference with NULL.
3176
Version 16.13

See also: SECT POLY parametric sections
AQUA
3.32.
Item
VERT Polygon Vertices in Absolute Coordinates

Description
VERT
Unit Default
NO Y Z R PHI TYPE
Designation of the polygon vertex Coordinates of the polygon vertex relative to YM, ZM Radius Maximum sector angle Type of vertex O Outer perimeter TP Intersection of tangents Literal of exposure class / Degree of air contact (0.0 to 1.0) from that point Reference point Reference direction point Reference initial coordinates for templates (see also POLY)
Lit4 [mm]1011 [mm]1011 [mm]1011 Degrees LIT
* 0 0 * *
EXP
Lit4
REFP REFD REFS
Lit8 Lit8 Lit8
* * *
NO is used for identification during any output of stresses. If nothing is input, AQUA generates internal numbers in sequence. The distances between adjacent polygon vertices must be at least 0.0001 m. The polygon is defined by the sequence of the vertices, not by their numbers. The number of points is limited to 255 per polygon. If a radius is specified, there are two possibilities: for tangential points a fillet is created at that vertex with the given radius. If the radius is defined negative, a chamfer is created instead with the value of R used as a distance along the edges. for other cases additional points are inserted between this and the previously defined vertex in order to simulate a circular arc with an angle < 180
Version 16.13
3177
AQUA
degree. The aperture angle is defined by CTRL HMIN/HTOL. If R is positive, the area of the polygon will be increased. With an explicit definition of PHI however, explicit vertices will be generated. In that case the sign of PHI will define the orientation of the arc. Non effective areas can be defined by means of NEFFareas, where parts of the polygons within those areas become non effective for selected forces by the internal introduction of deductional polygons. The old method of short cuts within the polygon definition sohould not be used any more. There non effective points are specified either with the definition of NEFF or INEF for the TYPE of the vertex or by giving values for YEFF or ZEFF to introduce additional vertices at these limits automatically. The sectional values of the total sections are only used for the calculation of the area as well as the torsional stress and the integral equation solution. All geometrical moments of inertia are computed based on the effective parts only (refer to the AQB manual). It is to be noted that the effective width is actually dependent on the load case and the on the purpose of design. The exposition class EXP allows the definition of special materialparameters (MEXT) to individual poygon edges. For the degree of air contact the geometric mean value is used. i.e. if one of the two vertices of an edge has the degree 0.0, the total edge will have this value.
3178
Version 16.13

AQUA
3.33.
Item
CIRC Circular Cross Section Elements

Description
CIRC
Unit Default
NO Y Z R
Designation of the circular element Coordinates of the centre point in the reference coordinate system Radius of the circle (negative = inner perimeter, obsoleted) Material number (composite sections) 0 hole Literal of exposure class / Degree of air contact (0.0 to 1.0) Reference point Reference direction point Reference initial coordinates for templates (see also POLY) Reference radius point
Lit4 [mm]1011 [mm]1011 [mm]1011
* 0 0
MNO EXP REFP REFD REFS REFR
Lit4 Lit8 Lit8 Lit8 Lit8
(SECT)
Internal sequential numbering takes place when nothing is input for NO. NO can be selected arbitrarily. When CIRC is defined for an inner perimeter, the material number must be the same as that of the element in which the inner perimeter lies.
Version 16.13
3179
AQUA
3180
Version 16.13

See also: SECT POLY CIRC parametric sections
AQUA
3.34.
Item
CUT Shear and Partial Sections

Description
CUT
Unit Default
NO YB ZB YE ZE NS MS WTM WTD MNO MRF LAY ASUP OUT
Designation of shear or partial section Ordinates of the cut segment
Lit3 [mm]1011 [mm]1011 [mm]1011 [mm]1011 [kN/m]1111

[kNm/m] 1112
! * * * * 0. 0. * * (SECT) (SV) 1 * MAE
Normal forces perpendicular to section Moment perpendicular to section Torsional resistance for the centre Additional resistance for the edges Material number of the section Material no of shear reinforcement Shear reinforcement layer Minimum shear reinforcement Output options NONE no output or M,A,E,MA,ME,AE,MAE Type of section (see remarks) Partial factor for shear force VY Partial factor for shear force VZ Inclination of links w.r.t. bar axis Width of the equivalent hollow section Deductible width due to hollow pipes etc. Roughness coefficient of construct. joint Friction coefficient of construct. joint
[1/m3]1018 [1/m3]1018 * LIT
TYPE VYFK VZFK INCL BMAX BRED CINT MUE
LIT Degree */LIT [mm]1011
* * * 90 * 0. * *
Version 16.13
3181
AQUA
Item Description

Unit Default
SXE TANA REFA RFDA RFSA REFE RFDE RFSE
crack spacing parameter fr AASHTO Minimum inclination of truss diagonal Reference point for start point Reference direction point for start point Reference initial coordinates for templates for start point (see also POLY) Reference point for end point Reference direction point for end point Reference initial coordinates for templates for end point (see also POLY)
* Lit8 Lit8 Lit8 Lit8 Lit8 Lit8
3182
Version 16.13
AQUA
With a CUT one specifies a part of the section to be used for shear design and/or the minimum reinforcement or crack width of a partial section. The input of shear sections is necessary for the checking of shear stresses in concrete cross sections. Without input for CUT, up to two axis parallel sections are defined through the gravity centre (see CTRL STYP). As these do not necessarily pass through the smallest width of the tensile zone, a warning is issued when the user enters complicated polygons without shear sections. The TYPE of the cut defines some important properties for the design. The following values are available: ACT WEB WRED AWEB AWRE FLAN FFUL AFLA AFFU Only for the crack width design Web of a cross section Web with reduced allowed strength WEB + Partial area for crack width WRED + Partial area for crack width Flange of a cross section Flange with enhanced strength allowance FLAN + Partial area for crack width FFUL + Partial area for crack width
JOIN Construction joint INDE indented shear joint ROUG rough shear joint EVEN even shear joint SMOO smooth (very even) shear joint The coefficients CINT and MUE are defined in EN 1992 or DIN 10451 (2008). For design according to the old DIN 10451 (ch.10.3.6) the value CINT has to be specified with the value of ct > 1. SLAB For special cases (e.g. hollow plates) it is possible to design a cut of any section like a plate.
In general the definition of WRED / FLAN is expected to describe structured sections, while WEB / FFUL is defining a compact section. For DIN 1045 (1978) this info is used to allow the shear region 3. However in this case, the requested minimum height of 30 cm may override a definition here. AASHTO 2005 distinguishes for the shear design (5.8.3.) between two alternates depending on the presence of sufficient minimum shear reinforcement. If less
Version 16.13
3183
AQUA
minimum reinforcement should be provided, a crack spacing parameter has to be specified depending on the maximum aggregate size ag [mm] and a maximum distance between longitudinal crack reinforcements sx :
s xe + s x
35 t 2000mm a g ) 16
The definition of the sign of the section, its internal forces and torsional resistances can be seen in the following figure. The sign of INCL applies to a rotation from the bar axis towards the normal direction n.
Shear cut A cut can be defined parallel to the axis by the input of YB or ZB only. In such cases the literal S can be used for describing the location of the centre of gravity. However, the cut can also be defined by the input of two points (YB,ZB) and (YE,ZE). In this case the intersection points with the section periphery outside the defined cut line are not taken into account. If several cuts with the same number are defined in immediate succession, the polygon line defined by them is used as a cut. Missing intermediate segments are filled in automatically. Additionally for each edge, not only special torsional resistances can be defined for each edge, but a proportional factor for the shear force as well. This makes it possible to describe outer dowel joints, reduced web widths, and cuts in multiply connected sections. These factors specify the portion of the total shear force VS/I applied to the partial cut. The integral equation algorithm (CTRL STYP 3) will establish these factors based on the integrals of the shear stress along the cuts automatically.
3184
Version 16.13
AQUA
BMAX defines whether an equivalent hollow cross section should be used (e.g. for reinforced concrete cross sections). If the cut width is greater than BMAX, the found cuts are automatically subdivided into two partial cuts, each of them processing the external width of the equivalent hollow cross section. The width can be defined directly in m, but two literals can be defined too: EC2 DIN The substitute width A/U in accordance with EC2 is used. An inscribed circle is estimated due to the area and the moment of inertia. A sixth of the diameter is used.
The default value of BMAX for steel or wooden sections and multiple cuts from several CUT records is 999. (no consideration), and for all other cuts EC2 or DIN depending on the material type. An increase in this value results in a smaller equivalent cross section, thus leading to greater shear reinforcement but smaller shear stress. Design of the shear reinforcement only takes place for cuts when a genuine or an equivalent hollow cross section has been defined. The following defaults apply for WTM and WTD: If the cross section has inner perimeters, or an equivalent hollow cross section has been defined by means of BMAX, then a closed cross section is assumed. WTM is then computed based on Bredts area as 1./(2.AKb), and WTD is assumed zero. If neither of these conditions is satisfied, WTM is assumed zero, WTD is set equal to bmin/IT and the middle output point is omitted. For precise calculations in accordance with the theory of elasticity, the shear stress values can be stipulated by hand or be computed by means of the integral equation method (CTRL STYP 2 / 3). The effective width for the shear force can be reduced by BRED. This is appropriate, for example, when ungrouted ducts weaken the web and the width must be reduced accordingly. The forces N and M perpendicular to the cut are only used to describe the stress. There will be no design for bending and normal force with the links as reinforcement. Thus a tensile force may lower the required link area while the total steel area becomes higher. Attention! In cracked state the reinforcement is used in the shear checks only when it is situated inside the separated polygon. In particular, a partial area without reinforcement leads to a shear stress 0.0 if it is in the tensile zone! Therefore we use a minimum shear stress which is taken from the uncracked state and a reduction factor based on the lever arms.
Version 16.13
3185
AQUA
The individual segments of one cut are treated separately during the design. The following rules apply for the extreme values of reinforcement of all shear cuts, which are stored separately for each rank of links: Simple cuts with the same link rank enter the end result with the largest value. Multiple segments, equivalent hollow cross sections or polygon cuts with n checking locations with the same link rank enter the results with n times the maximum. This assures, that the total reinforcement is computed by superposition of the shear and torsion components as required by old DIN. Multiple or polygon cuts with checking locations having different link ranks enter the results separately for each rank with the corresponding multiple of the maximum. Different link ranks should thus always be used when different reinforcement is to be placed in the individual parts of the cut. The minimum reinforcements ASUP may be specified with a positive value which is referred to the length or with a negative value which is referred to the length and the width of the cut as specified in most design codes. If not defined, the default according to the design code will be selected. If ASUP is defined as zero, it will be tried not to use any shear links (slabs and beams of minor importance). A special minimum reinforcement according DIN 10451 13.2.3 (5) as articulated sections with pretensioned tensile flanges requires the definition of Literal PFLA for ASUP. Shear in composite cross sections Special attention should be paid when making shear cuts through composite cross sections. First, it holds generally that a shear cut should cut through parts with the same material number. In case a segment cuts through several materials, one should input several cuts with the same number but different material numbers. It is additionally checked for all cross section elements with other material numbers whether they are attached or inside any already separated cross section part. In such a case they contribute to the static moment as long as they are not touched or divided by the cut. Most cases are handled correctly by this method, yet the results of the program for composite cross sections should always be critically checked.
3186
Version 16.13

See also: SECT SPT parametric sections Reinforcement
AQUA
3.35.
Item
PANE ThinWalled Cross Section Element

Description
PANE
Unit Default
NO YB ZB YE ZE T MNO REFA RFDA RFSA REFE RFDE RFSE R PHI OUT
Designation of the panel element Coordinates of start point * Default: YE,ZE of the last element Coordinates of the end point Panel thickness Material number (composite sections) Reference point for start point Reference direction point for start point Reference initial coordinates for templates for start point (see also POLY) Reference point for end point Reference direction point for end point Reference initial coordinates for templates for end point (see also POLY) Radius Maximum sector angle Output point NONE no output or M,A,E,MA,ME,AE,MAE or NONE
Lit4 [mm]1011 [mm]1011 [mm]1011 [mm]1011 [mm]1011 Lit8 Lit8 Lit8 Lit8 Lit8 Lit8 mm degree LIT
* (YE) (YA) YB ZB (SECT) 15 MAE
Version 16.13
3187
AQUA
Item Description

Unit Default
FIXB FIXE TYPE
Location of clamped edge from start Location of clamped edge from end Special Options NEFF not effective NCHK no stress check to be applied NNCH both options reinforcement positive in cm2/m negative in cm2 Material number of reinforcement Torsional action (see Reinforcement) PASS / ACTI / ADDI Diameter for crack width Distance between the bars
* * LIT
* *
AS ASMA LAY MRF TORS DAS A
[cm2/m]1021
[cm2]
1020
LIT LIT [mm]1023 [mm]1011
0 (SECT) ACTI 1[m]
Thinwalled cross section element Uniform normal and shear stresses are generally assumed across the thickness of thinwalled elements. Therefore the moment of inertia about the longitudinal axis (BE) is zero. The shear stresses due to torsion, however, are distributed linearly across the thickness. The thickness is considered likewise for the maximum stress. A mixture of the cross section elements POLY or CIRC inside a cross section is not permitted. The transmission of shear is only possible at interconnected elements. The program does not recognise any penetrations of thin walled elements. In the determination of shear stresses, elements are considered to be connected with each other when their coordinates are no further than 1 mm apart.
3188
Version 16.13
AQUA
If NO is not specified, then an internal sequential numbering will take place. OUT specifies for which points (Middle M,Beginning A,End E) results are requested. (See AQUA, AQB) If a radius is specified, additional straight elements are generated in order to simulate a circular arc (180_ maximum). The aperture angle is defined as less than PHI per segment (Default defined by CTRL HMIN/HTOL). The orientation of the arc is defined by the sign of PHI respective R. Positive values describe an arc rotating about the positive xaxis. For a buckling design it is necessary to define the boundary conditions (free, builtin) and to combine several plates to an integral field. To allow this we have the convention that plates will be combined if they meet in the same plane do not deviate in thickness more than a factor of 1.25 (may be changed with CTRL FIXL) deviate in their identification only within the 4th character do not have stiffeners at the end points As stiffener we declare all plates intersecting with an angle greater than 45 degrees. The length of the plate has no influence. A stiffener will move the location of the builtin face by the projection of its thickness to the inner of the plate. The user may define the builtin face with an explicit value measured from the beginning or the end respectively. Negative values will describe a free end, while values larger than the length of the element will disable the buckling design.
Version 16.13
3189
AQUA
See also:

SECT WELD PROF SPT parametric sections
3.36.
Item
PLAT ThinWalled Cross Section Element

Description
PLAT
Unit Default
NO YB ZB YE ZE T MNO REFA RFDA RFSA REFE RFDE RFSE R PHI OUT
Number of the plate element Coordinates of the beginning point in the reference coordinate system * Default: YE,ZE of the last element Coordinates of the end point in the reference coordinate system Plate thickness Material number (composite sections) Reference point for start point Reference direction point for start point Reference initial coordinates for templates for start point (see also POLY) Reference point for end point Reference direction point for end point Reference initial coordinates for templates for end point (see also POLY) Radius Maximum sector angle Output point NONE no output or M,A,E,MA,ME,AE,MAE Location of clamped edge from start Location of clamped edge from end Special Options NEFF not effective NCHK no stress check to be applied NNCH both options
Lit4 [mm]1011 [mm]1011 [mm]1011 [mm]1011 [mm]1011 Lit8 Lit8 Lit8 Lit8 Lit8 Lit8 [mm]1011 degree LIT
* * * YB ZB (SECT) 15 MAE
FIXB FIXE TYPE
* * LIT
* *
Uniform normal and shear stresses are generally assumed across the thickness of thinwalled elements. Therefore the moment of inertia about the longitudinal
3190
Version 16.13
AQUA
axis (AE) is zero. The shear stresses due to torsion, however, are distributed linearly across the thickness. The thickness is considered likewise for the maximum stress. A mixture is permitted only with section elements PROF or WELD, but PROF must be defined as thinwalled. The transmission of shear is only possible at interconnected elements. The program does not recognise any penetrations of thin walled elements. In the determination of shear stresses, elements are considered to be connected with each other when their coordinates are no further than 1 mm apart. If NO is not specified, then an internal sequential numbering takes place. OUT specifies for which points (Middle M, Beginning A, End E) results are requested. (See AQUA, AQB) If a radius is specified, additional straight elements are generated in order to simulate a circular arc (180_ maximum). The aperture angle is defined as less than PHI per segment (Default defined by CTRL HMIN/HTOL). The orientation of the arc is defined by the sign of PHI respective R. Positive values describe an arc rotating about the positive xaxis.
Thinwalled cross section element For a buckling design it is necessary to define the boundary conditions (free, builtin) and to combine several plates to an integral field. To allow this we have the convention that plates will be combined if they meet in the same plane do not deviate in thickness more than a factor of 1.25 (may be changed with CTRL FIXL) deviate in their identification only within the 4th character do not have stiffeners at the end points
Version 16.13
3191
AQUA
As stiffener we declare all plates intersecting with an angle greater than 45 degrees. The length of the plate has no influence. A stiffener will move the location of the builtin face by the projection of its thickness to the inner of the plate. The user may define the builtin face with an explicit value measured from the beginning or the end respectively. Negative values will describe a free end, while values larger than the length of the element will disable the buckling design.
3192
Version 16.13

See also: SECT PANE PLAT PROF
AQUA
3.37.
Item
WELD Welded Shear Connection

Description
WELD
Unit Default
NO YB ZB YE ZE T MNO REFA RFDA RFSA REFE RFDE RFSE
Designation of the element Coordinates of the beginning point in the reference coordinate system * Default: YE,ZE of the last element Coordinates of the end point in the reference coordinate system Effective thickness Material number (composite sections) Reference point for start point Reference direction point for start point Reference initial coordinates for templates for start point (see also POLY) Reference point for end point Reference direction point for end point Reference initial coordinates for templates for end point (see also POLY)
Lit4 [mm]1011 [mm]1011 [mm]1011 [mm]1011 [mm]1011 Lit8 Lit8 Lit8 Lit8 Lit8 Lit8
* * * YB ZB (SECT)
This element connects thinwalled section elements PLAT and PROF shearresistant, without influencing the section values for bending and normal force. Thus one can describe: Longitudinal seams of welded joints (T>0) Buckling fields of thinwalled sections (T>0) Shear bonds in composite sections (T<0) Trussed walls (T<0) For real welds the equivalent seam thickness is to be used for T. The element is then used for the determination of the shear stresses in welds. The use of a special material number, which is not used otherwise within the section is not allowed.
Version 16.13
3193
AQUA
For bracing walls the effective thickness T is given through the shear stiffness Sid of the frame divided by the product of the WELDshear modulus and the length of the shear connection in the section plane. T = Sid/(GSL) If NO is not specified, an internal sequential numbering takes place. The coordinates of the end points must be placed exactly within 1 mm (or snap defined by CTRL SDIV) to the end points of the corresponding elements.
Modelling of longitudinal weld
3194
Version 16.13

See also: SECT PLAT WELD SPT parametric sections
AQUA
3.38.
Item
PROF Rolled Steel Shapes

Description
PROF
Unit Default
NO TYPE Z1 Z2 Z3 MNO ALPH YM ZM REFP REFD REFS REFR DTYP
Number of the shape / section Profile type (see next page) Identifier of shape Additional identifier of shape Additional identifier of shape Material number of shape Angle of rotation about reference point Coordinates of reference point Reference point for total shape Polar direction of reference point Reference initial coordinates for templates (see also POLY) Reference point for rotation Representation T thinwalled S solid (thick) cross section TP T positive z ordinates only SP S positive z ordinates only (bisected shapes not for L,T,Z and SH profiles) TABT thinwalled (light version) TABS solid (light version) TATP TP (light version) TASP SP (light version) Symmetric option oo Central symmetry to origin yy Axial symmetry to y axis zz Axial symmetry to z axis QUAD Three times mirroring
Lit4 LIT * * * Degrees [mm]1011 [mm]1011 Lit8 Lit8 Lit8 Lit4
* IPE * (SECT) 0 0 0 S
SYM
LIT
Version 16.13
3195
AQUA
Item Description

Unit Default
REF
MATI VD VB VS VT VR1 VR2 VB2 VT2
Location of shapes reference point S Gravity center SC Shear center UR/UL/UM top right/left/middle R /L /M right/left/middle LR/LL/LM lower right/left/middle Material of a filling for hollow sections Explicit definition of height Explicit definition of width Explicit definition of web thickness Explicit definition of flange thickness Explicit definition of root radius Explicit definition of root radius Explicit defnition of lower width Explicit lower flange thickness (dimensions are in units, which are stipulated by the profile type) Wind coefficients DIN detailed distribution of DIN EC simplified values of Eurocode Explicit definition for a buckling stress curve (see record SECT)
LIT
* * * * * * * *
CW
LIT
BCYZ
LIT
Record PROF may be entered without a preceding SECT. In that case a section with the given shapenumber NO will be generated. If no AQUA licence is available or if selected explicitly via DTYP a section with simplified sectional properties is generated (AQUAlightversion). This is in particular valid for: Torsional inertia, shear deformation areas and warping torsion no detailed comparative stresses. The actual list of shapes can be printed by an incomplete input. If nothing is selected you will get a list of possible shapes, if you have selected a shape type you will get the list of all shapes of that type, if you have selected only partial identifiers you will get the set of matching shapes.
3196
Version 16.13

List of tabulated European shapes: I IPE HE Double TBeam with inclined flanges DIN 1025 Blatt 1 I 80 to I 600 Double TBeam with parallel flanges DIN 1025 Blatt 5 IPE 80 bis IPE 600 European shapes with parallel flanges
AQUA
Example I 300 IPE 270 HE 300 M HE 300 B HE 400 299 HEAA 200 HEA 300 HEB 200 HEM 600 HSL 100 HD 320 97.6 HL 1000 AA HP 220 57.2
HEAA HEA HEB HEM HSL HD HL HP U UPE UAP T TB Z L
extra light version wide double TBeams, light version wide double TBeams, normal version wide double TBeams, heavy version extra light type wide column shapes special large sizes wide shapes with uniform thickness
Channels with inclined flange (DIN 1026) U 300 Channels with parallel flanges UPE 100 Channels of Arbed Saarstahl UAP 200 Tshapes with inclined web/flange T 80 Tshapes heavy version TB 60 Zshape acc. to DIN 1027 Z 100 hot formed Lshapes, all identifiers allowed thickness at second position: L 20 3 thickness at third position: L 90 60 8 CDL cold formed Lshapes, all identifiers allowed SH hot formed hollow sections (EN 102102) SHC cold formed hollow sections (EN 102192) all identifiers width x height (20 to 600) thickness at third position Hint: there are various variations with different radii if needed please specify VR1 and VR2 BAR Round bars according EN 10060 BAR 100 WARM Hot manufactured tubes (EN 10210) WARM 711 8.0 COLD Cold manufactured tubes (EN 10219) COLD 711 8.0 CDS Cold manufactured shapes (EN 10162) CDS 100 80 6
Version 16.13
3197
AQUA

Example 3 Identifiers 3 Identifiers 3 Identifiers 3 Identifiers 2 Identifiers 2 Identifiers 2 Identifiers 2 Identifiers 2 Identifiers 2 Identifiers 3 Identifiers 2 Identifiers 3 Identifiers 1 (2) Identifiers 1 Identifier 1 Identifier 3 Identifiers
List of other international tabulated shapes: UB UC UBP RSJ W WT M MT S ST HPus C_us MCus L_us PIPE JIS MBis HBis MCis L_is Universal Beam Section of British Steel Universal Column Section of British Steel Universal Bearing Pile Joists American WShape of AISC halfed Wshape American MShape of AISC halfed Mshape American SShape of AISC halfed Sshape American HPShape of AISC American Channels of AISC AISC Miscellaneous Channels of AISC American angles of AISC American pipes standard / extra / double Japanese shapes Indian MB shape Indian ISHB shape Indian MC shape Indian angle shape
Shapes according to Australian / New Zealand AS / NZS 4600 UBas UB shapes 2 values UCas UC shapes 2 values UBPas UBP shapes 2 values PFCas PFC shapes 1 values L_as EA and UA shapes 2 or 3 values Specify thickness as actual value! SHas SHS and RHS shapes 3 values CCas CC shapes (cold formed) 3 values CAas CA shapes (cold formed) 3 values
3198
Version 16.13

GOST Russian IShapes (GOST 8239) Parallel BendingShape (GOST 26020) Parallel Column Shape (GOST 26020) Parallel high strength shape (GOST 26020) U_gost Russian UShape (GOST 8240) Parallel UShape (GOST 8240) L_gost Russian LShape (GOST 8509/8510)
AQUA
GOST 30 GOST 12 B 2 GOST 30 K 3 GOST 45 S 2 U_GO 30 U_GO 30 P L_GO 60 60 8 Example LARS 603 AU 17 PAL 31 40 PAU 24 50 PU 12 L 3S / JSP 3 HOES 1705 AZ 28 PAZ 55 70 PZ 35
List of sheet pile shapes: (See SYM to define singel pile or wall) LARS AU PAL PAU PU HOES AZ PAZ PZ LarssenUshapes from Hoesch Arbed / Arcelor U shapes Arcelor cold deformed Ushapes Arcelor cold deformed Ushapes UShapes Hoesch ZShapes Arbed ZShapes Arcelor cold deformed ZShapes SkylineSteel ZShapes
Profiles are primarily tabulated geometric types. Exotic shapes may be defined via explicit values VD to VR2. But you have to specify a basic type of the shape and the normally required identifiers in any case. If you select non tabulated identifiers (e.g. HEM 172), all explicit dimension values have to be specified. Cold formed shapes (CDL) may be defined as U, Z, C or OMEGA shapes by defining the values of the width B and/or the grps T positive or negative:
Version 16.13
3199
AQUA
This input always defines polygons or thinwalled section elements and not any fixed cross section properties. Therefore the analysis of thinwalled section types is performed with small deviations from the tabulated cross section values. For torsional values with very thin shapes with significant fillets, more severe deviations may occur. The default for DTYP is changed to T, if beforehand a thin walled element in that cross section has been defined. If the profile is included (oartly or complete) in concrete (also core concrete) a hole in the surrounding concrete is created automatically unless MREF is specified with zero. If NO is not specified, internal sequential numbering takes place. By default profiles are oriented with their legs in the direction of the y and z coordinate axes, so that the y axis shows the larger moment of inertia. Channels (U Profiles) are oriented with their opening to the right. Angles (LProfiles) stand like the letter L (height Z1, width Z2, but the values can be interchanged). ALPH can rotate the cross section about the x axis. When nothing is input for REF, the reference point of the shape (YM,ZM) is located at the gravity centre for double T and SHshapes, left outside at midheight for Channels, bottom left outside for Angles and top middle for Tshapes. The coordinates of these reference points and the angle of rotation may be defined with reference to other points, but the shape and its size itself may of course not be influenced by other reference points of.
Standard orientation of shapes The shapes can be coupled with other cross section elements, but then the type of element must match. Thus thin walled elements (PANE, PLAT, WELD) may be combined only with DTYP D profiles, while thickwalled elements are allowed with DTYP V profiles, overlapping definitions with other materials will generate automatic holes. And it must be kept in mind that the transfer of shear forces for
3200
Version 16.13
AQUA
thin walled profiles is only possible at ends, vertices, or at the centre point (Double T and Channels). In case of solid cross sections the edges must lie exactly on top of each other. As can be seen in the following example, the bisected shapes must therefore be positioned on the outer edge of the other profiles web.
Transmission of shear Examples of Thinwalled Profiles: a) Cross girder made out of 4 bisected HEB 400:
SECT PROF 1 101 102 HEB HEB 400 400 ALPH ALPH 0 90 DTYP T DTYP T
b) Cross girder made out of 2 bisected HEA 300:
Version 16.13
3201
AQUA

TP ALPH TP 180.
SECT 1 PROF 101 HEA 300 ZM -145 DTYP 102 HEA 300 ZM 145 DTYP 150 -7 150 7 14 WELD 200 200 -150 -7 -150 7 =
c) 2 216/3.6 pipes with strengthening of 4 mm:

SECT PLAT 1 101 120 101 120 102 -120 102 -120 PLAT 201 120 202 120 $ connections WELD 300 120 300 -120 300 120 300 -120 -106.2 106.2 -106.2 106.2 -110 110 110 110 -110 -110 120 120 -120 -120 -120 -120 120 -120 120 -120 106.2 -106.2 106.2 -106.2 -110 110 106.2 106.2 -106.2 -106.2 3.6 3.6 3.6 3.6 4.0 = 6.0 = = = R R R R -106.2 -106.2 -106.2 -106.2
Double pipe cross section
3202
Version 16.13
AQUA
For the combination of solid polygon items, one has to check that the polygon components are perfectly aligned with each other along their edges, so that the shear connection can be identified. For the definition of the following section one has to stipulate the exact coordinates and the exact height of the second divided HEM 1000:
133 132
103
134 102
152
112 123 104 124

M S O
163
164
154 153 113
114
122
162
105 144 106
142 143
SECT PROF PROF PROF PROF PROF PROF PROF
2 TITLE 'Double Cross' 10 HEM 1000 ALPH 0 YM 0.0 11 HEM 1000 ALPH 90 YM +10.5 12 HEM 1000 ALPH 270 YM -10.5 13 HEM 500 ALPH 0 YM 0.0 14 HEM 500 ALPH 180 YM 0.0 15 HEM 500 ALPH 90 YM 504.0 16 HEM 500 ALPH -90 YM -504.0
ZM 0.0 DTYP S ZM 0.0 DTYP SP ZM 0.0 DTYP SP ZM -504.0 DTYP SP ZM 504.0 DTYP SP ZM 0.0 DTYP SP ZM 0.0 DTYP SP
VD 1008-21 VD 1008-21
A defined profile is mirrored three times with SYM QUAD. With the input
PROF 101 L 50 50 8 YM 10 ZM 10 DTYP T SYM QUAD
following cross section combined from the profiles L 50x50x8 results.
Version 16.13
3203
AQUA
Remarks for the sheet piles: The geometry of the shapes can be modelled only roughly. The most important data is the weight of a single pile Z3 in kg/m and a few more dimensions. AQUA will create the locks as equivalent solid sections such that the total area (based on a weight of 7850 kg/m3) is achieved. Input of R1 is the half diameter of the lock (Ushapes only), R2 is the angle of the web against the horizontal length of the wall and B2 may be used to specify the width of the upper flanges. For the sheet piles the input for SYM defines: none single pile zz Wall with 1 m width (locks not fixed) oo Wall with 1 m width (locks are fixed, only for U shapes)
3204
Version 16.13

AQUA
3.39.
Item
SPT Points for Stresses

Description
SPT
Unit Default
NO Y Z WTY WTZ WVY WVZ SIGY TEFF CDYN SIGC TAUC MNO FIX REFP REFD REFS
Designation of the point Coordinates of the point in the reference coordinate system Torsional stress tauxy due to Mt=1 Torsional stress tauxz due to Mt=1 Shear stress tauxy due to Vy=1 Shear stress tauxz due to Vz=1 Stress in transverse direction Effective thickness Notch and loading type allowed stress range d(1) allowed stress range d(1) Material number for composite sections (= 0 if it is a pure reference point) Degree of restraint for b/t check Reference point Reference direction point Reference initial coordinates for templates (see also POLY)
Lit4 [mm]1011 [mm]1011 [1/m3]1018 [1/m3]1018 [1/m2]1017 [1/m2]1017 [MPa]1092 [mm]1011 LIT [MPa]1092 [MPa]1092

* 0 0 * * /3 (SECT)
Lit8 Lit8 Lit8
Additional output points for normal and shear stresses or arbitrary reference points may be defined with SPT. The design for fatigue is only possible with those points. A stress point will create its own stress results in the database visible with WinGRAF along a beam or may be addressed in MAXIMA for the superposition of stresses at that point. For most cases the evaluation of maximum stresses might be sufficiently performed with all polygon vertices and the intermediate points of the thin walled elements. The normal stresses can be calculated from the X and Y coordinates using Swains formula.
Version 16.13
3205
AQUA
The shear stresses are calculated by the following expressions: t xy + M t @ Wty ) V y @ Wvy t xz + M t @ Wtz ) V z @ Wvz t +
2 t2 xy ) t xz
The stress coefficients will be determined completely for thin walled sections if the stress point is within a sectional element. If the Integral equations are active for the shear stress (CTRL STYP 3) you will get unit shear stress for all polygon vertices and stress points inside a polygon. For some design tasks an effective width is needed, which will only be provided automatically for thin walled sections. For the fatigue design according to DIN 15018/4132 you may also specify literals for item CDYN indicating the working conditions and notch types (B1W0 to B6K4) as well as explicit allowed stress values SIGC and TAUC. For the fatigue design according to DS 804 / DS 805 the notch groups (WI, WII or WIII as well as KII, KII, KIV, KV, KVI, KVII, KIIX(!), KIX and KX) may be selected. SIGC and TAUC are as stress sways the double value of those of the first row of the tables of appendix 6. Precise defaults are available for S 235 and S 355 (DS 804), smaller class values will be treated according to the formulas of DS 805. Specifying only SIGC and TAUC will select the check of the absolute stress range as required for solid sections. For the stress superposition in MAXIMA, the corners and edgemid points of the encased rectangle will be available for all sections without the need of a SPT definition. For a plate buckling design via a b/t ratio it is necessary to define the effective thickness TEFF and two stress points with identical identifier describing the end points of the plate. With FIX it is defined whether it is a question of a fixed or free end. A positive value describes a fixed end and a negative one a free end.
3206
Version 16.13

See also: SECT
AQUA
3.40.
Item
NEFF Non effective parts

Description
NEFF
Unit Default
TYPE
Not effective for (any combination from:) N Normal force Y,MZ yord. = secondary bending Mz Z,MY zord. = primary bending My V no interpolated vertices Corner points of a rectangular window
Lit4
YZN
YMIN ZMIN YMAX ZMAX MNO WIDT NO REFI RFDI RFSI REFA RFDA RFSA
[mm]1011 [mm]1011 [mm]1011 [mm]1011 [mm]1011 Lit4 Lit4 Lit4 Lit4 Lit4 Lit4 Lit4
9999 9999 +9999 +9999 1
Material number (no definition = all) Thickness of rectangle Designation of the non effective part References for the point (YMIN,ZMIN)
References for the point (YMAX,ZMAX)
With NEFF it is possible to define parts of polygons or an FE section or a thin walled section to be non effective for different types of forces or moments. In general the implemented method will generate multiple deductional areas if the windows overlap, so this should be avoided. For the definition of the NEFFarea it is possible to define the corner points (ymin,zmin) and (ymax,zmax) of a rectangular window or with a specifivcation of WIDT a rectangle along a line from (ymin,zmin) to (ymax,zmax). The NEFF window may create additional polygon vertices for the entries and exits points. This option may be deactivated with TYPE V. For NEFFs defined within a construction stages this option is always enforced.
Version 16.13
3207
AQUA
See also: SVAL SECT
3.41.
Item
SFLA Forces Work Laws

Description
SFLA
Unit Default
NO U F S
Identification Displacement [mm], Rotation [mrad], Strain [o/oo] or Curvature [1/km] Force [kN] or Moment [kNm] Stiffness [kN/m] or [kNm/rad] or POL sharp vertex SPL smooth vertex (Spline) Hardening [kN/m] or [kNm/rad] Proportional Limit [kN] or [kNm] Type of the line/data point P Normal force of spring PT Shear force of spring M Moment of spring N Normal force serviceability VY Shear force Vy serviceability VZ Shear force Vz serviceability MT Torsional moment serviceabil. MY Bending moment My servic. MZ Bending moment Mz servic. NU ultimate Normal force VYU ultimate Shear force Vy VZU ultimate Shear force Vz MTU ultimate Torsional moment MYU ultimate Bending moment My MZU ultimate Bending moment Mz
* * *
* ! !
SH FP TYP
* * LIT
TITL
Sectional work law designation
LIT32
With SFLA one may define a direct nonlinear law for forces or moments for beam hinges or springs. These curves consist of up to 20 data points (U,F) interpolated linearly or with cubic splines. The so defined curve represents the elastoplastic
3208
Version 16.13
AQUA
loading path under monotonic uniaxial loading and therefore marks the boundary of the elastic domain. For unloading and reloading, a linear elastic path with constant stiffness is adopted. If only a single record is given for any type we have the following special cases: for a hinge all values are zero for a linear elastic law there is S only for a perfect plastic hinge there is F only for a bilinear law the values S and F are used for a trilinear law the values S, SH, F and FP are used where we have a linear law from 0 to FP with stiffness S, followed by a second linear branch with the stiffness SH until the maximum value F is reached. For the first point of a line the TYPE has to be indicated, thereafter the last value is retained as default. The sequence of the input must not mix up data for different NR values.
Version 16.13
3209
AQUA
See also:

SECT POLY PROF WIND
3.42.
Item
WPAR Parameters for Wind Loading

Description
WPAR
Unit Default
CS KR
Construction stage no Absolute roughness default according to material (MEXT)
[mm]
0 *
ICE TRAF
Thickness of ice cover [mm]1011 Height of additional area of wind attack due [mm]1011 to traffic Explicit dimensions of wind attack area [mm]1011 [mm]1011 [mm]1011 [mm]1011
0 0
YMIN YMAX ZMIN ZMAX
* * * *
For the analysis of wind loading you may specify different parameters of the wind loading for construction stages. This is mainly the wind attack area due to ice, traffic and building extensions. But in special cases you may even redefine the complete set of wind coefficients. The selected CSnumber is valid for all consecutive stages selected in SOFiLOAD with a group. Currently the roughness is only used for circular sections.
3210
Version 16.13

See also: SECT POLY PROF WPAR
AQUA
3.43.
Item
WIND Coefficients for Wind Loading

Description
WIND
Unit Default
ALPH
Angle for load application (180180) or Type of Derivativa: H1, H2, H3, H4, A1, A2, A3, A4 Lateral drag coefficient Vertical lift coefficient Torsional moment coefficient Reference dimension B always the width H always the height BH H for CWY, B for CWZ, B*H for CWT WB as B but in rotated reference WH as H but in rotated reference WBH as BH but in rotated reference Transverse driving coefficient Strouhal number GallopingCoefficient of EC 1 Velocity and Values of the derivativa with up to 20 pairs per record
Degrees
CWY CWZ CWT REF
LIT
* * * BH
CLAT S AG VR0 V0 VR1 V1 ... VR19 V19
m/sec * m/sec * m/sec *
0.8 0.15 *
The force coefficients are needed for the calculation of wind loads in dependence of the wind direction. For circular and rectangular sections very detailed values are available within the programs. For standard steel shapes default curves are generated. These values have to be stipulated according to an angle sequence. Curves are extended for angles outside the range 0 to 90 or 0 to 180, if they were not defined
Version 16.13
3211
AQUA
explicitly for this range. More than a total of 99 values will not be permitted however. It is especially important to consider the exact definition of the coefficients, because the literature often uses very different coefficients. In wind engineering the generally used coordinate system is to align the xaxis in wind direction and the zaxis vertical to the top: The angle for load application is the angle against the (lateral) local yaxis of the cross section. 0 degrees correspond to an angle from left to right in negative direction of the yaxis, +90 degrees from below to above in direction of negative zaxis. This definition corresponds to the normal designations. With the normal positive signs of the force coefficients then one receives forces in negative direction.
+ cl
< 0 = 0 > 0
WIND
+ cm
+ cd
The References WB, WH and WBH are similar to their counterparts without the W, but the coefficients CWY and CWZ are in wind direction and transverse upwards as measured in a wind tunnel. They are converted to the values of the schema mentioned above.
WIND
The coefficients are be to determined from windtunnel tests or numerical flow simulations. In order to expand the band width with regard to smaller modifications (e.g. ice arrangement), the flow areas for lateral and vertical flows are usually determined separately. For torsion both dimensions are then used. Thus is valid:

> 0
+ cwz
+ cwt
+ cwy
< 0
3212
Version 16.13

py + -q @ cw y @ zmax * zmin pz + -q @ cw z @ ymax * ymin m t + -q @ cw t @ ymax * ymin @ zmax * zmin plat + -q @ c lat @ zmax * zmin
AQUA
With an input to REF one can also stipulate either the height or the width as reference for all coefficients. For extended analysis it is also possible to define the Derivativa according to Scanlan. For every defined angle up to eight consecutive records with up to 20 data pairs may be defined.
1 2 FL KH 1 c ) KH 2 Ba ) K 2H 3a ) K 2H 4 c m + U B U B 2 U
c 1 2 2 Ba ) K 2A a ) K2A c FM m + U B KA 1 ) KA 2 3 4 B U 2 U
All values are thus referenced on the total chord width B. When importing data it is strongly advised to check not only the sign of the definitions, but also about a factor of 2 which might have been used either in the definition of B or with the forces itself.
Version 16.13
3213
AQUA
See also:

SECT RF LRF CRF CURF
3.44.
Reinforcement.
AS ASMA LAY D A is the reinforcement in cm2 or mm2 that must be laid is the maximum reinforcement in cm2 or mm2 is the layer type (F,M,S,Z) and the layer number (09) is the diameter of an individual bar is the distance between the bars
The reinforcement and its distribution are defined by means of three parameters.
If for a reinforcement a diameter is given, then the value AS is preset to the corresponding area (rounded to integer mm2). If AS is also specified, than for the layers of type F the value is taken as a factor, while for all others it is taken as absolute value. Thus a definition like AS 4 D 28 LAY F0 is taken as what you expect, i.e. as 4*616 = 2464 mm2. The value ASMA is preset for those Flayers to the value of AS. For line, circular or circumferential reinforcements there is also an item A defining the distance of the single reinforcements. Thus the given AS/ASMA values are always referred to the distance A. A value of A=0.0 is used for the total area given. It should be noted, that A is to be defined in the unit used for the section geometry (m or mm) Reinforcement with the same layer number is always laid in proportion to the input ASvalues. Each layer can only be increased to the point where its first reinforcement reaches its maximum value. The ratios of the layers to each other are controlled by the layer type. There are layers with the minimum reinforcement (M0 M9) and extra layers (Z0Z9). The layer type F may be used instead of M for every individual reinforcement definition. Mlayers have minimum reinforcement and, in the absence of any other instructions, they are laid by at least the specified AS values. On the other hand, Zlayers may be not activated at all. The layer number has no influence on the selection of a particular layer by the dimensioning program. For ideal sectional values only the minimum values of the reinforcements will be used. If, however, processing in the order of the layer numbers is desired, the layer numbers S0 S9 should be used as a special case. Slayers cannot be used in com-
3214
Version 16.13
AQUA
bination with M/F or Zlayers. As an exception to this rule, however, a minimum reinforcement can be defined for the lowest layer by M0/F0. The default layer type is M for 0 and Z for 1 to 9. The input of the layer type for one reinforcement of each layer is sufficient. In general the absolute value of AS for optional S/Zlayers has no special effect, it is only the relative value within the layer which is important. However the optimisation method with constraints implemented in AQB may run in numerical troubles if the relative value between different layers becomes to large (e.g >50). Each layer is allowed to have only one material number. For the further processing to be consistent, it is also useful that every one layer lies only in one material number since only then the right deduction areas or equivalent cross section values can be determined. The following principal options are available to the user: symmetric reinforcement Compression and tension reinforcement are defined symmetric with respect to the gravity centre of the cross section and with the same layer number. Minimum reinforcement requires layer type M. nonsymmetric reinforcement Compression and tension reinforcement are assigned different layer numbers. A detailed description of the algorithm for the distribution of layers can be found in the AQB manual. Torsional Longitudinal Reinforcement The keyword TORS and the literal ACTI/ADDI can be used for each reinforcement element to indicate that this reinforcement should be used for torsion. This has the following effects: During dimensioning, the required torsional longitudinal reinforcement is compared to the total active (ACTI and ADDI) areas divided by the periphery length and is then made available with an increase of the involved layers. The torsional reinforcement elements do not need to have the same layer number (e.g. top/bottom). In case of an increase due to torsion, however, each layer is increased as a whole, including reinforcements not activated for torsion.
Version 16.13
3215
AQUA
Only the reinforcements designated with ACTI define the equivalent Bredts box with its area. AQUA establishes itself a reasonable sequence of the elements and checks the defined area against the cross section area. The result may be checked as shear section AKT with AQUP. If needed you may change it with an explicit value with SVAL AK. The effectiveness of the reinforcement is defined either as linearly distributed reinforcement directly in cm2/m or in the form of single points with discrete spacing. For the efficiency of the entire box the entire effective reinforcement is distributed about the entire perimeter. Thus it is the users responsibility to check that the predetermined distribution is sufficient for the torsional loading. Crack Widths The item AR can be used for each reinforcement element in order to introduce additional properties for checking the crack width. D specifies already the diameter for which the crack width must be maintained. AR defines the reference area for a single check of the crack width, as required for instance by DIN 4227 10.2 Section 3. Here AR defines the reinforcement ratio z by means of: m * z +
AS @ factor
AR
3216
Version 16.13

See also: SECT LRF CRF CURF Reinforcement
AQUA
3.45.
Item
RF Single Reinforcement
Description
RF
Unit Default
NO Y Z AS ASMA LAY MRF TORS
Designation of the reinforcement element Coordinates of the reinforcement point in the reference coordinate system Reinforcement Maximum reinforcement Layer Materialnumber of reinforcement Torsional contribution PASS no contribution ACTI fully active ADDI partially active, i.e. active but not defining Akt Diameter for AS and crack widths Reference area for cracked widths Prestress Stress after creep and shrinkage Temperature for hot design Reference point Reference direction point Reference initial coordinates for templates (see also POLY)
Lit4 [mm]1011 [mm]1011 [cm2]1020 [cm2]1020 LIT LIT
* 0 0 0 (SECT) PASS
D AR SIG TEMP REFP REFD REFS
[mm]1023 [m2]1012 [MPa]1092 deg C Lit8 Lit8 Lit8
0 *
If a temperature field has been selected with SECT FEM, the temperatures TEMP will be preset with the nodal values closest to the given reinforcement point.
Version 16.13
3217
AQUA
See also:

SECT RF CRF CURF Reinforcement
3.46.
Item
LRF Line Reinforcement

Description
LRF
Unit Default
NO YB ZB YE ZE AS ASMA LAY MRF TORS
Designation of the reinforcement line Coordinates of the beginning point in the reference coordinate system Coordinates of the end point in the reference coordinate system Reinforcement or number of bars for more details see Reinforcement Maximum reinforcement Layer Material number of reinforcement Torsional contribution PASS no contribution ACTI fully active ADDI partially active, i.e. active but not defining Akt Diameter for crack widths Reference length for AS and ASMA Reference area for cracked widths Reference point for start point Reference direction point for start point Reference initial coordinates for templates for start point (see also POLY) Reference point for end point Reference direction point for end point Reference initial coordinates for templates for end point (see also POLY) Radius for arrangement in arc Angle for arrangement in arc
Lit4 [mm]1011 [mm]1011 [mm]1011 [mm]1011 [cm2]1020 [cm2]1020 LIT LIT
* * * YB ZB * (SECT) PASS
D A AR REFA RFDA RFSA REFE RFDE RFSE R PHI
[mm]1023 [mm]1011 [mm]1011 Lit8 Lit8 Lit8 Lit8 Lit8 Lit8 [mm]1011 Degrees
1.0[m] 15.
3218
Version 16.13
AQUA
b b
Line reinforcement The default for YB and ZB are the last defined values of YE and ZE of the previous line reinforcement. If a radius is input, then single reinforcement points are defined on the arc (< 180 degree) above the defined chord. For each segment the aperture angle is set smaller than PHI (default from CTRL HMIN/HTOL), the orientation of the arc is defined by the sign of PHI or R. The points are always arranged in the middle of the considered sectors. Hence, the beginning and the end point of the arc are not reinforcement points. If an angle of 180 degrees is subdivided into 30degree segments, the single points lie at angles 15, 45, 75 as well as 105, 135 and 165 degrees.
Version 16.13
3219
AQUA
See also:

SECT RF LRF CURF Reinforcement
3.47.
Item
CRF Circular Reinforcement

Description
CRF
Unit Default
NO Y Z R PHI AS ASMA LAY MRF TORS
Designation of the reinforcement circle Coordinates of the center of the circle in the reference coordinate system Radius of the reinforcement circle Single angle Reinforcement or number of bars for more details see Reinforcement Maximum reinforcement Layer Materialnumber of reinforcement Torsional contribution PASS no contribution ACTI fully active ADDI partially active, i.e. active but not defining Akt Diameter for crack widths Reference length of AS and ASMA Reference area for crack widths Radius for arrangement in arc Angle for arrangement in arc Reference point Reference direction point Reference initial coordinates for templates (see also POLY) Reference radius point
Lit4 [mm]1011 [mm]1011 [mm]1011 Degrees [cm2]1020 [cm2]1020 LIT LIT
* 0 0 * (SECT) PASS
D A AR R PHI REFP REFD REFS REFR
[mm]1023 [mm]1011 [mm]1011 [mm]1011 Degrees Lit8 Lit8 Lit8 Lit4
1.0 15.
3220
Version 16.13
AQUA
When PHI is input, only a single reinforcement point is created at the corresponding location. (PHI: 0 = at the z axis, 90 = at the y axis).
Version 16.13
3221
AQUA
See also:

SECT RF LRF CRF Reinforcement
3.48.
Item
CURF Perimetric Reinforcement

Description
CURF
Unit Default
H DE AS ASMA LAY MRF TORS
Inset of reinforcement from perimeter Maximum spacing of single reinforcement Reinforcement or number of bars for more details see Reinforcement Maximum reinforcement Layer Materialnumber of reinforcement Torsional contribution PASS no contribution ACTI fully active ADDI partially active, i.e. active but not defining Akt Diameter for AS and crack widths Reference length of AS and ASMA Reference area for cracked widths Radius for arrangement in arc Angle for arrangement in arc Centring factor Literal of the exposure class uses CNOM which is defined at MEXT, the distance is CNOM+D/2+H
cm/mm * [cm2/m]1021 [cm2]1020 LIT LIT
0 (SECT) PASS
D A AR R PHI CENT EXP
[mm]1023 [mm]1011 [mm]1011 * Degrees Lit
* 15. 1000
CURF can be used to define circumferential reinforcement for the last defined polygon. If a value is specified for DE, then single reinforcements with equal spacing DE are laid instead of a line reinforcement. At least one reinforcement bar is placed at each corner, however. The dimension of AS, ASMA and AR is in this case that of a single point (eg. mm2 or cm2 or m2).
3222
Version 16.13
AQUA
If A is defined as zero explicitly, then AS and ASMA are the total reinforcement ares (eg. mm2 or cm2).
Circumferential reinforcement Polygon Because it is useful for the design method that the centre of reinforcement coincides with the centre of the cross section, AQUA attempts to change the reinforcement distribution with a leastsquare method so that this aim is fulfilled. The sum of the perimetric reinforcement is kept unchanged, however the reinforcement densities are increased or decreased at the single edges. With CENT 0.0 the method can be deactivated.
Version 16.13
3223
AQUA
See also: SECT
3.49.
Item
TVAR Template Variables

Description
TVAR
Unit Default
NAME VAL
Name of a variable Value of the variable or expression in the format =expression Scope of variable If specified, the varibale will be saved to the database Comment to the variable
Lit16 Lit64
! !
SCOP
CMNT
Lit32
SOFiSTiK variables, defined via STO# or LET# are globally valid. For more komplex tasks like template section generation, it becomes necessary to define variables valid only within a scope. TVAR allows a very general definition of those variables within a freely selectable scope. TVAR without the definition of a scope saves the value for the current section. Thus the use of this variable becomes possible for template formulas even if that variable is not defined globally. Multiple definitions should be used for very special cases only. Variables used for a section have a complex hierarchy: Highest Rank have variables defined along an axis during interpolation along the axis. Secondary rank have all variables defined in public scopes (0 to 99999), either with CADINP and LET# or with TVAR and an explicit scope. Finally for all variables the defaultvalue will become effective, which is the value which has been defined at the time when the section has been created. If no other scope has been used, this will be the value defined with TVAR for the section. These values are saved with the section in the database and will be updated with every INTE command. The name of the variable may be followed by a simple numerical index. For VAL it is also allowed to specify a list of up to 8 values, which will be then assigned to the following indices:
3224
Version 16.13

TVAR INC(0) 0.05 TVAR ALF '=ARC(ATN(+#INC,+1)),ARC(ATN(-#INC,-1))' SCOP 1
AQUA
Version 16.13
3225
AQUA
See also: SECT
3.50.
Item
INTE Interpolation or Cloning of Sections

Description
INTE
Unit Default
NO
Number of new section ADD Insert a section definition ALL Rebuild all cloned sections Number of 1st reference section Number of 2nd reference section Interpolation or station value Number of a beam reference axis Shift of construction stages
/LIT
NS0 NS1 S NREF ICS ICS2 ... ICS9
/LIT
0 * *
Sections may be interpolated or cloned or inserted in the current section: If NO is defined positive a new section will be generated. If NO is defined as Literal ADD, an already defined or newly interpolated section section will be inserted within the current section definition. This is especially useful for those cases where sections exist from a general import and have to be amended with additional data. For the elements to be inserted there is: Just copy a section definition. For a cross section template cuurently defined variables (TVAR) may be evaluated. This method is selected by entering NS0 only. If an identical copy is wanted NS1 may be defined as literal CLON. You may use linear interpolation between two sections having an identical layout. For this method two cross section numbers and an interpolation factor S (0 for NS0, 1 for NS1) have to be stipulated. Last but not least you may extrude a cross section template NS0 with reference points along a general curved axis. This is selected by entering a ref-
3226
Version 16.13
AQUA
erence number NREF of the beam axis, the common station value S for all the axes and the reference cross section NS0. With all methods, the construction stage numbers may be canged with a definition of ICS to ICS9. If only ICS is defined all higher construction stages will be shifted accordingly. You may also work on all sections marked as to be interpolated in the database, by specifying a section number NO as ALL or zero. Depending on the specification of NREF, all sections along that axis or along all available axis will be treated. When performing this action AQUA will use free section numbers above 100 and above the cross section template for the new sections. These sections are deleted and reassigned if this procedure is repeated and will be printed in detail only if ECHO SDEF EXTR is given. AQUA will check the generated sections against duplicates and may use a section multiple times. A definition of INTE 0 1 will suppress this behaviour. It is also possible to interpolate typed standard sections. When inserting such sections, however only the geometric definitions will be inserted into the current section.
Version 16.13
3227
AQUA
3.51.
Item
IMPO Import of Data

Description
IMPO
Unit Default
MAT SECT FROM
Number of a material ( 0 = all) Number of a section ( 0 = all) Name of a database to read from
Lit48
0 !
With the record IMPO you may import materials and sections from a database to the current project database. If MAT or SECT are defined negative, then the import of materials and cross sections is suppressed respectively. The import is done before any other input data is treated, an imported section therefore may have a different type of material with the same number. An import of materials will delete all existing materials and sections unless CTRL REST 2 has been defined before the IMPOrecord.
3228
Version 16.13
AQUA
3.52.
Item
EXPO Ansi Export of Data

Description
EXPO
Unit Default
MAT SECT TO PASS
Number of a material ( 0 = all) Number of a section ( 0 = all) Name of a file to write to Password of the CDB to be exported
Lit96 Lit16
0 0 *
With the record EXPO you may export the materials and sections in the database to an input file for AQUA. This may be useful in special cases. If MAT or SECT is defined negative, then the export of materials and cross sections is deactivated respectively. If the filename is not specified the data will be appended to the most recently defined file or a file with the name project_AQU.DAT is generated. The units of the values will be set to the current setting of UNIE from record PAGE. The language of the new file will be the same as the current CADINP input file.
Version 16.13
3229
AQUA
3.53.
Item
ECHO Extent of Output

Description
ECHO
Unit Default
OPT
A literal from the following list: MAT Material parameters SNO Saving options at section SECT Cross section elements REFP References of elements SDEF Cross section values restart SYST System statistic PICT Properties of Pictures IEQ Integral equation method WIND Wind coefficients SPRI Spring characteristic curves BORE Bore profile values FULL Select all options The extent of the output OFF nothing computed / output NO no output YES regular output FULL extensive output EXTR extreme output Additional value
LIT
FULL
VAL
LIT
FULL
VAL2
In case of no ECHO input all options are set to YES (ECHO MAT has NO). The input of the option alone is therefore sufficient for increasing the value to FULL. The record name ECHO must be entered for every record. MAT NO YES FULL EXTR Only name of design code and materials Material constants plus stressstrain curves of materials plus default stress strain curves
3230
Version 16.13
AQUA
The ECHOoptions may be defined anywhere in the data record, the last definition will be applied to all sections. However it is possible with a definition of ECHO SNO n1 n2 to remember the currently active values for the print out of sections n1 to n2. SECT YES FULL EXTR 15 REFP NO FULL SDEF YES FULL EXTR SYST YES PICT NO YES FULL EXTR No pictures to be included Nice pictures with shading Contours including basis static elements Detailed picture including labels Statistics of total sum of sections and masses in the system (only available for restart) The cross sections which have been input in this calculation run only plus the unmodified cross sections in the data base plus all interpolated sections No printout For section templates all references of coordinates are added to the printout Overview of cross section values only Plus the most important values for each cross section Plus the individual elements of the cross section added Printout of the internal generated sectional elements
With input VAL2 one may switch from the automatic orientation to an explicit orientation of the sectional coordinate system. For the values from 1 to 4, the yaxis is aligned to the lefthand side, downwards, to the righthand side, upwards. Other values are taken as rotation angle in degrees.
Version 16.13
3231
AQUA
IEQ NO FULL WIND

No additional printout Detailed printout of the analyzed topology of the section for the integral equation method.
only in connection with ECHO QUER NO No output YES Values and graphic of the wind coefficients NO YES No output Values and graphic of the spring characteristic curve No output Table with the bore profile values
SPRI
BORE NO YES
3232
Version 16.13

4 Description of Output.
AQUA
4.1.
Information about the Design Code
The output begins with the information about the used design code: Default design code is ... The used design code is output here. class The class input at NORM CAT is printed here (e.g. safety class according to the design code). Altitude above sea level Wind zone Snow load zone Earthquake zone
4.2.
Material Properties
Only the material numbers with the material designations are printed with the default ECHO MAT NO. The tables of material properties are output with ECHO MAT YES. General Material Properties No. Material number Youngsmodulus Elastic modulus for deformation analysis (DIN 10451 Ecm!) PoissonRatio Poissons ratio Shearmodulus Shear modulus Compression modulus Compression modulus Weight Specific weight Weight buoyancy for soil mechanics only Temp.elongat.coeff. Temperature elongation coefficient Youngmodulus E90 Anisotropic elastic modulus Poisson Ratio m90 Anisotropic Poissons ratio Nordic angle Meridian angle of anisotropy Inclination angle Descent angle of anisotropy Safetyfactor Material safety calc strength fy Design strength ult. strength ft Ultimate strength
Version 16.13
41
AQUA
Concrete Material Strength fc Nomin. strength fcn Tens. strength fctm 5% t. strength fctk 95% t. strength fctk Bond strength fbd Service strength Fatigue strength Steel Material Yield stress fy Compr.yield val. fyc Tens. strength ft Compr.strength fc Ultim. plast. strain relative bond coeff. EC2 bondcoeff. K1 Hardening modulus Propotional limit Dynamic stress range max. thickness Relaxation at .55ft Relaxation at .70ft Timber Material Bending strength fm Tensile strength ft,0 Tensile strength ft,90 Compr.strength fc,0 Compr.strength fc,90 Shear strength fv Shear strength fv,T

Design strength Nominal strength (cube or cylinder strength) Middle tensile strength Fractile of tensile strength Fractile of tensile strength
Yield point Compression yield value Tensile strength Compression strength Ultimate strain Relative bond coefficient Bond coefficient K1 from EC2
Maximum material thickness Relaxation coefficient at 0.55ft Relaxation coefficient at 0.70ft Bending strength Tensile strength in fibre direction Tensile strength vertical to fibre direction Compressive strength in fibre direction Compressive strength vertical to fibre direction Shear strength Torsional strength
42
Version 16.13

Masonry / Brickwork Compr. strength fc,0 Compressive strength Tens. strength ft Shear strength fv Adhesional strength Tensile brick strength Nominal strength Tensile strength
AQUA
Layered Material (MLAY) Layer thickness Layer thickness in m Material No. Material number and material designation Nonlinear Material Nonlinear accord. van Mises (viskopl.) (NMAT VMIS) Yield stress fy Hardening modulus Viscosity law Exponent creep law Viscosity Nonlinear accord. DruckerPrager (NMAT DRUC) Friction angle Cohesion Tensile strength ft Dilatancy angle Compressive strength Ultim. plast. strain Ultimate plastic strain ultimate frict. angle Ultimate friction angle ultimate cohesion Viscosity law Exponent creep law Viscosity Nonlinear accord. Friction angle Cohesion Tensile strength ft Dilatancy angle MohrCoulomb(3D) (NMAT MOHR)
Version 16.13
43
AQUA
Compressive strength Ultim. plast. strain ultimate frict. angle ultimate cohesion

Ultimate plastic strain Ultimate friction angle
Nonlinear accord. Granular Hardening (NMAT GRAN) Friction angle Cohesion Tensile strength ft Dilatancy angle Compressive strength reloading modulus Exponent ultimate factor Reference pressure Nonlinear accord. Swelling (NMAT SWEL) Swelling isotropic Isotropic swelling moduus min. stress limit equilibrium stress Viscous retardation Nonlinear accord. Discrete Fault (NMAT FAUL) Fault friction angle Fult cohesion Fault tens. strength Fault tensile strength Fault dilatation Nordic angle Inclination angle Nonlinear accord. Rock/2DMohrCoulomb (NMAT ROCK) Fault friction angle Fault cohesion Fault tens. strength Fault tensile strength Fault dilatation Nordic angle Friction angle Cohesion Tensile strength ft
44
Version 16.13

Dilatancy angle Compressive strength Nonlinear accord. Gudehus (NMAT GUDE) Friction angle Cohesion Tensile strength ft Dilatancy angle Compressive strength Ultim. plast. strain Ultimate plastic strain ultimate frict. angle Ultimate friction angle ultimate cohesion Nonlinear accord. Lade (NMAT LADE) Parameter P1 Parameter P2 Tensile strength ft Parameter P4 Compressive strength Ultim. plast. strain Ultimate plastic strain Parameter P7 Parameter P8 Nonlinear accord. Parameter P1 Parameter P2 TextileMembrane (NMAT MEMB)
AQUA
The defined stressstrain curves are output by ECHO MAT FULL. With ECHO MAT EXTR, the standard curves are output as well: eps (o/oo) sigm (MPa) sigu (MPa) sigr (MPa) Et (MPa) safetyfactor Strain in o/oo Stressstrain for serviceability Stressstrain for ultimate load Stressstrain for calculated mean values Tangential elastic modulus at this location Material safety
The tangential elastic modulus is given in each case for the following range of the stressstrain curve.
Version 16.13
45
AQUA
Elastic bedding (record BMAT) No. Material number Cs[kN/m3] Elastic bedding principal direction Ct[kN/m3] Elastic bedding transverse direction ft[MPa] Tensile strength fy[MPa] Yield stress tan[] Friction coefficient c[MPa] Cohesion dil[] Dilatancy coefficient w[kN/m3] Mass density Thermal or hydraulic material constants (record HMAT) No. Material number TEMP Temperature or pore pressure level S [J/Km3] Specific storage coefficient Kxx[W/Km] Permeabilities or conductivities Kyy[W/Km] Kzz[W/Km]
4.3.
Bedding Profiles
If bedding profiles were entered with the records BORE, BLAY, BBAX, BBLA, then the output of the values is released with ECHO BORE YES. Where the labels mean the following: Bore Profile No. X[m] Y[m] Z[m] dX[] dY[] dZ[] a[] S[m] MatOut IBAOut MATNew IBANew HWmin[m] HWmax[m] Bore profile number with designation Coordinates of the bore place (start point)
Direction of the bore profile
Rotation angle of the local axis Ordinate along the profile axis Material number from this ordinate Construction stage number for excavation Material number for backfill Construction stage number for backfill Minimum ground water level Maximum ground water level
46
Version 16.13

s[m] K0a,K1a,K2a, K3a M0 C0 TANR TAND KSIG K0t,K1t,K2t, K3t P0,P1,P2,P3 Pmax Starting and/or ending depth Constants of the foundation profile Skin friction in kN/m Maximum skin friction in kN/m Soil/pile friction angle in degrees Dilatation angle in degrees Lateral pressure value
AQUA
Constants of foundation profile in tangential direction (lateral) in kN/m2 Factors for circumferential variation Maximum foundation value at starting and ending depth in kN/m
4.4.
Overview of the Cross Section Values and Types
In the usual case (ECHO SECT YES), an overview of all the cross section properties is output at the end of each calculation. Where the abbreviations mean the following: Crosssection static properties No Mat MNs A It Ay/Az/Ayz Iy/Iz/Iyz ys/zs y/zsc modulus gam Cross section number Material number of the cross section Material number of the reinforcement Cross section area Torsional moment of inertia Shear deformation areas Area moments of inertia Coordinates of the gravity centre Coordinates of the shear centre Elastic and shear moduli Specific weight
In case a description was defined (which is the default for standard cross sections), then it is appended after each cross section number. After the calculation of the system a summary of the cross section types can be printed then via a restart and ECHO SYST YES:
Version 16.13
47
AQUA
Summary of all sections No. Cross section number Total Length Total Weight max. Length Title
4.5.
Cross Section Properties
If ECHO SECT FULL is defined, a list of additional values is output for each defined cross section. (cross section moduli, partial cross section areas, etc.). Following a repetition of the cross section properties from the overview, the principal moments of inertia and the locations of the principal axes are output. Cross section properties are also released separately for each material in the case of composite sections. For cross sections with effective width, the total cross sectional properties of the unrestricted effective cross section are also released. In case the materials have safety factors, then some analysis methods require that the stiffness to to be reduced by the safety factors. As this would result in totally different values for composite cross sections, an extra table for the design sectional values was introduced. For the detailed output of cross sections it is important to know, if it refers to a restart. This is because in such a case only the newly defined cross sections get printed out. Even in the case, however, one can output all the cross sections with ECHO SDEF FULL. The following data are output in the table of additional cross section properties: Additional static properties of cross section alfaT Thermal expansion coefficient ymin,ymax Maximum & minimum section coordinates zmin,zmax (relative to the gravity centre) hymin,hzmin Minimum lever arm for shear reinforcement AK Core cross section for computing the torsional reinforcement AB Concrete cross section area for reinforcement ratios MB Material number of the link reinforcement TauT Maximum shear stress due to
48
Version 16.13

TauB TauVy TauVz torsional moment 1 Maximum shear stress due to secondary torsional moment MT2=1 Maximum shear stress due to shear force VY=1 Maximum shear stress due to shear force VZ=1
AQUA
The table of cross section values for warping contains: Sectional values for warping Wmin Minimum value of the unit lateral warping Wmax Maximum value of the unit lateral warping CM Warping modulus CMS Warping shear modulus ASwyy Warping area integral wyy ASwzz Warping area integral wzz ry Sectional dimension (Iyyy+Iyzz)/Iyy2ym rz Sectional dimension (Izzz+Iyyz)/Izz2zm The table of the effective static properties and table of the design values of cross section are printed then: Effective static properties of cross section Mat Material number of the cross section MNs Material number of the reinforcement A Cross section area Iy/Iz/Iyz Area moments of inertia ys/zs Coordinates of the gravity centre modulus Elastic and shear moduli gam Specific weight Partial cross sections Mat MNs A It Ay/Az/Ayz Iy/Iz/Iyz ys/zs modulus gam Material number of the cross section Material number of the reinforcement Cross section area Torsional moment of inertia Shear deformation areas Area moments of inertia Coordinates of the gravity centre Elastic and shear moduli Specific weight
Version 16.13
49
AQUA
Design values of cross section Mat Material number of the cross section MNs Material number of the reinforcement A Cross section area It Torsional moment of inertia Ay/Az/Ayz Shear deformation areas Iy/Iz/Iyz Area moments of inertia ys/zs Coordinates of the gravity centre y/zsc Coordinates of the shear centre modulus Elastic and shear moduli gam Specific weight The fully plastic internal forces are output for steel or composite sections with STEE reference. Design forces and moments N[kN] Axial force Vy[kN] Shear forces Vz[kN] Mt[kNm] Torsional moment My[kNm] Bending moments Mz[kNm] y[m] Plastic centre of gravity z[m] BUCK Buckling strain curves y and z axis or COMB for identification of combinations The table contains the states: C E D F characteristic values fully plastic characteristic values elastic (reaching the yield stress) design values fully plastic design values elastic (reaching the design yield stress)
The first line contains the single forces and moments (Points A and B of the interaction diagram). The plastic forces are followed by the values of point C marked as COMB. (For most composite cross sections point C of the interaction curve is given by double the value of the axial force in point B.) As long as the tensile and compressive strengths of the material do not match, the values will be denoted with an inverse sign, whereas shear force and torsional moments are based only on the other strength.
410
Version 16.13
AQUA
If prestressed reinforcement has been defined, the internal forces due to prestress are output. An additional table includes the output of the design data. The values which are printed at thetp, thety, thetz and thetyz are with masses multiplied moments of inertia (= rotational masses). Additional Design Data M Material number (only for composite sections) peripheryO/I Outer and inner area deff Effective thickness for creep and shrinkage tmin Minimum plate thickness in mm tmax Maximum plate thickness in mm SMP Weight addition for small parts in percent thetp Mass moment of inertia (Iy+Iz)=Ip thety Iy thetz Iz thetyz Iyz If reinforcement has been defined, then the output for each layer includes the sum of the input steel areas, the upper and lower limits of the reinforcement, and the gravity centre of the reinforcement. Reinforcement global values Layer Layer number mS Material number of cross section mR Material number of reinforcement area Sum of the input steel areas lowerA Lower limit of steel areas = zero for extra positions = minimum value for Mposition = maximum value of next lower position in case of sequential position numbering upperA yL zL Ltors Upper limit of steel areas Location of gravity centre of the layer Torsional effectiveness If the position is laid by a factor of 1.0, the accounted torsional reinforcement is
Version 16.13
411
AQUA
Nv Mv

area/Ltors (cm2/m) Statically determinate prestressing axial force Statically determinate prestressing moment
4.6.
Cross Section Elements
Additionally to the cross section values also the individual elements of the cross sections are printed as well with ECHO SECT FULL. Most descriptions are already familiar from the input description. If reference points were defined, then these references are printed with ECHO REFP FULL in the corresponding tables. Polygon or Polygon hole Id E Mat y z 1/WMy,Mz 1/WT 1/WVy,1/WVz
Polygon point number Effectiveness ( = not effective) Material number Coordinates of the polygon Inverses of the section moduli for bending My and Mz (Swains formula) Shear stress due to torsional moment Mt=1.0 Shear stress due to shear force Vy or Vz=1.0 Solid: first row = xy, second row = xz Thin: first row = 0, second row = Unit warping Degree of air contact
WO Air
Rectangular crosssection/Tbeam H/B Height and width So/Su Reinforcement distance above/below Aso/u Reinforcement above/below Ho/Bo Height and width above Beff Width of the equivalent hollow section Circular/annular cross section Ra Outer radius Ri Inner radius Ras Radius of the outer reinforcement Ris Radius of the inner reinforcement
412
Version 16.13

Asa Asi Tube/Cable D T code strands wire w*100 f k ke Zmin Outer reinforcement Inner reinforcement Cable factors Nominal diameter Wall thickness for tube Design code of the used cables Number of strands Number of wires per strand Weight factor Sectional or fill factor Rupture or cable factor Loss factor Failure load
AQUA
Following table is printed additionally for cables: Circular element Id MNo ym zm R Ua Rolled steel D[mm] B[mm] s[mm] t[mm] r[mm] yr[mm] zr[mm] [grd]
Designation Material number Distance of the strand to the overall centre of gravity of the cable Radius of the strand Outer circumference Profile designation Profile height Profile width Web thickness Flange thickness Radius transition arch web flange Coordinates of the profile reference point within the cross section Rotation
Cuts for shear design No Section number Type Type of section WEB/WRED Web with/without shear region 3 FLAN/FFUL Flange with/without
Version 16.13
413
AQUA
MNo beta mue yb/zb ye/ze b0 1/WTM,D FVy/z Ns/Ms MRF R AsSU

shear region 3 Material number of the partial section Parameter of friction in construction joint Friction coefficient of construction joint Coordinates of the partial section Width of section / effective width for shear force Reciprocal torsional stress moduli Proportion factors for shear force Lateral bending internal forces Material number of the link reinforcement Layer of the link reinforcement Minimum link reinforcement 2nd value under AsSU: inclination of links w.r.t. bar axis in degree
Stress output locations on shear cuts Txt. Point designation MNo Material number y Coordinates of the point z 1/WT Shear stress due to torsional moment Mt=1.0 1/WVy,1/WVz Shear stress due to shear force Vy or Vz=1.0 Solid: first row = xy, second row = xz Thin: first row = 0, second row = sigp Stress in transverse direction W0 Unit warping Construction and Selected Result Points Txt. Point designation M Material number y Coordinates of the point z 1/WMy,Mz Inverses of the section moduli for bending My and Mz (Swains formula) 1/WT Shear stress due to torsional moment Mt=1.0 1/WVy,1/WVz Shear stress due to shear force Vy or Vz=1.0 Solid: first row = xy, second row = xz Thin: first row = 0, second row =
414
Version 16.13

sigp W0 sig/taud Thin elements or Longitudinal weld Id. MNo No yB/zB yE/zE t WB/WE TauT/B TauVy/Vz xF
AQUA
Stress in transverse direction Unit warping Permissible range of steel stresses or notch type
Designation Material number Element number Coordinates of beginning Coordinates of end Thickness Unit warping at beginning/end Shear stress due to MT=1.0 or MT2=1.0 Shear stress due to VY=1.0 or VZ=1.0 Distance of buckling from end points dimensionless, in relation to the plate length
Single point reinforcement Id. Designation MNo Material number of reinforcement y Coordinates of the reinforcement z T Temperature sig Prestress As Base value or minimum reinforcement Asmax Maximum reinforcement Lay Layer number D Diameter Ar Reference area for cracked widths Distributed reinforcement Id. Designation MNo Material number of reinforcement No Identification number ya,za Beginning point of the linear reinforcement ye,ze End point of the linear reinforcement As Base value or minimum reinforcement Asmax Maximum reinforcement
Version 16.13
415
AQUA
Lay D Ar Circular reinforcement Id. MNo No ym,zm R As Asmax Lay D Ar

Layer number Diameter Reference area for cracked widths Designation Material number of reinforcement Identification number Coordinates of reinforcement centre Radius of the circular reinforcement Base value or minimum reinforcement Maximum reinforcement Layer number Diameter Reference area for cracked widths
4.7.
Wind Coefficients
The parameters of wind loading defined in record WPAR are output as follows (ECHO WIND YES): Areas of wind attack CS rel.roughnss iceing traffic ymin ymax zmin zmax Construction stage number Relative roughness Thickness of ice cover Height of additional area of wind attack due to traffic Dimensions of wind attack area
The table of wind coefficients is output for steel profiles (record PROF) or in case of an explicit input with WIND: Wind coefficients depending on angle of attack alpha Angle for load application cwy Lateral coefficient cwz Vertical coefficient cwt Torsional coefficient Ref Reference dimension
416
Version 16.13

clat Strohal agallop Transverse driving coefficient Strouhal number GallopingCoefficient
AQUA
4.8.
Integral Equation Method
The output of the analyzed topology of the cross sections for the integral equation method reads: Detected Geometry of section for Integral equation system Reg Region edge Boundary number nodea Start node nodeb End node M area number MNo Material number Conn. Hint to a connecting edge YA, ZA Coordinates at beginning YE, ZE Coordinates at end
4.9.
Spring Characteristic Curves
With SFLA it is possible to define a direct nonlinear law for forces or moments for every spring. It is printed then with ECHO SPRI YES: Explicit force deformation rule Number Number of the spring characteristic curve u[mm] or [mrad] Displacement or rotation or [o/oo] or [1/km] or strain or curvature Typ the defined TYPE of the line is printed here
Version 16.13
417
AQUA

This page intentionally left blank
418
Version 16.13

5 Examples
AQUA
The examples of this manual are more to demonstrate variant features. The input files which are explained here are to be found in the installation directory SOFiSTiK in the subdirectory aqua.dat\english. Alternatively you will find these examples via the TEDDY menu HELP > EXAMPLES sorted by program name and language. For additional help like tutorials, tutorial movies and practical examples please refer to the SOFiSTiK Infoportal (www.sofistik.com/Infoportal).
Version 16.13
51
AQUA

Materials.
5.1.
In a verification dat set aqua0_material.dat a lot of variants of the material definition are present. This data set is not suitable for practical analysis, because we allow only one set of design codes to be selected and any material not within this family will be flagged with a error message. Partial features of this data set however might be of general interest.
MAT 13 690000 0.3 GAM 20 TITL 'NONLINEAR TEST MATERIAL' NMAT 13 GUDE 20. 103.5 0. 11. $ GUDEHUS NON ASSOCIATED NMAT 13 SWEL 5 10 1500. BMAT 13 TYPE PAIN 3 12.0
This definition supplies for a soil material, linear elastic constants, a yield function, swelling properties and elastic bedding constants. It is possible to define these parameters separately, but a definition of MAT will delete all parameters, while NMAT GUDE may replace a previously defined NMAT MOHR, but NMAT SWEL may be used independently again. It is strongly recommended to control the printout to be sure about the current definition of the constants.
CONC 31 C SSLA CONC 32 C SSLA 30S TITL '(Temperature EC 2/4)' ULTI TEMP 100,300,500,700 30RS TITL '(Temperature EC 2/4)' ULTI TEMP 100,300,500,700 SHIF
This defines concrete according to EC2 / EC4 with distinct temperature dependant properties from 100 to 700 degree via explicit stress strain laws. The second case will shift the curves in such a way, that the zero point of the strain has the compressive stress induced from the thermal expansion at the selected temperature.
52
Version 16.13

5.2. Standard Sections.
AQUA
A classified section is created with a single input record. The constraints about the geometry allow the use of special formulas or tabulated values from the literature, but on the other side the general usage is not possible. This is most significant for the definition of steel shapes, which may be defined via 4 different ways (aqua8_shapes.dat). classified panels (thinwalled) classified polygon (thick) PROF 31 HEA 300 DTYP TABD PROF 32 HEA 300 DTYP TABV
general Einzelbleche (thinwalled) PROF 35 HEA 300 DTYP D general polygon (thick) PROF 36 HEA 300 DTYP V
The summary of the sectional values show the first deviations:

No 31 Static properties of cross section MNo A[cm2] Ay/Az/Ayz Iy/Iz/Iyz MNs It[cm4] [cm2] [cm4] = HE 300 A 1 112.53 70.00 18233.1 85.6 23.46 6300.0 = HE 300 A 1 112.53 85.6 = HE 300 A 1 112.53 68.3 = HE 300 A 1 112.53 84.2 ys/zs [mm] 0.0 0.0 y/z-sc [mm] 0.0 0.0 modules [N/mm2] 210000 81000 gam [kN/m] 0.88
32
70.00 23.46
18261.6 6310.1
0.0 0.0
0.0 0.0
210000 81000
0.88
35
70.00 23.76
18233.1 6300.0
0.0 0.0
0.0 0.0
210000 81000
0.88
36
76.66 24.33
18261.6 6310.1
0.0 0.0
0.0 0.0
210000 81000
0.88
The length and thickness of the plates at the fillets have been chosen to match the real area and moments of inertia as close as possible ( A = 11300 mm2, Iy = 182600000 mm4, Iz = 63100000 mm4). The value of It is obtained by formulas from the literature also accounting for the fillets and match the official value of 856000 mm4. The explicit thin walled definition can not reach this value fully, but for the polygon section this value is obtained depending on the numerical effort. More deviations can be found for the shear and warping sectional values:
Version 16.13
53
AQUA
No 31 32 35 36 Section values for warping Wmin[cm2] Wmax[cm2] CM[cm6] -207.00 207.00 1199772.38 -207.00 207.00 1199772.38 -207.00 207.00 1199772.50 -215.39 215.39 1199772.38

CMS[cm4] ASwyy[cm6] ASwzz[cm6] ry[mm] rz[mm] 0.0 0.00 0.00 0.0 0.00 0.00 13330.8 -0.09 -0.26 0.0 0.00 0.00
Warping resistance and warping shear resistance are currently only available for thinwalled sections. The warping resistance CM for section 36 is therefore taken from the tabulated value, but will not be available for a general section. The different approaches for the fillets have also an effect on the shear stress. As it is not fair to account for them for the torsional inertia but not for the torsional stress, a modified maximum thickness will be used for the formula Zt=tmax/It.
Design forces and moments (C/E = characteristic plastic/elastic, D=plast.Design, F=elast. Design) N[kN] Vy[kN] Vz[kN] Mt[kNm] My[kNm] Mz[kNm] y[mm] z[mm] BUCK C 2700.7 1163.94 516.54 10.34 331.96 153.90 0.0 0.0 B C E 2700.7 777.82 311.00 5.23 301.79 100.80 0.0 0.0 D 2455.2 1058.13 469.58 9.40 301.79 139.91 0.0 0.0 F 2455.2 707.11 282.73 4.75 274.35 91.64 0.0 0.0 C E D F C E D F C E D F 2700.7 2700.7 2455.2 2455.2 2700.7 2700.7 2455.2 2455.2 2700.7 2700.7 2455.2 2455.2 1163.94 777.82 1058.13 707.11 1163.94 775.96 1058.13 705.42 1062.21 750.85 965.64 682.59 516.54 311.00 469.58 282.73 395.29 310.69 359.36 282.45 337.07 311.00 306.43 282.72 11.28 5.23 10.26 4.75 7.56 5.23 6.88 4.75 7.23 5.13 6.57 4.67 331.96 302.26 301.79 274.78 331.77 317.10 301.61 288.27 331.96 302.26 301.79 274.78 153.90 100.96 139.91 91.78 151.20 100.80 137.45 91.64 153.90 100.96 139.91 91.78 0.0 0.0 0.0 0.0 0.0 0.0 0.0 0.0 0.0 0.0 0.0 0.0 0.0 0.0 0.0 0.0 0.0 0.0 0.0 0.0 0.0 0.0 0.0 0.0 B C
No
32
35
B C
36
B C
For the plastic forces and moments the shear components are critical again. For the torsional moment there are good reference values available via the sand hill analog of Bcklund/Akesson (1972), for the shear it is possible to assign more or less parts of the area of the section. The values obtained from the program fit quite well, but for the freely defined sections they are a little bit on the conservative side.
Control value Without fillets With fillets Vy-plas 1058.125 1058.125 Vz-plas 295.519 469.580 Mt-plas 8.505 10.209
54
Version 16.13

5.3. TBeam with Effective Width.
AQUA
A part of the cross sectional area of a Tbeam must become ineffective. Thus this section is no longer definable via the classified section type:
Tbeam As a comparison the Tbeam is defined as a standard cross section with the cross section number 1. The input (aqua2_tbeam.dat) reads:
PROG HEAD HEAD HEAD NORM PAGE ECHO CONC $ SREC $ SECT POLY VERT AQUA EXAMPLE 2 T-BEAM WITH EFFECTIVE WIDTH CROSS SECTION No 1 = T-BEAM AS STANDARDIZED CROSS-SECTION CROSS SECTION No 2 = T-BEAM AS GENERAL CROSS-SECTION DIN 1045-1 UNIO 1 UNII 1 FULL 1 C 45 ; CONC 2 C 30 ; STEE 3 BST 500SA 1 100 20 20 100 5 5 10 20 TITL 'T-BEAM STANDARDIZED' TITL 'GENERAL T-BEAM'
2 OPZ 1 50 0 3 = 20 6 10 = 7 = 100 NEFF MY YMIN 40 YMAX 60 NEFF MY YMIN -40 YMAX -60 CUT 1 ZB S
Version 16.13
55
AQUA
LRF 1 8 95 -8 95 LAY 1 AS -10 TORS ACTI LRF 1 -8 5 8 5 LAY 2 AS -20 TORS ACTI END
This results in the following output:

Cross section No. 1 - T-BEAM STANDARDIZED
Static properties of cross section Mat A[m2] Ay/Az/Ayz Iy/Iz/Iyz NoR It[m4] [m2] [m4] 1 3.6000E-01 3.142E-02 3 3.786E-03 1.720E-02
ys/zs [cm] 0.00 0.00
y/z-sc [cm] 0.00 -19.85
modules [MPa] 32846 13686
gam [kN/m] 9.00
Additional static properties of cross section Alfa-T ymin zmin hymin AK MB Tau-T Tau-Vy ymax zmax hzmin AB Tau-B Tau-Vz [1/K] [cm] [cm] [cm] [m2] [1/m3] [1/m2] 1.0E-05 -50.00 -32.22 2.158E-01 3 3.310E+01 6.977E+00 50.00 67.78 3.600E-01 7.310E+00 Rectangular cross-section/T-beam H/B So/Su Aso/u [cm] [cm] [cm2] 100.00 3.50 10.00 20.00 3.50 20.00 Additional Design Data M periphery-O/-I deff [m2/m] [m2/m] [cm] 4.000 18.00
Ho/Bo [cm] 20.00 100.00
B-eff [cm] 7.00
t-min t-max SMP [cm] [cm] [o/o] 20.00 100.00 0.0
thet-p [tm2/m] 0.122
thet-y [tm2/m] 0.079
thet-z [tm2/m] 0.043
thet-yz [tm2/m]
Reinforcement global values Layer mS mR area lower-A [cm2] [cm2] M1 1 3 0.13 20.00 M2 1 3 0.93 10.00 M3 1 3 1.86 0.00 M4 1 3 0.93 0.00 Cross section No.
upper-A [cm2]
yL [cm] 0.00 0.00 0.00 0.00
zL [cm] 64.28 -28.72 17.78 -15.72
L-tors [cm] 10.30 73.68 147.35 73.68
N-pr [kN]
M-pr [kNm]
2 - GENERAL T-BEAM ys/zs [cm] 0.00 32.22 y/z-sc [cm] 0.00 12.94 modules [MPa] 32846 13686 gam [kN/m] 9.00
Mat A[m2] Ay/Az/Ayz Iy/Iz/Iyz NoR It[m4] [m2] [m4] 1 3.6000E-01 3.142E-02 3 4.786E-03 1.720E-02
56
Version 16.13

Additional static properties of cross section Alfa-T ymin zmin hymin AK MB Tau-T Tau-Vy ymax zmax hzmin AB Tau-B Tau-Vz [1/K] [cm] [cm] [cm] [m2] [1/m3] [1/m2] 1.0E-05 -50.00 -32.22 1.440E-01 3 3.676E+01 50.00 67.78 3.600E-01 7.268E+00 Section values for warping Wmin[m2] Wmax[m2] CM[m6] -0.0777 0.0777 0.000
AQUA
CMS[m4] 0.000
ASwyy[m6] 0.000
ASwzz[m6] 0.000
ry[cm] 0.00
rz[cm] 52.39
Effective static properties of cross section Mat A[m2] Iy/Iz/Iyz ys/zs modules NoR [m4] [cm] [MPa] 1 3.6000E-01 2.907E-02 0.00 32846 3 1.720E-02 35.00 13686 Design values of cross section Mat A[m2] Ay/Az/Ayz Iy/Iz/Iyz NoR It[m4] [m2] [m4] 1 3.6000E-01 3.342E-02 4.786E-03 1.720E-02 Additional Design Data M periphery-O/-I deff [m2/m] [m2/m] [cm] 4.000 18.00
gam [kN/m] 9.00
ys/zs [cm] 0.00 31.11
gam [kN/m] 9.00
t-min [cm]
t-max SMP thet-p [cm] [o/o] [tm2/m] 0.0 0.122
thet-yz [tm2/m] 0.000
Reinforcement global values Layer mS mR area lower-A [cm2] [cm2] Z1 1 3 10.00 0.00 Z2 1 3 20.00 0.00
upper-A [cm2]
yL [cm] 0.00 0.00
zL [cm] 95.00 5.00
L-tors [cm] 70.67 141.33
N-pr [kN]
M-pr [kNm]
A first look on the geometry shows that the classified section has created 4 layers of reinforcements, because the height of the web requires a longitudinal reinforcement at the side if loaded with torsion. The torsional moment of inertia and the shear stresses for the standard T beams are then calculated from the web+plate alone. The more accurate formulation of cross section 2 results in a slightly higher moment of inertia. By contrast, the polar moment of inertia 4.8E2 would be 10 times higher and the SaintVenants estimate with 1.1E2 would be more than twice as big. If now STYP 0 is input instead of STYP 1 (default) for CTRL, the torsional moment of inertia of the standardized Tbeam (cross section) does not changed. On the other hand the torsional moment of inertia of the general Tbeam (cross section
Version 16.13
57
AQUA
2) increases insignificantly. In the case of STYP 1 the values are more accurate: IT = 4.786E3 and the shear centre zsc= 12.94 cm.
CROSS-SECTION NO 1 T-BEAM STANDARDIZED
ys/zs [cm] 0.00 0.00
y/z-sc [cm] 0.00 -19.85
gam [kN/m] 9.00
Additional static properties of cross section Alfa-T ymin zmin hymin AK MB Tau-T Tau-Vy ymax zmax hzmin AB Tau-B Tau-Vz [1/K] [cm] [cm] [cm] [m2] [1/m3] [1/m2] 1.0E-05 -50.00 -32.22 2.158E-01 3 3.310E+01 6.977E+00 50.00 67.78 3.600E-01 7.310E+00 CROSS-SECTION NO 2 GENERAL T-BEAM ys/zs [cm] 0.00 32.22 y/z-sc [cm] 0.00 12.63 modules [MPa] 32846 13686 gam [kN/m] 9.00
Mat A[m2] Ay/Az/Ayz Iy/Iz/Iyz NoR It[m4] [m2] [m4] 1 3.6000E-01 3.142E-02 3 4.957E-03 1.720E-02
Additional static properties of cross section Alfa-T ymin zmin hymin AK MB Tau-T Tau-Vy ymax zmax hzmin AB Tau-B Tau-Vz [1/K] [cm] [cm] [cm] [m2] [1/m3] [1/m2] 1.0E-05 -50.00 -32.22 1.440E-01 3 3.676E+01 50.00 67.78 3.600E-01 7.268E+00
A clear deviation can be seen for the value of TAUT. The stress in cross section 1 is calculated according to the theory of elasticity, whereas a more accurate calculation with STYP 2 gives the value of 53.2 for the cross section 2. However, in the case of the default STYP 1 the displacement method is only used for the torisonal moment of inertia and the position of the shear centre. Here the value of TAUT only amounts to 70% of the value for STYP 2.
58
Version 16.13
AQUA
As a third cross section a principal variation with subsequent insitu cast concrete is presented here (STYP 1):
PROG AQUA HEAD CROSS SECTION SECT 4 POLY OPZ MNO 1 VERT 11 10 20 12 10 100 CURF 50[mm] D 8 10 POLY OPZ MNO 2 VERT 1 50 0 2 = 20 NEFF YMIN 45 ZMIN NEFF YMIN -45 ZMIN CURF 50[mm] D 8 15 CUT 1 ZB S END No 3 = T-BEAM AS COMPOSITE CROSS SECTION TITL 'COMPOSITE CROSS-SECTION'
TORS ACTI LAY 0
0 YMAX 45 ZMAX 20 0 YMAX -45 ZMAX 20 TORS ACTI LAY 1
WIDT 10 WIDT 10
The output of the cross section is as follows:

CROSS-SECTION NO 4 COMPOSITE CROSS-SECTION
ys/zs [cm] 0.00 34.38
y/z-sc [cm] 0.00 13.28
gam [kN/m] 9.00
Additional static properties of cross section Alfa-T ymin zmin hymin AK MB Tau-T Tau-Vy ymax zmax hzmin AB Tau-B Tau-Vz [1/K] [cm] [cm] [cm] [m2] [1/m3] [1/m2] 1.0E-05 -40.00 -34.38 1.341E-01 3 3.730E+01 7.876E-15 40.00 65.62 3.600E-01 7.067E+00 Section values for warping Wmin[m2] Wmax[m2] CM[m6] -0.0773 0.0773 0.000 Partial cross sections Mat A[m2] Ay/Az/Ayz NoR It[m4] [m2] 1 1.6000E-01 3 2.242E-03 2 2.0000E-01 1.716E-01 3 2.601E-03 1.145E-01
CMS[m4] 0.000
ASwyy[m6] 0.000
ASwzz[m6] 0.000
ry[cm] 0.00
rz[cm] 48.58
Iy/Iz/Iyz [m4] 8.533E-03 5.333E-04 6.667E-04 1.667E-02
ys/zs [cm] 0.00 60.00 0.00 10.00
modules [MPa] 32846 13686 28309 11796
gam [kN/m] 4.00 5.00
Version 16.13
59
AQUA
Effective static properties of cross section Mat A[m2] Iy/Iz/Iyz ys/zs modules NoR [m4] [cm] [MPa] 1 3.0197E-01 2.793E-02 0.00 32846 3 7.897E-03 37.17 13686 Design values of cross section Mat A[m2] Ay/Az/Ayz Iy/Iz/Iyz NoR It[m4] [m2] [m4] 1 2.9790E-01 1.479E-01 2.751E-02 4.484E-03 9.873E-02 7.888E-03 Additional Design Data M periphery-O/-I deff [m2/m] [m2/m] [cm] 4.400 15.29 1 2.000 16.00 2 2.400 16.67
gam [kN/m] 8.00
ys/zs [cm] 0.00 36.85
gam [kN/m] 7.89
t-min [cm]
t-max SMP thet-p [cm] [o/o] [tm2/m] 0.0 0.122 0.0 0.023 0.0 0.043
thet-y [tm2/m] 0.079 0.021 0.002
thet-z [tm2/m] 0.043 0.001 0.042
thet-yz [tm2/m]
Reinforcement global values Layer mS mR area lower-A [cm2] [cm2] M0 1 3 8.00 8.00 Z1 2 3 6.67 0.00
upper-A [cm2]
yL [cm] 0.00 0.00
zL [cm] 60.00 10.00
L-tors [cm] 186.80 155.66
N-pr [kN]
M-pr [kNm]
510
Version 16.13

5.4. Polygonal Column Cross Section.
The following cross section is to be described (aqua1_polygon.dat):
AQUA
Column cross section A simple definition of the input may be defined with:
PROG HEAD NORM ECHO ECHO CONC SECT POLY AQUA EXAMPLE REINFORCED CONCRETE DIN 1045-1 SECT EXTR FULL EXTR 1 C 20 ; STEE 11 BST 500SA 1 TITL 'POLYGON COLUMN SECTION' ; VERT 1 0.000 0.000 2 -0.400 0.000 3 -0.550 -0.315 4 -0.750 -0.315 5 -0.750 -0.630 6 0.000 -0.630 101 -0.105 -0.105 55.44 102 -0.320 -0.077 36.96 103 -0.673 -0.392 24.64 104 -0.673 -0.525 36.96 105 -0.105 -0.525 36.96 1 ZB -0.31 2 ZB -0.11 3 YB S 4 YB -0.55
RF
CUT CUT CUT CUT END
Version 16.13
511
AQUA
The printout starts with the materials, followed with an overview of all sectional values. The materials show also some rarely used values. The chosen ECHO Option shows also all the strainstress laws of the materials which are available threefold for the selected design code DIN 10451, having different safety factors and meaning of the safety factors.
Default design code is DIN 1045-1 (2001) (Germany) No. 10 C 20/25 (DIN 1045-1) -------------------------------------------------------------------------------Youngs-modulus 24914 [MPa] Safetyfactor 1.50 [-] Poisson-Ratio 0.20 [-] Strength fc 17.00 [MPa] Shear-modulus 10381 [MPa] Nomin. strength fcn 20.00 [MPa] Compression modulus 13841 [MPa] Tens. strength fctm 2.21 [MPa] Weight 25.0 [kN/m3] 5 % t.strength fctk 1.55 [MPa] Weight buoyancy 25.0 [kN/m3] 95 % t.strength fctk 2.87 [MPa] Temp.elongat.coeff. 1.00E-05 [-] Bond strength fbd 2.32 [MPa] Service strength 28.00 [MPa] Fatigue strength 10.43 [MPa] Stress-Strain for serviceability eps[o/oo] sig-m[MPa] E-t[MPa] Is only valid within the defined 0.000 0.00 27405 stress range -1.100 -21.50 12242 -2.200 -28.00 0 -3.400 -21.26 -10846 Safetyfactor 1.50 Stress-Strain for ultimate load eps[o/oo] sig-u[MPa] E-t[MPa] Is only valid within the defined 0.000 0.00 17000 stress range -2.000 -17.00 0 -3.500 -17.00 0 Safetyfactor 1.50 Stress-Strain of calc. mean values eps[o/oo] sig-r[MPa] E-t[MPa] Is only valid within the defined 0.000 0.00 27405 stress range -1.050 -12.64 4315 -2.100 -14.45 0 -3.500 -12.96 -1804 Safetyfactor 1.30 No. 11 BSt 500 SA (DIN 1045-1) -------------------------------------------------------------------------------Youngs-modulus 200000 [MPa] Safetyfactor 1.15 [-] Poisson-Ratio 0.30 [-] Yield stress fy 500.00 [MPa] Shear-modulus 76923 [MPa] Compr.yield val. fyc 500.00 [MPa] Compression modulus 166667 [MPa] Tens. strength ft 550.00 [MPa] Weight 78.5 [kN/m3] Compr. strength fc 550.00 [MPa] Weight buoyancy 78.5 [kN/m3] Ultim. plast. strain 25.00 [o/oo]
512
Version 16.13

Temp.elongat.coeff. max. thickness 1.20E-05 [-] 32.00 [mm] relative bond coeff. EC2 bondcoeff. K1 Hardening modulus Proportional limit Dynamic stress range eps[o/oo] sig-m[MPa] 1000.000 550.00 25.000 550.00 2.500 500.00 0.000 0.00 -2.500 -500.00 -25.000 -550.00 -1000.000 -550.00 Safetyfactor eps[o/oo] sig-u[MPa] 1000.000 456.52 25.000 456.52 2.174 434.78 0.000 0.00 -2.174 -434.78 -25.000 -456.52 -1000.000 -456.52 Safetyfactor eps[o/oo] sig-r[MPa] 1000.000 577.50 25.000 577.50 2.750 550.00 0.000 0.00 -2.750 -550.00 -25.000 -577.50 -1000.000 -577.50 Safetyfactor
AQUA
1.00 [-] 0.80 [-] 0.00 [MPa] 500.00 [MPa] 195.00 [MPa] E-t[MPa] 0 2222 200000 200000 2222 0 0 1.15 E-t[MPa] 0 952 200000 200000 952 0 0 ( 1.15) E-t[MPa] 0 1236 200000 200000 1236 0 0 1.30
Stress-Strain for serviceability Is also extended beyond the defined stress range
Stress-Strain for ultimate load Is also extended beyond the defined stress range
Stress-Strain of calc. mean values Is also extended beyond the defined stress range
A listing of the two cross sections follows, since ECHO SECT has been activated with option FULL or EXTR. This section has rotated principal axis, or a non vanishing centrifugal inertia Iyz. It is possible to rotate the section into the principle axis with a definition at SECT, but this is not necessary for the SOFiSTiK analysis software.
Static properties of cross section MNo A[m2] Ay/Az/Ayz Iy/Iz/Iyz MNs It[m4] [m2] [m4] 10 3.8587E-01 1.180E-02 11 1.801E-02 1.571E-02 4.100E-03 ys/zs [cm] -32.24 -35.36 y/z-sc [cm] -29.04 -36.45 modules [MPa] 24914 10381 gam [kN/m] 9.65
Main axis of inertia rotated at -57.75 [] Main moments of inertia 1.8297E-02 9.2113E-03
[m4]
Version 16.13
513
AQUA
Additional static properties of cross section Alfa-T ymin zmin hymin AK MB Tau-T Tau-Vy ymax zmax hzmin AB Tau-B Tau-Vz [cm] [cm] [cm] [m2] [1/m3] [1/m2] 1.0E-05 -42.76 -27.64 2.142E-01 11 1.444E+01 4.007E+00 32.24 35.36 3.859E-01 4.218E+00 Section values for warping Wmin[m2] Wmax[m2] CM[m6] -0.0353 0.0632 0.000
CMS[m4] 0.000
ASwyy[m6] 0.000
ASwzz[m6] 0.000
ry[cm]
rz[cm]
Design values of cross section MNo A[m2] Ay/Az/Ayz Iy/Iz/Iyz MNs It[m4] [m2] [m4] 10 3.8587E-01 1.180E-02 1.801E-02 1.571E-02 4.100E-03 Additional Design Data M periphery-O/-I deff [m2/m] [m2/m] [cm] 2.644 29.19
ys/zs [cm] -32.24 -35.36
gam [kN/m] 9.65
t-min [cm]
t-max SMP [cm] [o/o] 0.0
Reinforcement global values Layer mS mR area lower-A M-pr [cm2] [cm2] [kNm] 0 10 11 190.96 190.96 Polygon Id. E Mat 1 2 3 4 5 6 1 10 10 10 10 10 10 10
upper-A [cm2]
yL [cm] -32.98
zL [cm] -29.92
L-tors [cm]
N-pr [kN]
y [cm] 0.00 -40.00 -55.00 -75.00 -75.00 0.00 0.00
z [cm] 0.00 0.00 -31.50 -31.50 -63.00 -63.00 0.00
1/WMy,Mz [1/m3] 25.1135 -13.9712 34.8444 14.0303 9.1311 16.8678 13.9966 30.8685 -15.3658 23.2054 -33.6114 -29.2974 25.1135 -13.9712
1/WT [1/m3] 0.0000 0.0000 0.0000 0.0000 0.0000 0.0000 0.0000 0.0000 0.0000 0.0000 0.0000 0.0000 0.0000 0.0000
1/WVy [1/m2] 0.0000 0.0000 0.0000 0.0000 0.0000 0.0000 0.0000 0.0000 0.0000 0.0000 0.0000 0.0000 0.0000 0.0000
1/WVz [1/m2] 0.0000 0.0000 0.0000 0.0000 0.0000 0.0000 0.0000 0.0000 0.0000 0.0000 0.0000 0.0000 0.0000 0.0000
W0 [m2]
Air [-] 1.00 1.00 1.00 1.00 1.00 1.00 1.00
514
Version 16.13

Single point reinforcement Id. MNo y[cm] z[cm] T[C] 101 11 -10.50 -10.50 102 11 -32.00 -7.70 103 11 -67.30 -39.20 104 11 -67.30 -52.50 105 11 -10.50 -52.50 Cuts for shear design No Type MNo yb zb beta mue [cm] [cm] 1 WEB 10 -31.00 2 3 4 WEB WEB WEB 10 10 -32.24 10 -55.00 -11.00
AQUA
sig[MPa]
As/As-max[cm2] Lay 55.44 0 36.96 0 24.64 0 36.96 0 36.96 0
Ar[m2]
ye [cm]
ze [cm]
b0 [cm] 16.16 54.76 16.16 45.24 16.16 63.00 16.16 31.50
1/WTM,D [1/m3] 14.4444 0.0000 14.4444 0.0000 14.4444 0.0000 14.4444 0.0000
FVy/z Ns/Ms MRF AsSU [-] [kN/m] R[cm2/m] 1.000 0.00 11 3.87 1.000 0.00 0 90 1.000 0.00 11 3.20 1.000 0.00 0 90 1.000 0.00 11 4.46 1.000 0.00 0 90 1.000 0.00 11 2.23 1.000 0.00 0 90
Stress output locations on shear cuts Txt. MNo y z 1/WT 1/WVy [cm] [cm] [1/m3] [1/m2] 1A 10 -54.76 -31.00 -14.4444 0.3271 1 10 -46.68 -31.00 -14.4444 0.3271 1 10 -8.08 -31.00 14.4444 0.3271 1E 10 0.00 -31.00 14.4444 0.3271 2A 10 -45.24 -11.00 -14.4444 0.0415 2 10 -37.16 -11.00 -14.4444 0.0415 2 10 -8.08 -11.00 14.4444 0.0415 2E 10 0.00 -11.00 14.4444 0.0415 3A 10 -32.24 -63.00 -14.4444 -3.3367 3 10 -32.24 -54.92 -14.4444 -3.3367 3 10 -32.24 -8.08 14.4444 -3.3367 3E 10 -32.24 0.00 14.4444 -3.3367 4A 10 -55.00 -63.00 -14.4444 -4.0073 4 10 -55.00 -54.92 -14.4444 -4.0073 4E 10 -55.00 -31.50 -14.4444 -4.0073
1/WVz [1/m2] 4.2177 4.2177 4.2177 4.2177 2.5983 2.5983 2.5983 2.5983 0.1054 0.1054 0.1054 0.1054 -0.6235 -0.6235 -0.6235
sig-p [MPa] 0.00 0.00 0.00 0.00 0.00 0.00 0.00 0.00 0.00 0.00 0.00 0.00 0.00 0.00 0.00
W0 [m2]
These is surely quite a lot of data. E.g. from the outer periphery the effective thickness deff = 29.19 cm is evaluated to be used for creep and shrinkage analysis. While the evaluation of the area values for normal force and bending moments is a trivial task, the evaluation of the shear from torsion and bending are open to quite a large range of possible solutions. A detailed analysis of the stress according to the theory of elasticity is no longer used nowadays for standard concrete,
Version 16.13
515
AQUA
but may be performed with the option CTRL STYP 3 (eg. for prestressed concrete). The shear resistance values of the polygon points are only assigned by this integral equation method. For solid sections the warping resistance is always preset to 0.0. For the shear design the simple force method with section moduli is used here. But as the width of the tensile zone changes, it is recommended to define more than just one shear cut at the centre of gravity. If you do not specify CUTrecords you will get a warning about this subject. Depending on the forces it might be useful to define inclined shear cuts, but for the biaxial shear design of such a section, the only way to get sound results may be the method of distinct struts in 3D. Also the calculation of a reinforced concrete cross section subjected to torsion is not an easy or single valued task. Shear stressing always means a check of the compressive strength of the concrete by means of principal or shear stress limits as well as a check for the required shear reinforcement. Both values are associated. The old DIN 1045 required the checking of the torsional shear stresses according to the elasticity theory; these can be computed best by the integral equation method (CTRL STYP 2 or 3). By default AQUA always employs the most recent method that uses an equivalent hollow cross section. While a fixed value for the width is specified by DIN 4227, EC2 provides for an upper limit of the width A/U. When the width is reduced, the core cross section is increased leading thus to smaller reinforcement. At the same time, however, the principal compressive stress becomes larger, so that a lower limit is not only set by double the concrete cover but mainly by the principal compressive stress. The new DIN 10451 uses a constant thickness defined by the position of the longitudinal reinforcement.
516
Version 16.13
AQUA
When e.g. a cross section 1x1 m is considered, the following shear stresses are obtained: Theory of elasticity Integral equation method Equivalent cross section by DIN 4227 Equivalent cross section by EC2 4.81 Mt 4.74 Mt 4.61 Mt 3.56 Mt
Although the required link reinforcement for EC2 is higher because of the smaller Ak. Erroneous input (e.g. BMAX 999 in the record CUT or the torsional reinforcement) may generate unreasonable results for Ak. It is therefore essential that these values are always critically checked. In the next step the cross section is modified by setting the reinforcement to be effective totally or partially for torsion with TORS ACTI. Thereby the Bredts box is determined more exact. Although this has no influence on the other results, because the torsional moment of inertia and the shear centre are determined with the integral equation method.
RF 101 102 103 104 105 101 102 103 104 105 101 102 103 104 105 101 102 103 104 105 -0.105 -0.320 -0.673 -0.673 -0.105 -0.105 -0.320 -0.673 -0.673 -0.105 -0.105 -0.320 -0.673 -0.673 -0.105 -0.105 -0.320 -0.435 -0.645 -0.645 -0.105 -0.077 -0.392 -0.525 -0.525 -0.105 -0.077 -0.392 -0.525 -0.525 -0.105 -0.077 -0.392 -0.525 -0.525 -0.105 -0.105 -0.392 -0.392 -0.525 55.44 36.96 24.64 36.96 36.96 55.44 36.96 24.64 36.96 36.96 55.44 36.96 24.64 36.96 36.96 -0.320 -0.435 -0.645 -0.645 -0.105 TORS TORS TORS TORS TORS TORS TORS TORS TORS TORS TORS TORS TORS TORS TORS ACTI ACTI ACTI ACTI ACTI ACTI PASS ACTI ACTI ACTI ACTI ADDI ACTI ACTI ACTI 50.0 50.0 50.0 50.0 50.0 TORS TORS TORS TORS TORS ACTI ACTI ACTI ACTI ACTI Variant I
or RF Variant II
or RF Variant III
or LRF -0.105 -0.392 -0.392 -0.525 -0.525 Variant IV
Version 16.13
517
AQUA
or CURF 2.9 D 12 TORS ACTI

50.0 TORS ACTI Variant V
106 -0.105 -0.525 -0.105 -0.105
The following table compares the important values of the different variants: the area Ak of the Bredts box. (required reinforcements) the torsional stress modulus Wt the effectiveness of the torsional reinforcement Ltors defines the factor to convert Asl=mm2/m to absolute mm2. Var. 0 I II III IV V Ak [m2] 0.2142 0.1959 0.1571 0.1571 0.1500 0.2982 1/Wt [1/m3] 14.4444 13.8979 16.9968 16.9968 17.7926 19.2241 L-Tors [cm] 181.09 217.92 175.74 182.72 241.19
518
Version 16.13

5.5. Polygonal Cross Section with Inner Perimeter.
AQUA
The following cross section (aqua3_bridge.dat) has one inner perimeter as well as ineffective parts; attention must be paid to the sequence of the polygon vertices for the internal ineffective areas. The inner perimeter in the following example was defined explicitly by means of a polygon with the material number 0. For a correct evaluation of the shear sections, with such an input, special care must be given to the planning of the duplicate edges. More variants to define this section may be found in the example (aqua30.dat).
Polygonal cross section Use of the symmetry can be made during the input:
PROG HEAD NORM PAGE ECHO CONC SECT POLY VERT AQUA CROSS-SECTION WITH EFFECTIVE WIDTHS AND RECESSES DIN 1045 UNII 3 UNIO 3 FULL EXTR ; CTRL STYP 0 1 B 25 ; STEE 2 BST 500 11 TITL 'Hollow Cross Section' OPZ 1 3.00 4.00 2 3.50 0.75 3 5.00 0.60 ; 4 7.00 0.40 ; 5 7.00 0.00 6 5.00 0.00 7 0.45 0.00 ; 8 0.00 0.00 OPZ MNO 0 9 0.00 0.50 10 0.45 0.50 11 2.75 0.50 PHI 3 12 2.50 3.50 PHI 4 13 0.00 3.50 PHI 3 TYPE YZ YMIN 6.0 ZMIN 0.0 YMAX 6.0 ZMAX 0.6 WIDT 2.0 TYPE YZ YMIN -6.0 ZMIN 0.0 YMAX -6.0 ZMAX 0.6 WIDT 2.0 TYPE YZ YMIN 0.0 ZMIN 0.0 YMAX 0.0 ZMAX 0.5 WIDT 0.9 1 ZB S
POLY VERT
NEFF NEFF NEFF CUT
Version 16.13
519
AQUA
CUT 2 ZB 0.75 CUT 3 ZB 3.00 CUT 4 YB 2.00 CUT 5 YB 0.00 CUT 11 YB 2.0 4.5 2.0 3.0 11 YB 2.0 3.0 3.5 3.0 CUT 12 YB 1.0 4.5 1.0 3.0 12 YB 1.0 3.0 3.5 3.0 CUT 13 YB 0.0 4.5 0.0 3.0 13 YB 2.0 3.0 2.0 4.5 END
The output of the cross section is as follows:

Cross section No. 11 - Hollow section
Static properties of cross section Mat A[m2] Ay/Az/Ayz Iy/Iz/Iyz NoR It[m4] [m2] [m4] 1 1.4650E+01 3.068E+01 2 2.787E+01 1.675E+02
ys/zs [m] 0.000 1.456
y/z-sc [m] 0.000 1.169
gam [kN/m] 366.25
Additional static properties of cross section Alfa-T ymin zmin hymin AK MB Tau-T Tau-Vy ymax zmax hzmin AB Tau-B Tau-Vz [1/K] [m] [m] [m] [m2] [1/m3] [1/m2] 1.0E-05 -5.000 -1.456 1.598E+01 2 6.258E-02 2.245E-01 5.000 2.544 1.465E+01 2.216E-01 Effective static properties of cross section Mat A[m2] Iy/Iz/Iyz ys/zs modules NoR [m4] [m] [MPa] 1 1.4650E+01 2.678E+01 0.000 30000 2 9.647E+01 1.673 12500 Design values of cross section Mat A[m2] Ay/Az/Ayz Iy/Iz/Iyz NoR It[m4] [m2] [m4] 1 1.4650E+01 3.206E+01 2.787E+01 9.647E+01 Additional Design Data M periphery-O/-I deff [m2/m] [m2/m] [m] 34.41 16.52 0.851
gam [kN/m] 366.25
ys/zs [m] 0.000 1.419
gam [kN/m] 366.25
t-min [m]
t-max SMP [m] [o/o] 0.0
thet-p thet-y [tm2/m] [tm2/m] 495.548 76.693
thet-z [tm2/m] 418.855
520
Version 16.13

Polygon Id. E Mat 1 1' 2' 3' 4' 5' 6' 7' 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 -* -* -* -* -* 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 y [m] 3.000 -3.000 -3.500 -5.000 -7.000 -7.000 -5.000 -0.450 0.000 0.450 5.000 7.000 7.000 5.000 3.500 3.000 z [m] 4.000 4.000 0.750 0.600 0.400 0.000 0.000 0.000 0.000 0.000 0.000 0.000 0.400 0.600 0.750 4.000 1/WMy,Mz [1/m3] 0.0829 -0.0179 0.0829 0.0179 -0.0230 0.0209 -0.0279 0.0298 -0.0344 0.0418 -0.0475 0.0418 -0.0475 0.0298 -0.0475 2.69E-3 -0.0475 0.0000 -0.0475 -2.69E-3 -0.0475 -0.0298 -0.0475 -0.0418 -0.0344 -0.0418 -0.0279 -0.0298 -0.0230 -0.0209 0.0829 -0.0179 1/WT [1/m3] 0.0000 0.0000 0.0000 0.0000 0.0000 0.0000 0.0000 0.0000 0.0000 0.0000 0.0000 0.0000 0.0000 0.0000 0.0000 0.0000 0.0000 0.0000 0.0000 0.0000 0.0000 0.0000 0.0000 0.0000 0.0000 0.0000 0.0000 0.0000 0.0000 0.0000 0.0000 0.0000 1/WVy [1/m2] 0.0000 0.0000 0.0000 0.0000 0.0000 0.0000 0.0000 0.0000 0.0000 0.0000 0.0000 0.0000 0.0000 0.0000 0.0000 0.0000 0.0000 0.0000 0.0000 0.0000 0.0000 0.0000 0.0000 0.0000 0.0000 0.0000 0.0000 0.0000 0.0000 0.0000 0.0000 0.0000 1/WVz [1/m2] 0.0000 0.0000 0.0000 0.0000 0.0000 0.0000 0.0000 0.0000 0.0000 0.0000 0.0000 0.0000 0.0000 0.0000 0.0000 0.0000 0.0000 0.0000 0.0000 0.0000 0.0000 0.0000 0.0000 0.0000 0.0000 0.0000 0.0000 0.0000 0.0000 0.0000 0.0000 0.0000
AQUA
W0 exp [m2] [-] 1.00 1.00 1.00 1.00 1.00 1.00 1.00 1.00 1.00 1.00 1.00 1.00 1.00 1.00 1.00 1.00
Polygon hole Id. E Mat 9 10' -* 1 1 1 1 11' 1
y [m] 0.000 -0.450 -1.217 -1.983 -2.750
z [m] 0.500 0.500 0.500 0.500 0.500
1/WMy,Mz [1/m3] -0.0312 0.0000 -0.0312 2.69E-3 -0.0312 7.26E-3 -0.0312 0.0118 -0.0312
1/WT [1/m3] 0.0000 0.0000 0.0000 0.0000 0.0000 0.0000 0.0000 0.0000 0.0000
1/WVy [1/m2] 0.0000 0.0000 0.0000 0.0000 0.0000 0.0000 0.0000 0.0000 0.0000
1/WVz [1/m2] 0.0000 0.0000 0.0000 0.0000 0.0000 0.0000 0.0000 0.0000 0.0000
W0 exp [m2] [-] 0.00 0.00 0.00 0.00 0.00
Version 16.13
521
AQUA
1 1 1 12' 1 1 1 13 1 1 1 12 1 1 1 1 11 1 1 1 10 9 -* 1 1 -2.688 -2.625 -2.562 -2.500 -1.667 -0.833 0.000 0.833 1.667 2.500 2.562 2.625 2.688 2.750 1.983 1.217 0.450 0.000 1.250 2.000 2.750 3.500 3.500 3.500 3.500 3.500 3.500 3.500 2.750 2.000 1.250 0.500 0.500 0.500 0.500 0.500 0.0164 -6.71E-3 0.0160 0.0177 0.0157 0.0422 0.0153 0.0666 0.0149 0.0666 9.95E-3 0.0666 4.97E-3 0.0666 0.0000 0.0666 -4.97E-3 0.0666 -9.95E-3 0.0666 -0.0149 0.0422 -0.0153 0.0177 -0.0157 -6.71E-3 -0.0160 -0.0312 -0.0164 -0.0312 -0.0118 -0.0312 -7.26E-3 -0.0312 -2.69E-3 -0.0312 0.0000

0.0000 0.0000 0.0000 0.0000 0.0000 0.0000 0.0000 0.0000 0.0000 0.0000 0.0000 0.0000 0.0000 0.0000 0.0000 0.0000 0.0000 0.0000 0.0000 0.0000 0.0000 0.0000 0.0000 0.0000 0.0000 0.0000 0.0000 0.0000 0.0000 0.0000 0.0000 0.0000 0.0000 0.0000 0.0000 0.0000 0.0000 0.0000 0.0000 0.0000 0.0000 0.0000 0.0000 0.0000 0.0000 0.0000 0.0000 0.0000 0.0000 0.0000 0.0000 0.0000 0.0000 0.0000 0.0000 0.0000 0.0000 0.0000 0.0000 0.0000 0.0000 0.0000 0.0000 0.0000 0.0000 0.0000 0.0000 0.0000 0.0000 0.0000 0.0000 0.0000 0.0000 0.0000 0.0000 0.0000 0.0000 0.0000 0.0000 0.0000 0.0000 0.0000 0.0000 0.0000 0.0000 0.0000 0.0000 0.0000 0.0000 0.0000 0.0000 0.0000 0.0000 0.0000 0.0000 0.0000 0.0000 0.0000 0.0000 0.0000 0.0000 0.0000 0.0000 0.0000 0.0000 0.0000 0.0000 0.0000 0.0000 0.0000 0.0000 0.00 0.00 0.00 0.00 0.00 0.00 0.00 0.00 0.00 0.00 0.00 0.00 0.00 0.00 0.00 0.00 0.00 0.00
Polygon Id. E Mat 9 10 0 0 0 0
y [m] 0.000 0.450 1.217 1.983
z [m] 0.500 0.500 0.500 0.500
1/WMy,Mz [1/m3]
1/WT [1/m3] 0.0000 0.0000 0.0000 0.0000 0.0000 0.0000 0.0000
1/WVy [1/m2] 0.0000 0.0000 0.0000 0.0000 0.0000 0.0000 0.0000
1/WVz [1/m2] 0.0000 0.0000 0.0000 0.0000 0.0000 0.0000 0.0000
W0 exp [m2] [-] 0.00 0.00 0.00 0.00
522
Version 16.13

11 0 0 0 0 12 0 0 0 13 0 0 0 12' 0 0 0 0 11' 0 0 0 10' 9' 0 0 2.750 2.688 2.625 2.562 2.500 1.667 0.833 0.000 -0.833 -1.667 -2.500 -2.562 -2.625 -2.688 -2.750 -1.983 -1.217 -0.450 0.000 0.500 1.250 2.000 2.750 3.500 3.500 3.500 3.500 3.500 3.500 3.500 2.750 2.000 1.250 0.500 0.500 0.500 0.500 0.500 0.0000 0.0000 0.0000 0.0000 0.0000 0.0000 0.0000 0.0000 0.0000 0.0000 0.0000 0.0000 0.0000 0.0000 0.0000 0.0000 0.0000 0.0000 0.0000 0.0000 0.0000 0.0000 0.0000 0.0000 0.0000 0.0000 0.0000 0.0000 0.0000 0.0000 0.0000 0.0000 0.0000 0.0000 0.0000 0.0000 0.0000 0.0000 0.0000 0.0000 0.0000 0.0000 0.0000 0.0000 0.0000 0.0000 0.0000 0.0000 0.0000 0.0000 0.0000 0.0000 0.0000 0.0000 0.0000 0.0000 0.0000 0.0000 0.0000 0.0000 0.0000 0.0000 0.0000 0.0000 0.0000 0.0000 0.0000 0.0000 0.0000 0.0000 0.0000 0.0000 0.0000 0.0000 0.0000 0.0000 0.0000 0.0000 0.0000 0.0000 0.0000 0.0000 0.0000 0.0000 0.0000 0.0000 0.0000 0.0000 0.0000 0.0000 0.0000 0.0000 0.0000 0.0000 0.0000 0.0000 0.0000 0.0000 0.0000 0.0000 0.0000 0.0000 0.0000 0.0000 0.0000 0.0000 0.0000 0.0000 0.0000 0.0000 0.0000 0.0000 0.0000 0.0000 0.0000 0.0000 0.0000
AQUA
0.00 0.00 0.00 0.00 0.00 0.00 0.00 0.00 0.00 0.00 0.00 0.00 0.00 0.00 0.00 0.00 0.00 0.00 0.00
Cuts for shear design No Type MNo yb zb c mue [m] [m] 1 WEB 1 1.673 2 3 WEB WEB 1 1 0.750 3.000
ye [m]
ze [m]
b0 [m] 1.412 1.412 1.542 1.542 1.224
1/WTM,D [1/m3] 0.0443 0.0000 0.0406 0.0000 0.0511
FVy/z [-] 1.000 1.000 1.000 1.000 1.000
Ns/Ms MRF AsSU [kN/m] R [cm2/m] 0.00 2 0.00 1 90 0.00 2 0.00 1 90 0.00 2
Version 16.13
523
AQUA
4 5 11 11 12 12 13 13 WEB WEB WEB WEB WEB WEB WEB WEB 1 2.000 1 0.000 1 2.000 4.500 2.000 3.000 1 2.000 3.000 3.500 3.000 1 1.000 4.500 1.000 3.000 1 1.000 3.000 3.500 3.000 1 0.000 4.500 0.000 3.000 1 2.000 3.000 2.000 4.500

1.224 1.000 1.000 1.000 1.000 0.500 0.500 0.612 0.612 0.500 0.500 0.612 0.612 0.500 0.500 0.500 0.500 0.0000 0.0626 0.0000 0.0626 0.0000 0.0626 0.0000 0.0511 0.0000 0.0626 0.0000 0.0511 0.0000 0.0626 0.0000 0.0626 0.0000 1.000 1.000 1.000 1.000 1.000 0.450 0.450 0.550 0.550 0.450 0.450 0.550 0.550 0.500 0.500 0.500 0.500 0.00 0.00 0.00 0.00 0.00 0.00 0.00 0.00 0.00 0.00 0.00 0.00 0.00 0.00 0.00 0.00 0.00 1 2 1 2 1 2 1 2 1 2 1 2 1 2 1 2 1 90 90 90 90 90 90 90 90 90
Construction and Selected Result Txt. M y z 1/WMy,Mz [m] [m] [1/m3] BOL 1 3.000 4.000 0.0829 -0.0179 BOR 1 -3.000 4.000 0.0829 0.0179 TOL 1 7.000 0.000 -0.0475 -0.0418 TOR 1 -7.000 0.000 -0.0475 0.0418 Stress output locations on Txt. MNo y z [m] [m] 1A 1 -3.358 1.673 1 1 -3.005 1.673 1E 1 -2.652 1.673 1A 1 2.652 1.673 1 1 3.005 1.673 1E 1 3.358 1.673 2A 1 -3.500 0.750 2 1 -3.115 0.750 2E 1 -2.729 0.750 2A 1 2.729 0.750 2 1 3.115 0.750 2E 1 3.500 0.750 3A 1 -3.154 3.000 3 1 -2.848 3.000 3E 1 -2.542 3.000
Points 1/WT [1/m3] 0.0000 0.0000 0.0000 0.0000 0.0000 0.0000 0.0000 0.0000
1/WVy [1/m2] 0.0000 0.0000 0.0000 0.0000 0.0000 0.0000 0.0000 0.0000
1/WVz [1/m2] 0.0000 0.0000 0.0000 0.0000 0.0000 0.0000 0.0000 0.0000
sig-p [MPa] 0.00 0.00 0.00 0.00
W0 sig/tau-d [m2] [MPa]
shear cuts 1/WT 1/WVy [1/m3] [1/m2] -0.0443 2.92E-9 -0.0443 2.92E-9 -0.0443 2.92E-9 0.0443 2.92E-9 0.0443 2.92E-9 0.0443 2.92E-9 -0.0406 9.62E-9 -0.0406 9.62E-9 -0.0406 9.62E-9 0.0406 9.62E-9 0.0406 9.62E-9 0.0406 9.62E-9 -0.0511 8.07E-9 -0.0511 8.07E-9 -0.0511 8.07E-9
1/WVz [1/m2] 0.2216 0.2216 0.2216 0.2216 0.2216 0.2216 0.1875 0.1875 0.1875 0.1875 0.1875 0.1875 0.2210 0.2210 0.2210
sig-p [MPa] 0.00 0.00 0.00 0.00 0.00 0.00 0.00 0.00 0.00 0.00 0.00 0.00 0.00 0.00 0.00
W0 [m2]
524
Version 16.13

3A 3 3E 4A 4 4E 4A 4 4E 5A 5 5E 5A 5 5E 11A 11 11E 11A 11 11E 12A 12 12E 12A 12 12E 13A 13 13E 13A 13 13E 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 2.542 2.848 3.154 2.000 2.000 2.000 2.000 2.000 2.000 0.000 0.000 0.000 0.000 0.000 0.000 2.000 2.000 2.000 2.542 2.848 3.154 1.000 1.000 1.000 2.542 2.848 3.154 0.000 0.000 0.000 2.000 2.000 2.000 3.000 3.000 3.000 0.000 0.250 0.500 3.500 3.750 4.000 0.000 0.250 0.500 3.500 3.750 4.000 4.000 3.750 3.500 3.000 3.000 3.000 4.000 3.750 3.500 3.000 3.000 3.000 4.000 3.750 3.500 3.500 3.750 4.000 0.0511 0.0511 0.0511 -0.0626 -0.0626 -0.0626 0.0626 0.0626 0.0626 -0.0626 -0.0626 -0.0626 0.0626 0.0626 0.0626 -0.0626 -0.0626 -0.0626 0.0511 0.0511 0.0511 -0.0626 -0.0626 -0.0626 0.0511 0.0511 0.0511 -0.0626 -0.0626 -0.0626 0.0626 0.0626 0.0626 8.07E-9 8.07E-9 8.07E-9 -0.2038 -0.2038 -0.2038 -0.2038 -0.2038 -0.2038 -0.2245 -0.2245 -0.2245 -0.2245 -0.2245 -0.2245 0.0200 0.0200 0.0200 0.0200 0.0200 0.0200 0.0270 0.0270 0.0270 0.0270 0.0270 0.0270 0.0104 0.0104 0.0104 0.0104 0.0104 0.0104 0.2210 0.2210 0.2210 -0.0349 -0.0349 -0.0349 -0.0349 -0.0349 -0.0349 -0.0593 -0.0593 -0.0593 -0.0593 -0.0593 -0.0593 0.0519 0.0519 0.0519 0.0519 0.0519 0.0519 0.0868 0.0868 0.0868 0.0868 0.0868 0.0868 0.0776 0.0776 0.0776 0.0776 0.0776 0.0776 0.00 0.00 0.00 0.00 0.00 0.00 0.00 0.00 0.00 0.00 0.00 0.00 0.00 0.00 0.00 0.00 0.00 0.00 0.00 0.00 0.00 0.00 0.00 0.00 0.00 0.00 0.00 0.00 0.00 0.00 0.00 0.00 0.00
AQUA
Section 11 deserves special attention. It consists of two parts. AQUA distributes the shear on these parts in proportion to the section widths by 0.45 and 0.55 (VYFK or VZFK). In section 3, at the same location, one obtains the value 0.214 of the shear stress due to Vz. Section 11, however, gives only 0.0505!. This happens because the separated part is statically indeterminate. There is an additional shear flow going through this section. This problem can be corrected very easily by a second input. Since the true value is known, one can modify the factors VZFK, which are computed for the second section by:
Version 16.13
525
AQUA
VZFK = 0.45 0.214 / 0.0505 = 1.907 Since the sum of all VZFK must be 1.0, the value 0.907 results for the vertical section. The following modified input is obtained:
CUT 11 YA 2.0 4.5 2.0 3.0 VZFK -0.907 11 YA 2.0 3.0 3.5 3.0 VZFK 1.907
If one would have made the cut along the symmetry axis of the cross section, then one could have set the one shear flow to 0.0 and one could have directly input the following:
CUT 11 YA 0.0 4.5 0.0 3.0 VZFK 0.000 11 YA 0.0 3.0 3.5 3.0 VZFK 1.000
Obtaining a known value for VYFK is somewhat more difficult. For this task one can either employ the integral equation method (STYP 3) or an equivalent thin walled cross section. However, this scaling method though fails in state II, if the separated cross section part contains no reinforcement. As a further reasonable option the cross section is now additionally calculated with the integral equation method. Therefore the input is expanded with the record
CTRL STYP 3 ; ECHO IEQ
With this input one receives some slightly different cross section values and shear stresses:
Cross section No. 11 - Hollow section
Static properties of cross section Mat A[m2] Ay/Az/Ayz Iy/Iz/Iyz NoR It[m4] [m2] [m4] 1 1.4650E+01 8.947E+00 3.068E+01 2 5.492E+01 3.804E+00 1.675E+02
ys/zs [m] 0.000 1.456
y/z-sc [m] 0.000 1.891
gam [kN/m] 366.25
Additional static properties of cross section Alfa-T ymin zmin hymin AK MB Tau-T Tau-Vy ymax zmax hzmin AB Tau-B Tau-Vz [1/K] [m] [m] [m] [m2] [1/m3] [1/m2] 1.0E-05 -5.000 -1.456 1.598E+01 2 5.594E-02 1.449E-01 5.000 2.544 1.465E+01 2.319E-01
526
Version 16.13

Section values for warping Wmin[m2] Wmax[m2] CM[m6] -4.104 4.101 0.000 CMS[m4] 0.000 ASwyy[m6] -0.025 ASwzz[m6] -0.004
AQUA
ry[m] 0.001 rz[m] -3.435
Effective static properties of cross section Mat A[m2] Iy/Iz/Iyz ys/zs modules NoR [m4] [m] [MPa] 1 1.4650E+01 2.678E+01 0.000 30000 2 9.647E+01 1.673 12500 Design values of cross section Mat A[m2] Ay/Az/Ayz Iy/Iz/Iyz NoR It[m4] [m2] [m4] 1 1.4650E+01 8.947E+00 3.206E+01 5.492E+01 3.804E+00 9.647E+01 Additional Design Data M periphery-O/-I deff [m2/m] [m2/m] [m] 34.41 16.52 0.851
gam [kN/m] 366.25
ys/zs [m] 0.000 1.419
gam [kN/m] 366.25
t-min [m]
t-max SMP [m] [o/o] 0.0
thet-p thet-y [tm2/m] [tm2/m] 495.548 76.693
thet-z [tm2/m] 418.855
Reinforcement global values Layer mS mR area lower-A [cm2] [cm2] Z1 1 2 55.00 0.00 Z2 1 2 55.00 0.00 Polygon Id. E Mat 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1' . . . 1
upper-A [cm2]
yL [m] 0.000 0.000
zL [m] 3.750 3.750
L-tors [m]
N-pr [MN]
M-pr [MNm]
y [m] 3.000 2.000 1.000 0.000 -1.000 -2.000 -3.000
z [m] 4.000 4.000 4.000 4.000 4.000 4.000 4.000
1/WMy,Mz [1/m3] 0.0829 -0.0179 0.0829 -0.0119 0.0829 -5.97E-3 0.0829 0.0000 0.0829 5.97E-3 0.0829 0.0119 0.0829 0.0179
1/WT 1/WVy 1/WVz W0 [1/m3] [1/m2] [1/m2] [m2] -0.0126 0.0126 -0.0277 -1.988 0.0121 -0.0131 0.0288 -0.0551 0.0999 -0.1453 -1.927 0.0000 0.0000 0.0000 -0.0559 0.1106 -0.0747 -0.966 0.0000 0.0000 0.0000 -0.0559 0.1136 1.06E-4-2.71E-3 0.0000 0.0000 0.0000 -0.0559 0.1106 0.0749 0.961 0.0000 0.0000 0.0000 -0.0551 0.0999 0.1455 1.921 0.0000 0.0000 0.0000 -0.0126 0.0126 0.0281 1.982 -0.0121 0.0131 0.0284
exp [-] 1.00 1.00 1.00 1.00 1.00 1.00 1.00
First you can see that the torsional moment of inertia is definitely bigger and the shear centre lies now below the centre of gravity. For an open cross section one
Version 16.13
527
AQUA
would expect a displacement to the side of the main web, thus to the top, but for this cross section the structural behaviour for torsion is mainly affected by the closed box. Therefore the shear centre must be in the middle of the box. In the result one also receives shear stresses at all polygonal points. A very important point is that the integral equation method calculates more detailed shear stress distributions, which leads to higher stresses at reentrant corners of the section. There are more details about this effect within the dataset.
Cuts for shear design No Type MNo yb zb c mue [m] [m] 1 WEB 1 1.673 2 3 4 5 11 11 12 12 13 13 WEB WEB WEB WEB WEB WEB WEB WEB WEB WEB 1 1 1 2.000 1 0.000 1 2.000 4.500 2.000 3.000 1 2.000 3.000 3.500 3.000 1 1.000 4.500 1.000 3.000 1 1.000 3.000 3.500 3.000 1 0.000 4.500 0.000 3.000 1 2.000 3.000 2.000 4.500 0.750 3.000 ye [m] ze [m] b0 [m] 1.412 1.412 1.542 1.542 1.224 1.224 1.000 1.000 1.000 1.000 0.500 0.500 0.612 0.612 0.500 0.500 0.612 0.612 0.500 0.500 0.500 0.500 1/WTM,D [1/m3] -0.0330 -0.0129 -0.0275 -6.37E-3 -0.0380 -0.0100 -0.0467 -9.06E-3 0.0468 9.11E-3 -0.0471 -7.95E-3 0.0380 0.0100 -0.0469 -9.06E-3 0.0380 0.0100 -0.0468 -9.11E-3 0.0471 7.95E-3 FVy/z [-] 1.000 1.000 0.000 1.000 1.000 1.000 -1.000 1.000 -1.000 -1.000 3.811 -1.302 -2.811 2.302 3.076 -0.408 -2.076 1.408 9.157 0.001 -8.157 0.999 Ns/Ms MRF AsSU [kN/m] R [cm2/m] 0.00 2 0.00 1 90 0.00 2 0.00 1 90 0.00 2 0.00 1 90 0.00 2 0.00 1 90 0.00 2 0.00 1 90 0.00 2 0.00 1 90 0.00 2 0.00 1 90 0.00 2 0.00 1 90 0.00 2 0.00 1 90 0.00 2 0.00 1 90 0.00 2 0.00 1 90
Stress output locations on Txt. MNo y z [m] [m] 1A 1 -3.358 1.673 1 1 -3.005 1.673 1E 1 -2.652 1.673 1A 1 2.652 1.673 1 1 3.005 1.673 1E 1 3.358 1.673 2A 1 -3.500 0.750 2 1 -3.115 0.750 2E 1 -2.729 0.750
shear cuts 1/WT 1/WVy [1/m3] [1/m2] -0.0459 0.0339 -0.0330 0.0321 -0.0214 0.0359 0.0214 -0.0359 0.0330 -0.0321 0.0459 -0.0339 -0.0237 0.0314 -0.0275 5.12E-3 -0.0339 -0.0546
1/WVz [1/m2] 0.2218 0.2204 0.2243 0.2244 0.2205 0.2219 0.1314 0.1736 0.2318
sig-p [MPa] 0.00 0.00 0.00 0.00 0.00 0.00 0.00 0.00 0.00
W0 [m2] -0.212 -0.400 -0.536 0.530 0.396 0.209 -0.916 -1.544 -1.914
528
Version 16.13

2A 2 2E 3A 3 3E 3A 3 3E 4A 4 4E 4A 4 4E 5A 5 5E 5A 5 5E 11A 11 11E 11A 11 11E 12A 12 12E 12A 12 12E 13A 13 13E 13A 13 13E 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 2.729 3.115 3.500 -3.154 -2.848 -2.542 2.542 2.848 3.154 2.000 2.000 2.000 2.000 2.000 2.000 0.000 0.000 0.000 0.000 0.000 0.000 2.000 2.000 2.000 2.542 2.848 3.154 1.000 1.000 1.000 2.542 2.848 3.154 0.000 0.000 0.000 2.000 2.000 2.000 0.750 0.750 0.750 3.000 3.000 3.000 3.000 3.000 3.000 0.000 0.250 0.500 3.500 3.750 4.000 0.000 0.250 0.500 3.500 3.750 4.000 4.000 3.750 3.500 3.000 3.000 3.000 4.000 3.750 3.500 3.000 3.000 3.000 4.000 3.750 3.500 3.500 3.750 4.000 0.0339 0.0275 0.0237 -0.0481 -0.0380 -0.0254 0.0254 0.0380 0.0481 -0.0558 -0.0467 -0.0361 0.0361 0.0471 0.0551 -0.0558 -0.0467 -0.0375 0.0377 0.0468 0.0559 -0.0551 -0.0471 -0.0361 0.0254 0.0380 0.0481 -0.0559 -0.0469 -0.0377 0.0254 0.0380 0.0481 -0.0559 -0.0468 -0.0377 0.0361 0.0471 0.0551 0.0546 -5.12E-3 -0.0314 0.0595 0.0621 0.0580 -0.0580 -0.0621 -0.0595 -0.1328 -0.1328 -0.1285 -0.0978 -0.1023 -0.0999 -0.1449 -0.1449 -0.1449 -0.1136 -0.1136 -0.1136 0.0999 0.1023 0.0978 -0.0580 -0.0621 -0.0595 0.1106 0.1106 0.1105 -0.0580 -0.0621 -0.0595 0.1136 0.1136 0.1136 -0.0978 -0.1023 -0.0999 0.2319 0.1737 0.1314 0.2113 0.2138 0.2039 0.2040 0.2139 0.2115 -0.0826 -0.0784 -0.0788 0.1313 0.1509 0.1453 -4.73E-5 -4.64E-5 -4.64E-5 -9.41E-5 -9.41E-5 -1.06E-4 -0.1453 -0.1509 -0.1313 0.2040 0.2139 0.2115 -0.0747 -0.0748 -0.0775 0.2040 0.2139 0.2115 1.06E-4 9.41E-5 9.41E-5 0.1313 0.1509 0.1453 0.00 0.00 0.00 0.00 0.00 0.00 0.00 0.00 0.00 0.00 0.00 0.00 0.00 0.00 0.00 0.00 0.00 0.00 0.00 0.00 0.00 0.00 0.00 0.00 0.00 0.00 0.00 0.00 0.00 0.00 0.00 0.00 0.00 0.00 0.00 0.00 0.00 0.00 0.00
AQUA
1.909 1.541 0.914 0.706 0.933 1.225 -1.233 -0.938 -0.711 2.356 1.856 1.356 -0.904 -1.430 -1.927 -1.06E-3 -1.16E-3 -2.81E-3 -4.05E-3 -2.61E-3 -2.71E-3 -1.927 -1.430 -0.904 -1.233 -0.938 -0.711 -0.966 -0.716 -0.467 -1.233 -0.938 -0.711 -2.71E-3 -2.61E-3 -4.05E-3 -0.904 -1.430 -1.927
Version 16.13
529
AQUA

Polygonal Cross Section with Interpolation
5.6.
In this example (aqua31_bridge.dat) a similar bridge section is presented, defined via the referencetemplate with a lot of methods for interpolation for the transverse inclination and the elevation.
The definition of the section describes all coordinates with reference to three distinct points uppermiddle, upperright and lower middle:
PROG AQUA HEAD CROSS SECTION WITH EFFECTIVE WIDTH AND RECESSES HEAD TEMPLATES FOR INTERPOLATION AND INCLINED TOP DECK NORM DIN 1045 PAGE UNII 3 UNIO 3 ECHO FULL EXTR ; CTRL STYP 0 CONC 1 B 25 ; STEE 2 BST 500 $ LET#PAR 0,1,2 LOOP#1 2 $ 2nd Section needed for Interpolation SECT 11+#1 TITL 'Hollow section' $ LET#PAR(0) 4.00-0.70*#1 $ Total height LET#PAR(1) 3.60+0.80*#1 $ upper width of box LET#PAR(2) 3.50+0.80*#1 $ lower width of box $ SPT OM 0.00 0.00 MNO 0 REFS AXIS $ MAIN AXIS SPT UM 0.00 #par(0) MNO 0 REFS A_UM $ LOWER MIDDLE $ SPT OR #par(1) 0.00 MNO 0 REFP OM INCR $ UPPER RIGHT SPT OL -#par(1) 0.00 MNO 0 REFP OM INCL $ UPPER LEFT SPT UR #par(2) 0.00 MNO 0 REFP UM $ LOWER RIGHT
530
Version 16.13

SPT SPT UL -#par(2) 0.00 UX 0.00 -0.22 MNO 0 MNO 0 REFP UM REFP UM $ LOWER LEFT $ LOWER CENTRE
AQUA
$ POLY O VERT 11 0.00 0.00 REFP UR 12 0.90 0.00 REFP OR +UR 13 5.50 0.60 REFP OM +OR 14 7.50 0.40 REFP OM +OR 15 7.50 0.00 REFP OM +OR 16 5.50 0.00 REFP OM +OR 17 0.45 0.00 REFP OM ~OR 18 0.00 0.00 REFP OM ~OR 19 0.45 0.00 REFP OM ~OL 20 5.50 0.00 REFP OM +OL 21 7.50 0.00 REFP OM +OL 22 7.50 -.40 REFP OM +OL 23 5.50 -.60 REFP OM +OL 24 0.90 0.00 REFP OL +UL 25 0.00 0.00 REFP UL $ POLY O MNO 0 VERT A1 0.00 0.50 REFP OM ~OR A2 0.45 0.50 REFP OM ~OR A3 2.75 0.50 REFP OM +OR A4 2.50 -.50 REFP UM A5 -2.50 -.50 REFP UM A6 2.75 -.50 REFP OM +OL A7 0.45 -.50 REFP OM ~OL A8 0.00 -.50 REFP OM ~OL $ CIRC 100 0.0 -0.3 REFP UM REFR UX CIRC 101 +1.0 -0.3 -0.1 REFP UM CIRC 102 -1.0 -0.3 -0.1 REFP UM $ NEFF TYPE YZ YMIN 6.5 ZMIN -1.0 YMAX 6.5 ZMAX 1.0 WIDT 2.0 REFI OM RFDI +OR NEFF TYPE YZ YMIN -6.5 ZMIN -1.0 YMAX -6.5 ZMAX 1.0 WIDT 2.0 REFI OM RFDI -OL NEFF TYPE YZ YMIN 0.0 ZMIN -1.0 YMAX 0.0 ZMAX 1.0 WIDT 0.9 REFI OM RFDI ~OR $ RF p1 Y -0.25 -0.25 REFP 11 AS 12.0 LAY 1 TORS ACTI RF p2 Y +0.25 -0.25 REFP 25 AS 12.0 LAY 1 TORS ACTI $ LRF 1 YB -0.10 -0.15 REFA 11 $$ YE +0.10 -0.15 REFE 25 AS 1.0 LAY 1 TORS ACTI LRF 2 YB -0.10 +0.12 REFA 16 $$ YE +0.10 -0.12 REFE OR -OM AS 1.0 LAY 2 TORS PASS LRF 2 YB +0.10 -0.12 REFA OR -OM $$ YE +0.55 +0.12 REFE OM -OR AS 1.0 LAY 2 TORS ACTI LRF 2 YB +0.55 -0.12 REFA OM -OL $$
Version 16.13
531
AQUA

2 TORS ACTI 2 TORS PASS 3 4
YE +0.10 +0.12 REFE OL -OM AS 1.0 LAY LRF 2 YB +0.10 +0.12 REFA OL -OM $$ YE +0.10 +0.12 REFE 20 AS 1.0 LAY LRF 3 YB -0.10 -0.15 REFA 11 $$ YE +0.10 -0.12 REFE OR -OM AS 1.0 LAY LRF 4 YB +0.10 -0.15 REFA 25 $$ YE +0.10 +0.12 REFE OL -OM AS 1.0 LAY $ CRF 100 0.0 -0.3 0.12 REFP UM AS 1.13 CRF 101 +1.0 -0.3 0.12 REFP UM AS 1.13 CRF 102 -1.0 -0.3 0.12 REFP UM AS 1.13 $ CUT 1 ZB S CUT 2 REFA 24 REFE 12 CUT 3 ZB 3.00 CUT 4 YB 2.00 CUT 5 YB 0.00 CUT 11 YB 2.0 0.5 2.0 -1.0 REFA UM REFE UM 11 YB 2.0 -1.0 1.0 -1.0 REFA UM REFE UR CUT 12 YB 1.0 0.5 1.0 -1.0 REFA UM REFE UM 12 YB 1.0 -1.0 1.0 -1.0 REFA UM REFE UR CUT 13 YB 0.0 0.5 0.0 -1.0 REFA UM REFE UM 13 YB 0.0 -1.0 1.0 -1.0 REFA UM REFE UR $ WPAR 0 TRAF 2.500 WPAR 1 ICE 0.200 WPAR 2 ZMAX 5.200 $ ENDLOOP
Then one may create other sections via linear interpolation:

$ INTERPOLATION WITH FACTOR INTE 13 11 12 0.5
532
Version 16.13
AQUA
Or one may generate for a general curved structure all sections defined by three reference lines:
PROG SOFIMSHC HEAD AXIS IN PLAN VIEW AND ELEVATION HEAD 3D EXTRUSION WITH INCLINATION AND CHANGE OF WIDTH SYST SPAC GDIR POSZ GDIV 1000 GAX 'AXIS' TYPE AXIS GAXA S 0.0 X 0.00 SX 1.0 L 80.0 RA 75 GAXP S 0.0 ALF 10 INCR -0.02 +0.02 GAXP S 80.0 ALF 0 INCR +0.04 -0.02 GAX 'A_OR' TYPE BGEO GAXA 0.0 Y 3.60 SX 1.0 L 80.0 RA 71 GAX 'A_UM' TYPE BGEO GAXA 0.0 SX 1.0 L 80.0 RA 75 GAXH 0.0 -8.0 40.0 -5.0 R 1600 80.0 -4.0 $ SPT 100 0.0 0.00 0.00 ; 110 65.00 37.50 0.00 SLN 100 100 110 REF AXIS GRP 1 'B' 11 TITL 'CENTER-LINE' CTRL MESH 1 ; CTRL HMIN 10.0 ; CTRL LSUP 1 END PROG AQUA HEAD INTERPOLATE ALL SECTIONS ECHO SECT INTE 0 NREF 100 END
Version 16.13
533
AQUA
5.7.

Thinwalled Steel Box.
A twincell nonsymmetric box with different plate thickness is examined now (aqua4_thinwalled.dat):
Thinwalled steel box The input is as follows:

PROG HEAD NORM PAGE STEE SECT PLAT AQUA THIN-WALLED STEEL BOX DIN 18800 UNII 2 ; ECHO SECT EXTR 1 S 235 1 101 -160 000 000 000 16 OUT E $ UPPER FLANGE PLATES 102 000 = 160 = = 103 160 = 560 = = OUT A 104 560 = 610 = = PLAT 202 000 350 160 350 16 $ LOWER FLANGE PLATES 203 160 = 560 = = OUT A PLAT 301 000 000 000 350 20 OUT M $ WEB PLATES 302 160 = 160 = 15 OUT M 303 560 = 560 = 10 OUT M SPT ABOV 280 000 CDYN B4W0 WEB 160 170 CDYN 201.9 BELO 280 350 CDYN B4W0 99.9 DS-1 280 350 CDYN WI DS-2 280 350 CDYN WII DS-3 280 350 CDYN WIII DS-4 280 350 CDYN KIII
534
Version 16.13

EN END 280 350 SIGC 71 71/sqr(3)
AQUA
All the cross section properties are always calculated for this cross section type. CTRL STYP does not have any effect here. In the table of the cross section properties one can now also find the warping resistance and the warping shear resistance, the shear deformation area, as well as the coordinates of the shear centre, which differ to those of the centre of gravity. The torsional moment of inertia of 125895.7 cm4 , amounts to 52 percent of the polar moment of inertia. The shear areas are approximately one third of the cross sectional area. The table of additional cross section properties includes the maximum shear stresses due to unit internal forces. Unit warping and shear stresses are shown for the panel elements.
Cross section No. 1
Static properties of cross section MNo A[cm2] Ay/Az/Ayz Iy/Iz/Iyz MNs It[cm4] [cm2] [cm4] 1 370.30 175.23 80314.5 125895.7 128.07 163761.3 -2798.57 8225.5
ys/zs [mm] 218.2 159.1
y/z-sc [mm] 192.6 171.5
modules [N/mm2] 210000 81000
gam [kN/m] 2.91
Main axis of inertia rotated at -84.42 [] Main moments of inertia 1.6456E+05 7.9511E+04
[cm4]
Additional static properties of cross section Alfa-T ymin zmin hymin AK MB Tau-T Tau-Vy ymax zmax hzmin AB Tau-B Tau-Vz [mm] [mm] [mm] [cm2] [1/m3] [1/m2] 1.2E-05 -378.2 -167.1 1.900E+03 2.661E+02 6.914E+01 391.8 198.9 1.456E+03 8.798E+01 Section values for warping Wmin[cm2] Wmax[cm2] CM[cm6] -80.24 194.23 800381.94
CMS[cm4] ASwyy[cm6] ASwzz[cm6] 5487.6 2073258.62 228479.17
ry[mm]
rz[mm]
Design values of cross section MNo A[cm2] Ay/Az/Ayz Iy/Iz/Iyz MNs It[cm4] [cm2] [cm4] 1 370.30 175.23 80314.5 125895.7 128.07 163761.3 8225.5
ys/zs [mm] 218.2 159.1
modules [N/mm2] 190909 73636
gam [kN/m] 2.91
Version 16.13
535
AQUA

D=plast.Design, F=elast. Design) My[kNm] Mz[kNm] y[mm] z[mm] BUCK 1209.46 1548.79 163.2 137.7 B B 1214.43 0.00 0.0 159.1 COMB 0.00 1612.14 218.2 0.0 COMB 950.07 958.17 218.2 159.1 1099.51 1407.99 163.2 137.7 1104.03 0.00 0.0 159.1 COMB 0.00 1465.58 218.2 0.0 COMB 863.70 871.07 218.2 159.1
Design forces and moments (C/E = characteristic plastic/elastic, N[kN] Vy[kN] Vz[kN] Mt[kNm] C 8887.2 2948.64 2182.38 544.12 C -463.4 C 1573.5 E 8887.2 2004.15 1574.93 520.79 D 8079.3 2680.58 1983.99 494.65 D -421.3 D 1430.5 F 8079.3 1821.95 1431.75 473.45 Additional Design Data M periphery-O/-I deff [m2/m] [m2/m] [mm] 4.760 15.6 Thin elements Id. MNo y-B [mm] 101 1 -160.0 102 103 104 202 203 301 302 303 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 0.0 160.0 560.0 0.0 160.0 0.0 160.0 560.0
t-min [mm] 10.0
t-max SMP [mm] [o/o] 20.0 0.0
z-B [mm] 0.0 0.0 0.0 0.0 350.0 350.0 0.0 0.0 0.0
y-E [mm] 0.0 160.0 560.0 610.0 160.0 560.0 0.0 160.0 560.0
z-E [mm] 0.0 0.0 0.0 0.0 350.0 350.0 350.0 350.0 350.0
t [mm] 16.0 16.0 16.0 16.0 16.0 16.0 20.0 15.0 10.0
W-B/W-E [cm2] 1.94E+02 -8.02E+01 -8.02E+01 -4.59E+01 -4.59E+01 8.03E+01 8.03E+01 -5.47E+00 5.37E+01 3.05E+01 3.05E+01 -6.81E+01 -8.02E+01 5.37E+01 -4.59E+01 3.05E+01 8.03E+01 -6.81E+01
Tau-T/B [1/m3] 1.27E+01 1.37E+03 1.66E+02 6.52E+02 1.74E+02 -1.19E+03 1.27E+01 -2.34E+02 -1.66E+02 6.05E+02 -1.74E+02 6.91E+02 -1.39E+02 -6.61E+02 -2.05E+01 -4.26E+02 2.66E+02 1.46E+03
Tau-Vy/z [1/m2] 2.77E+01 2.89E+01 6.24E+01 -2.72E+01 6.91E+01 -5.15E+01 1.18E+01 -1.11E+01 5.18E+01 4.14E+01 5.95E+01 4.88E+01 2.91E+01 5.86E+01 -6.63E+00 7.37E+01 -4.42E+01 8.80E+01
xS free 0.12 0.12 0.09 0.04 0.03 0.20 free 0.12 0.09 0.04 0.03 0.05 0.05 0.05 0.05 0.05 0.05
Construction and Selected Result Points Txt. M y z 1/WMy,Mz 1/WT 1/WVy 1/WVz sig-p W0 sig/tau-d [mm] [mm] [1/m3] [1/m3] [1/m2] [1/m2] [MPa] [cm2] [MPa] OBEN 1 280.0 0.0 -203.0305 161.3251 67.2679 -27.589 0.0 -8.07 169.7 -47.9217 0.0000 0.0000 0.0000 t = 16.0 B4W0 98.0 STEG 1 160.0 170.0 17.2757 0.0000 0.0000 0.0000 0.0 -8.81 201.9 36.4214 -8.5836 -1.3463 73.5698 t = 15.0 expl 116.6 UNTE 1 280.0 350.0 235.0100 -161.325 58.9582 20.1523 0.0 0.94 99.9 -25.9195 0.0000 0.0000 0.0000 t = 16.0 B4W0 98.0
536
Version 16.13

DS-1 1 DS-2 1 DS-3 1 DS-4 1 EN 1 280.0 280.0 280.0 280.0 280.0 350.0 350.0 350.0 350.0 350.0 235.0100 -25.9195 235.0100 -25.9195 235.0100 -25.9195 235.0100 -25.9195 235.0100 -25.9195 -161.325 0.0000 -161.325 0.0000 -161.325 0.0000 -161.325 0.0000 -161.325 0.0000 58.9582 0.0000 58.9582 0.0000 58.9582 0.0000 58.9582 0.0000 58.9582 0.0000 20.1523 0.0000 20.1523 0.0000 20.1523 0.0000 20.1523 0.0000 20.1523 0.0000 0.0 t = 0.0 t = 0.0 t = 0.0 t = 0.0 t =
AQUA
0.94 16.0 WI 0.94 16.0 WII 0.94 16.0 WIII 0.94 16.0 KIII 0.94 16.0DIF 194.0 112.0 146.0 112.0 142.0 112.0 163.0 129.0 71.0 41.0
The full plastic internal forces are output in the first line as individual components with and without material safety factor, and the axial force / bending moment combinations are output in the following lines. The cross sections design values are really only of interest for composite cross sections. The following drawings show the shear stress distribution resulting from torsional moment and shear force as well as unit warping. The input for AQUP is:
PROG AQUP SECT 1 W SIZE LP SPLI 2X2 S MT 1.0 ; SECT S VY 1.0 ; SECT S VZ 1.0 ; SECT S MT2 1.0 ; SECT END
1 1 1 1
TAU TAU TAU TAU
Further graphics are created with the given input data.
Version 16.13
537
AQUA
Shear force and torsion
Warping
538
Version 16.13
AQUA
For this section eight stress points have been defined with a specification of the class and notchintensity according to DIN 15018. This allows the design for fatigue of a dynamic stress range in AQB.
PROG AQB HEAD FATIGUE STRESS CHECK ECHO STRE 3+8 S 1 1 0 N -300 MY 160 = = = N -300 MY -150 = = = N -50 MY 90 STRE K F END Stresses [MPa] Beam x[m] NoS
1 0.000
LC M A sigsig+ tau H sig-1- sig-1+ tau-Vz Q sig-2- sig-2+ tau-Vy 1 0 1 A -45.5 33.9 0.0 H -41.6 31.7 0.0 Q -4.3 -12.0 0.0 1 A -47.5 27.0 0.0 H 23.3 -45.4 0.0 Q -11.7 -4.4 0.0 1 A -22.4 22.3 0.0 H -20.2 21.1 0.0 Q 0.8 -3.6 0.0 MIN Vert OBEN -40.6 0.0 MAX Vert OBEN 22.4 0.0 DIF Vert OBEN 62.9 0.0 FAK Vert OBEN -0.55 1.00 DIN 4132/15018: zul sig-(fak) = 218.9 zul sig+(fak) = 206.9 MIN Vert UNTE -43.4 0.0 MAX Vert UNTE 29.5 0.0 DIF Vert UNTE 72.9 0.0 FAK Vert UNTE -0.68 1.00 DIN 4132/15018: zul sig-(fak) = 118.9 zul sig+(fak) = 114.5 MIN Vert DS-1 -43.4 0.0 MAX Vert DS-1 29.5 0.0 DIF Vert DS-1 72.9 0.0 FAK Vert DS-1 -0.68 1.00 DS 804 App. 6 : zul sig-(fak) = 111.3 zul sig+(fak) = 111.3
sig-I tau-T tau-T2 33.9 0.0 27.0 0.0 22.3 0.0 0.0 22.4 22.4 0.00
sig-II sig-s sig-W-45.5
sig-v dsig-s sig-W+ 45.5
N/Npl*
0.28
-47.5
47.5
0.26
-22.4
22.4
0.19
-40.6 0.0 40.6 0.00
19.6 40.6 21.0 0.48 0.185 0.108 19.8 43.4 23.6 0.46 0.365 0.258 19.8 43.4 23.6 0.46 0.389 0.265
utilisation utilisation 0.0 -43.4 29.5 0.0 29.5 43.4 0.00 0.00 utilisation utilisation 0.0 -43.4 29.5 0.0 29.5 43.4 0.00 0.00 utilisation utilisation
Version 16.13
539
AQUA
MIN MAX DIF FAK

Vert DS-2 -43.4 0.0 Vert DS-2 29.5 0.0 Vert DS-2 72.9 0.0 Vert DS-2 -0.68 1.00 DS 804 App. 6 : zul sig-(fak) = 84.9 zul sig+(fak) = 84.5 Vert DS-3 -43.4 0.0 Vert DS-3 29.5 0.0 Vert DS-3 72.9 0.0 Vert DS-3 -0.68 1.00 DS 804 App. 6 : zul sig-(fak) = 77.2 zul sig+(fak) = 77.7 Vert DS-4 -43.4 0.0 Vert DS-4 29.5 0.0 Vert DS-4 72.9 0.0 Vert DS-4 -0.68 1.00 DS 804 App. 6 Tab 32: zul sig-(fak) = 91.1 zul sig+(fak) = 91.1 Vert EN -43.4 0.0 Vert EN 29.5 0.0 Vert EN 72.9 0.0 Vert EN -0.68 1.00 zul delta-sig = 71.0 zul delta-tau = 41.0 0.0 29.5 29.5 0.00 -43.4 0.0 43.4 0.00 19.8 43.4 23.6 0.46 0.511 0.349 19.8 43.4 23.6 0.46 0.562 0.379 19.8 43.4 23.6 0.46 0.476 0.324 19.8 43.4 23.6 0.46 1.026 0.000
MIN MAX DIF FAK
utilisation utilisation 0.0 -43.4 29.5 0.0 29.5 43.4 0.00 0.00 utilisation utilisation 0.0 -43.4 29.5 0.0 29.5 43.4 0.00 0.00 utilisation utilisation 0.0 -43.4 29.5 0.0 29.5 43.4 0.00 0.00 utilisation utilisation
MIN MAX DIF FAK
MIN MAX DIF FAK
540
Version 16.13

5.8. Composite Section.
AQUA
The following cross section describes a square steel shape with concrete core (aqua5_composite.dat):
Composite cross section The steel is defined as a a hollow profile, then the concrete core is inserted.
PROG HEAD NORM ECHO CTRL CONC SECT POLY AQUA EXAMPLES COMPOSITE SECTIONS DIN 1045 FULL RFCS 2 ; CTRL STYP 3 ; CTRL SCUT 0 1 B 25 SCM 1.5 ; STEE 2 S 235 ; STEE 3 BST 500 1 2 $ Steel column with concrete centre OPZ 2 ; VERT 101 0.15 0.15 102 0.15 -0.15 POLY IPZ 2 ; VERT 103 0.14 0.14 104 0.14 -0.14 POLY OPZ 1 ; VERT 201 0.14 0.14 202 0.14 -0.14 CUT 1 YB -0.15 YE -0.14 MNO 2 1 YB -0.14 YE 0.14 MNO 1 MRF 3 1 YB 0.14 YE 0.15 MNO 2 END
The section values are all ideal section values. The values refer to the steel material, which was defined with the record SECT. The area is calculated as follows: Ai = Asteel + AconcEconc/Esteel = = 0.0116 + 0.07843/21 = 0.0228 One can not use this area as it is for the determination of the dead load, thus the program immediately calculates the dead load per unit length.
Version 16.13
541
AQUA

i = ( Asteelsteel + Aconcconc ) / Ai = = ( 0.011678.5 + 0.078425.0 ) = 2.871
With ECHO FULL the material values and the additional static properties of cross section, the partial cross sections, the design values of cross section and the design forces and moments are printed additionally to the static properties of cross section. Since a composite cross section is concerned, AQUA determines the latter for positive and negative moments, because these are different in non symmetric cross sections.
No. 1 B 25 (DIN 1045) -------------------------------------------------------------------------------Youngs-modulus 30000 [MPa] Safetyfactor 1.50 [-] Poisson-Ratio 0.20 [-] Strength fc 17.50 [MPa] Shear-modulus 12500 [MPa] Nomin. strength fcn 25.00 [MPa] Compression modulus 16667 [MPa] Tens. strength fctm 2.56 [MPa] Weight 25.0 [kN/m3] 5 % t.strength fctk 2.14 [MPa] Weight buoyancy 25.0 [kN/m3] 95 % t.strength fctk 3.08 [MPa] Temp.elongat.coeff. 1.00E-05 [-] Bond strength fbd 1.80 [MPa] Fatigue strength 0.00 [MPa] Stress-Strain for serviceability eps[o/oo] sig-m[MPa] E-t[MPa] Is also extended beyond the 0.000 0.00 30000 defined stress range -0.583 -17.50 0 -1000.000 -17.50 0 Safetyfactor 1.50 Stress-Strain for ultimate load eps[o/oo] sig-u[MPa] E-t[MPa] Is only valid within the defined 0.000 0.00 17500 stress range -2.000 -17.50 0 -3.500 -17.50 0 Safetyfactor 1.50 No. 2 S 235 (DIN 18800) -------------------------------------------------------------------------------Youngs-modulus 210000 [MPa] Safetyfactor 1.10 [-] Poisson-Ratio 0.30 [-] Yield stress fy 240.00 [MPa] Shear-modulus 81000 [MPa] Compr.yield val. fyc 240.00 [MPa] Compression modulus 171821 [MPa] Tens. strength ft 360.00 [MPa] Weight 78.5 [kN/m3] Compr. strength fc 360.00 [MPa] Weight buoyancy 78.5 [kN/m3] Ultim. plast. strain 0.00 [o/oo] Temp.elongat.coeff. 1.20E-05 [-] relative bond coeff. 0.00 [-] max. thickness 40.00 [mm] EC2 bondcoeff. K1 0.00 [-] Hardening modulus 0.00 [MPa] Proportional limit 240.00 [MPa] Dynamic stress range 0.00 [MPa]
542
Version 16.13

Stress-Strain for serviceability Is also extended beyond the defined stress range eps[o/oo] sig-m[MPa] 1000.000 240.00 1.143 240.00 0.000 0.00 -1.143 -240.00 -1000.000 -240.00 Safetyfactor eps[o/oo] sig-u[MPa] 1000.000 240.00 1.143 240.00 0.000 0.00 -1.143 -240.00 -1000.000 -240.00 Safetyfactor
AQUA
E-t[MPa] 0 210000 210000 0 0 1.10 E-t[MPa] 0 210000 210000 0 0 1.10
Stress-Strain for ultimate load Is also extended beyond the defined stress range
Cross section No.
Static properties of cross section MNo A[cm2] Ay/Az/Ayz Iy/Iz/Iyz MNs It[cm4] [cm2] [cm4] 2 228.00 173.99 23596.0 39715.8 173.99 23596.0 250.52
ys/zs [mm] 0.0 0.0
y/z-sc [mm] 0.0 0.0
modules [N/mm2] 210000 81000
gam [kN/m] 2.87
Additional static properties of cross section Alfa-T ymin zmin hymin AK MB Tau-T Tau-Vy ymax zmax hzmin AB Tau-B Tau-Vz [mm] [mm] [mm] [cm2] [1/m3] [1/m2] 1.2E-05 -150.0 -150.0 8.947E+02 4.645E+02 1.709E+01 150.0 150.0 7.840E+02 6.751E+01 Section values for warping Wmin[cm2] Wmax[cm2] CM[cm6] -21.80 22.28 0.00
CMS[cm4] ASwyy[cm6] ASwzz[cm6] 0.0 294.50 294.50
ry[mm]
rz[mm]
Partial cross sections MNo A[cm2] Ay/Az/Ayz Iy/Iz/Iyz MNs It[cm4] [cm2] [cm4] 2 116.00 50.27 16278.7 24414.1 50.27 16278.7 1 784.00 99154.7 801.70 801.70 51221.3 51221.3
ys/zs [mm] 0.0 0.0 0.0 0.0
modules [N/mm2] 210000 81000 30000 12500
gam [kN/m] 0.91
1.96
Version 16.13
543
AQUA
Design values of cross section MNo A[cm2] Ay/Az/Ayz Iy/Iz/Iyz MNs It[cm4] [cm2] [cm4] 2 198.13 141.00 21644.7 35635.3 141.00 21644.7

ys/zs [mm] 0.0 0.0 modules [N/mm2] 190909 73636 gam [kN/m] 1.56
Design forces and moments (C/E = characteristic plastic/elastic, N[kN] Vy[kN] Vz[kN] Mt[kNm] C 2784.0 696.57 696.57 409.27 C -686.0 759.07 C -686.0 759.07 C -4156.0 821.57 821.57 409.27 C -686.0 759.07 C -686.0 759.07 E 5472.0 1928.70 1928.70 298.32 E -2793.0 1829.47 1829.47 152.68 D 2530.9 633.24 633.24 372.07 D -457.3 674.91 D -457.3 674.91 D -3445.6 746.88 746.88 372.07 D -457.3 674.91 D -457.3 674.91 F 4974.5 1753.37 1753.37 271.20 F -1862.0 1663.16 1663.16 138.80 Additional Design Data M periphery-O/-I deff [m2/m] [m2/m] [mm] 2.320 1.120 19.7 2 1.200 1.120 19.3 1 1.120 140.0
D=plast.Design, F=elast. Design) My[kNm] Mz[kNm] y[mm] z[mm] BUCK 334.67 334.67 47.3 -47.3 b b 350.90 0.00 0.0 0.0 COMB 0.00 350.90 0.0 0.0 COMB -334.67 -334.67 -47.3 47.3 -350.90 0.00 0.0 0.0 COMB 0.00 -350.90 0.0 0.0 COMB 206.47 206.47 0.0 0.0 -206.47 -206.47 0.0 0.0 298.64 298.64 38.1 -38.1 307.36 0.00 0.0 0.0 COMB 0.00 307.36 0.0 0.0 COMB -298.64 -298.64 -38.1 38.1 -307.36 0.00 0.0 0.0 COMB 0.00 -307.36 0.0 0.0 COMB 137.64 137.64 0.0 0.0 -137.64 -137.64 0.0 0.0
t-min [mm]
t-max SMP [mm] [o/o] 0.0 0.0 0.0
thet-p [tm2/m] 0.051 0.026 0.026
thet-y [tm2/m] 0.026 0.013 0.013
thet-z [tm2/m] 0.026 0.013 0.013
thet-yz [tm2/m]
Although the shear displacement areas are not determined in this example, the plastic shear forces are evaluated. The above table is a good example of the fact that the elastic forces are not a good measure for the design, this table is a good example. On the one hand the compressive force is limited by an early reaching of the yield stress of the steel, and on the other hand the ideal cross section creates an incorrect stress pattern under tension. If one has to insert a steel shape within a concrete, it is mandatory to define the steel shape as polygon (DTYP S). AQUA will then find the parts of the concrete to spare automatically. Thus for a two sided fillet of a composite doubleTbeam
544
Version 16.13
AQUA
this can be easily done by putting the steel shape within the bounding concrete polygon:
SECT 4 2 3 TITL 'STEEL BEAM WITH FILLETS' POLY RECT MNO 1 DY 0.310 0.340 PROF 1 HEM 300 DTYP S CUT 1 YB -0.200 YE 0.100 MNO 1 MRF 3 1 YB -0.100 YE 0.000 MNO 1 MRF 3 1 YB -0.020 YE 0.020 MNO 2 1 YB 0.000 YE 0.100 MNO 1 MRF 3 1 YB 0.100 YE 0.200 MNO 1 MRF 3
An other feature for composite sections are construction stages. With the definition of a CS record one may subdivide the sections for this purpose. The usage of the CSsections is usually defined within a group record.
SECT 8 2 TITL 'COMPOUND WITH CS-DEFINITIONS' CS 10 TITL 'Steel beam' PROF NO TYPE Z1 ZM DTYP REF MNO=2 1 heb 500 190 S UM CS 12 TITL 'In situ concrete' POLY O MNO 1 VERT NO Y Z TYPE PHI
Version 16.13
545
AQUA
1 2 3 4 1.25 -1.25 -1.25 1.25 0 0 0.19 0.19 O O O O 10 10
Cross-sections static properties No MNo A[m2] Ay/Az/Ayz Iy/Iz/Iyz MNs It[m4] [m2] [m4] 8 = COMPOUND WITH CS-DEFINITIONS = HE 500 B = Composit with materials: 2 2 9.1721E-02 6.620E-02 3.377E-03 1.002E-03 9.971E-03 3.547E-02 8.1 = CS 10 Steel beam 2 2.3864E-02 1.494E-02 1.072E-03 5.434E-06 7.058E-03 1.262E-04 8.2 = CS 12 In situ concrete 2 9.1721E-02 6.620E-02 3.377E-03 1.002E-03 9.971E-03 3.547E-02
ys/zs [m]
y/z-sc [m]
modules [MPa]
gam [kN/m]
1 0.000 0.185 0.000 0.440 0.000 0.185
0.000 0.109 0.000 0.440 0.000 0.109
210000 81000 210000 81000 210000 81000
13.75
1.87
13.75
546
Version 16.13

Aqua 1

Uploaded by

Document Information

Copyright

Available Formats

Share this document

Share or Embed Document

Sharing Options

Did you find this document useful?

Is this content inappropriate?

Copyright:

Available Formats

Aqua 1

Uploaded by

Copyright:

Available Formats

AQUA

Materials and Cross Sections

E SOFiSTiK AG, Oberschleissheim, 2012

Materials and Cross Sections

Materials and Cross Sections

Materials and Cross Sections

Materials and Cross Sections

Materials and Cross Sections

Materials and Cross Sections

Types of sections Static Properties of Cross Sections

Standard Cross Sections

Materials and Cross Sections

Freely Defined Solid Cross Sections

Freely Defined FE Cross Sections

Materials and Cross Sections

Creating variants of sections

Materials and Cross Sections

Materials and Cross Sections

Holes and Composite Sections

Materials and Cross Sections

Materials and Cross Sections

Materials and Cross Sections

Materials and Cross Sections

Warping and Shear Stresses

Materials and Cross Sections

Materials and Cross Sections

The torsional moment of inertia according to the displacement method It is derived by It +

Materials and Cross Sections

Equivalent Hollow Cross Sections

Materials and Cross Sections

Materials and Cross Sections

Materials and Cross Sections

Materials and Cross Sections

Materials and Cross Sections

Materials and Cross Sections

Materials and Cross Sections

Materials and Cross Sections

force/moment combination. Thus the limiting value has to be found iteratively.

The following program limits hold:

Materials and Cross Sections

Materials and Cross Sections

Materials and Cross Sections

Materials and Cross Sections

Materials and Cross Sections

Materials and Cross Sections

NMAT BMAT HMAT CONC

Materials and Cross Sections

SCIT TUBE CABL

Materials and Cross Sections

- - VERT NO - CIRC - NEFF - CUT NO TYPE NO

WTM VYFK TANA

YM REF VB2 SIGY REFD LEV ZMAX AG

ZM MREF VT2 TEFF REFS TITL

- SPT - SFLA - WPAR - WIND

Materials and Cross Sections

- CRF - CURF TVAR INTE IMPO EXPO ECHO

NO H NAME NO MAT MAT OPT

Materials and Cross Sections

Materials and Cross Sections

CTRL Control of Analysis

Materials and Cross Sections

Materials and Cross Sections

Materials and Cross Sections

Materials and Cross Sections